JP7147893B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine such as a pachinko machine.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, as this type of gaming machine, for example, there is a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine equipped with a holding device for holding game balls hit onto a game board having a game area (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-95235 (page 10, FIG. 2)

However, the conventional example having such a configuration has the following problems.

In other words, there is a problem that the conventional gaming machine may not be able to improve the interest of the game.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that enhances the interest of a game.

In order to achieve these objects, the present invention has the following configuration.
That is, the invention according to claim 1 is
a game board having a game area in which game balls can flow down;
a starting ball entry means capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area;
A closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can be entered at least when a right-handed game is performed, and a game ball is difficult to enter, and a game ball is easier to enter than the closed state. a variable entry means that changes between an open state and
ball entry detection means for detecting a gaming ball that has entered the starting ball entry means;
A lottery means for performing a lottery capable of determining whether or not to cause a special game state based on the detection of the game ball by the entering ball detection means,
A gaming machine that executes a game a plurality of times in which the variable ball entry means changes between the open state and the closed state as the special game state when the result of the lottery is a specific result,
a first state in which at least some of the game balls launched toward the variable ball entry means can be positioned at a predetermined position so as not to flow down to a specific flow path at a predetermined timing; a second state capable of causing the game ball positioned at the predetermined position to flow down to a specific flow path;
a specific area provided at a position where it is difficult for a game ball to enter unless it has flowed down to the specific flow path, and where a predetermined game value can be obtained based on the entry of the game ball;
an operation means for receiving an operation by a player;
an operation effect control means for controlling a predetermined effect in which a mode changes when a predetermined condition is satisfied by a predetermined operation of the operation means by the player;
A first position that makes it difficult for the game ball that has flowed down to the specific flow path to enter the specific area, and a second position that makes it easy for the game ball that has flowed down to the specific flow path to enter the specific area. a distribution member on which a distribution operation is performed;
Distributing operation control means for controlling the distributing operation of the distributing member,
The operation effect control means, during the special game state, for the operation means to indicate the timing at which the distribution member is positioned at the first position and the timing at which the distribution member is positioned at the second position in a predetermined dynamic display mode. It is characterized in that control is performed such that a display requesting a predetermined operation is displayed on the display means a predetermined time before the timing at which the distribution member comes to the second position .

[Action and Effect] According to the first aspect of the invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

1 is a schematic front view of a pachinko machine according to Embodiment 1 of the present invention; FIG. FIG. 4 is a front view showing the configuration of the game board attached to the inner frame; 3 is an enlarged view of the lower right game area of the game board shown in FIG. 2 for explaining the holding device; FIG. FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view showing a state in which a decorative plate is removed from the retaining device shown in FIG. 3; 5 is an enlarged view of the vicinity of the sorting movable valve shown in FIG. 4; FIG. It is a timing chart for demonstrating the displacement of a sorting movable valve. It is a rear view showing the configuration of the pachinko machine. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. 9A and 9B are explanatory diagrams showing the display contents of the third symbol display device, FIG. 9A shows a state in which the main decorative symbols are aligned, and FIG. 9B shows a state in which the sub-decorative symbols are aligned. It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline|summary of the various counters used for game control. 4 is a flowchart showing main processing by a main controller; 10 is a flowchart showing normal processing; It is a flowchart which shows a 1st design variation process. It is a flow chart which shows fluctuation start processing. 4 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing; It is a flow chart which shows starting prize-winning processing. 4 is a flowchart showing NMI interrupt processing; It is a flow chart which shows the main processing by a payout control device. It is a flow chart which shows payout control processing. It is a flow chart which shows prize ball control processing. It is a flow chart which shows ball rental control processing. 4 is a flowchart showing an example of main processing executed by a CPU of a sub control device; 4 is a flowchart showing an example of normal processing executed by a CPU of a sub control device; It is a flow chart showing a big winning opening opening and closing process by the main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the liquid crystal production|presentation execution management process by a sub-control device. It is a flowchart which shows the opening-and-closing mode (jackpot) display setting process by a sub-control device. 4 is a flowchart showing music start timing adjustment processing by a sub-control device; It is a flow chart which shows game processing during a round by a sub-control device. It is a timing chart of movable pattern suggestion production example 1 showing the relationship between the movable timing of the distribution movable valve 409 in the jackpot state and the suggestion timing of the movable pattern suggestion production. It is a timing chart of the example 2 of movable pattern suggestion production|presentation in a jackpot state. It is a timing chart of the example 3 of movable pattern suggestion production|presentation in a jackpot state. It is a timing chart of the example 4 of movable pattern suggestion production|presentation in a jackpot state. 9 is a timing chart showing an example of suggestion timing and operation timing of a second frame button; FIG. 34 is a timing chart continued from FIG. 33; FIG. FIG. 35 is a timing chart continued from FIG. 34; FIG. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing a movable pattern suggestive effect displayed on the third symbol display device during the jackpot state. 37(c) and (d) are diagrams showing the movable pattern suggestive effect following FIG. 36. FIG. 37(e)-(j) are diagrams showing the movable pattern suggestive effect following FIG. 37. FIG. 38(k)-(p) are diagrams showing the movable pattern suggestive effect following FIG. 38. FIG. It is a diagram showing the lower right game area of the game board during the execution of the movable pattern suggestion effect in the jackpot state. 40. It is a figure which shows a mode that the game ball discharged|emitted from the holding|maintenance apparatus shown in FIG. 40 enters a general prize-winning hole. FIG. 41 is a cross-sectional view showing a state in which a decorative plate is removed from the retaining device of FIG. 40; FIG. 42 is a cross-sectional view showing a state in which a decorative plate is removed from the retaining device of FIG. 41; 41 is a diagram showing a lower right game area similar to FIG. 40; FIG. 45. It is a figure which shows a mode that the game ball discharged|emitted from the holding|maintenance apparatus shown in FIG. 44 does not enter a general prize-winning hole. FIG. 45 is a cross-sectional view showing a state in which a decorative plate is removed from the retaining device of FIG. 44; FIG. 46 is a cross-sectional view showing a state in which a decorative plate is removed from the retaining device of FIG. 45; 9 is a flowchart showing a variable display mode setting process by a sub-controller; It is a flowchart which shows the music start timing adjustment process by a sub-control apparatus during reach production|presentation. It is a flow chart which shows processing during reach production by a sub-control device. 10 is a timing chart of movable pattern suggestion effect example 1 showing the relationship between the move timing of the sorting movable valve during the ready-to-win effect and the suggest timing of the move pattern suggest effect. FIG. 13 is a timing chart of example 2 of movable pattern suggestion effect during ready-to-win effect; FIG. FIG. 11 is a timing chart of example 3 of movable pattern suggestion effect during ready-to-win effect; FIG. FIG. 13 is a timing chart of example 4 of movable pattern suggestion effect during ready-to-win effect; FIG. It is a diagram showing a movable pattern suggestion effect displayed on the third symbol display device during the ready-to-win effect. It is a diagram showing the lower right game area of the game board in a state where the game ball is reserved. It is a diagram showing a lower right game area of the game board in a state in which no game ball is reserved. 11 is a front view showing the configuration of the game board attached to the inner frame in Example 3. FIG. It is a flow chart showing the music start timing adjustment processing during the ready-to-win effect in the normal game state by the sub-control device. It is a table for determining the start timing of the music used for the ready-to-win effect and the music used for the ready-to-win effect. It is a timing chart of an example of movable pattern suggestive effect showing the relationship between the movable timing of the distribution movable valve during the ready-to-win effect in the normal game state and the suggestive timing of the movable pattern suggestive effect. FIG. 12 is a front view showing the configuration of the game board of Example 4 attached to the inner frame; FIG. 11 is a front view showing the configuration of the game board of Example 5 in a state of being attached to the inner frame; FIG. 11 is a front view showing the configuration of the game board of Example 6 attached to the inner frame; It is an enlarged view of the lower right game area in the game board of Example 6. 9 is a flowchart showing a variable display mode setting process by a sub-controller; It is a flowchart of the lower limit start time setting process during the ready-to-win effect by the sub-control device. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing movable pattern suggestive effect processing based on full tank detection performed by a sub-control device; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing a movable pattern suggestive rendering process based on the lower limit start time performed by the sub-controller. 10 is a flowchart showing music switching timing adjustment processing based on full tank detection performed by a sub-control device. 10 is a flowchart showing music switching timing adjustment processing based on the lower limit start time performed by the sub-control device. It is a table for determining the time of the adjustment effect and the music during the movable pattern suggestion effect process. It is a table for determining the lower limit start time and the music during the movable pattern suggestion rendering process. It is a timing chart of example 1 of movable pattern suggestive effect by full tank detection during ready-to-win effect in normal game state. It is a timing chart of example 2 of movable pattern suggestive effect by the lower limit start time during the ready-to-win effect in the normal game state. It is a flow chart of the opening and closing mode (jackpot) display setting process by the sub-control device. 11 is a flow chart showing a movable pattern suggestive rendering process by a lower limit start round performed by a sub-controller; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing music switching timing adjustment processing in a lower limit start round by a sub-control device; FIG. It is a table for determining the time of the adjustment effect and the music during the movable pattern suggestion effect process. It is a timing chart of an example of a movable pattern suggestive effect showing the relationship between the movable timing of the sorting movable valve based on full-tank detection during the jackpot effect and the suggestive timing of the movable pattern suggestive effect. FIG. 81 is a timing chart continued from FIG. 80; FIG. It is a flow chart of the opening and closing mode (jackpot) display setting process by the sub-control device. FIG. 10 is a flowchart of difficulty level selection processing of a movable pattern suggestion effect by a sub-control device; FIG. (a) to (c) are a series of timing charts showing the timing of the movement pattern of the sorting movable valve 409 and the suggestive image display. 84(a) to (c) are a series of timing charts showing the timing of the movable pattern of the sorting movable valve different from that of FIG. 84 and the suggestive image display. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing a movable pattern suggestive effect displayed on the third symbol display device during the jackpot state. 87(a) and (b) are diagrams showing the movable pattern suggesting effect following FIG. 86. FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing normal processing by the main controller of the ninth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 89 is a flow chart of the operation cycle change processing of the distribution movable valve in the normal processing of FIG. 88; 29 is a flow chart showing opening/closing mode (jackpot) display setting processing by the sub-control device of the ninth embodiment. It is a table for determining the adjustment time and the music during the movable pattern suggestion rendering process. It is a timing chart of an example of a movable pattern suggestive effect showing the relationship between the movable timing of the distribution movable valve and the suggestive timing of the movable pattern suggestive effect in the 8-round jackpot state. 20 is a flow chart showing normal processing by the main controller of the tenth embodiment; FIG. 94 is a flow chart showing movement pattern change processing of the diverting movable valve in the normal processing of FIG. 93; FIG. It is a timing chart of an example of a movable pattern suggestive effect showing the relationship between the movable timing of the distribution movable valve and the suggestive timing of the movable pattern suggestive effect in the jackpot state in the variable probability state. FIG. 96 is a timing chart of an example of a movable pattern suggestion effect following FIG. 95; FIG. It is a table for determining the time of the adjustment effect and the music during the movable pattern suggestion effect. FIG. 97 is a table following FIG.

This specification also discloses an invention relating to the following game machine.
In the following embodiments, unless otherwise specified, the up, down, left, right, front and back (or back, front) directions are based on the front view of the game board.

The present invention relates to a game machine such as a pachinko machine, and more particularly to a game machine provided with a holding device for holding game balls.

Conventionally, as this type of gaming machine, for example, there is a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine equipped with a holding device for holding a game ball hit onto a game board having a game area. In this type of gaming machine, when the game ball is held in the holding device and the player operates the release operation button, the holding by the holding device is released and the game ball released from the holding device wins a jackpot. There is one that is configured so that the ball enters a general winning slot that does not participate in the lottery (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-95235 (page 10, FIG. 2)).

However, the conventional example having such a configuration has the following problems.
That is, in the conventional gaming machine, when a game ball is held in the holding device, the player operates the hold release button in order to allow the held game ball to enter the general winning hole. There is no merit of holding game balls in the device. On the contrary, even if the game ball is not held in the holding device, the game ball hit into the game area aiming at the starting prize winning hole or the like should enter the general winning hole directly. There is a problem that it may be troublesome to operate the reserve release button every time a game ball is reserved in the reserve device.

This is also a problem that occurs in a type of gaming machine in which a game ball held in a holding device is entered into a starting winning hole or a big winning hole.

The following inventions according to (0) (A1) (B1), (C0), (C1), (D1), and (E1) have been made in view of such circumstances. To provide a game machine which enhances the merit of holding a ball and enhances the interest of a game using a holding device.

(A1) A game board having a game area in which game balls can flow down;
a starting ball entry means capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area;
A closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can be entered at least when a right-handed game is performed, and a game ball is difficult to enter, and a game ball is easier to enter than the closed state. a variable entry means that changes between an open state and
ball entry detection means for detecting a gaming ball that has entered the starting ball entry means;
A lottery means for performing a lottery capable of determining whether or not to cause a special game state based on the detection of the game ball by the entering ball detection means,
A gaming machine that executes a game a plurality of times in which the variable ball entry means changes between the open state and the closed state as the special game state when the result of the lottery is a specific result,
a holding device that changes between a holding state in which at least some of the game balls launched toward the variable ball entering means can be held, and a release state in which the holding of the game balls is released;
a prize-winning opening provided at a position where it is difficult to enter a game ball unless the game ball has been released from the holding device in the game area, and a predetermined game value can be obtained based on the entry of the game ball;
an operation means for receiving a player's operation, including an operation for changing the holding device from the holding state to the released state;
A sorting operation is performed to change between a first position that makes it difficult for the game balls whose reservation is canceled to enter the winning opening and a second position that makes it easy for the game balls whose reservation is canceled to enter the winning opening. a distribution member;
Distribution operation control means for controlling the distribution operation of the distribution member;
An effect including display of an operation request for requesting an operation of the operation means, wherein the special game includes an operation effect in which the timing of displaying the operation request is matched with the timing when the distribution member comes to the second position. and operation presentation control means for controlling display on the display means during the state.

According to the invention described in (A1) above, the player operates the operating means in accordance with the timing at which the operation request is displayed in the operation effect displayed on the display means during the special game state. The holding device can be changed from the holding state to the released state in accordance with the timing when the dividing member comes to the second position. As a result, the game ball ejected from the holding device at the timing when the operation request is displayed easily enters the winning opening via the sorting member at the second position. On the other hand, even if the operation means receives the player's operation at a time other than this timing, the timing at which the holding device changes from the holding state to the release state does not match the timing at which the distribution member comes to the second position. The game balls discharged from the holding device are less likely to enter the prize winning opening. Therefore, the player actively shoots game balls during the special game state, actively participates in the operation performance displayed on the display means during the special game state, and the operation request is displayed during the operation performance. If the operation means can be operated well in time, the number of game balls held in the holding device is added to the game value that the player can enjoy based on the ball entering the variable ball entry means during the special game state. A predetermined game value corresponding to the number of game balls can be entered into the winning hole during the special game state. As a result, it is possible to increase the merit of holding the game ball in the holding device, and to improve the interest of the game using the holding device.

In addition, the holding device can hold some of the game balls launched toward the variable ball entering means in the special game state. As a result, the player can keep some of the shot game balls in the holding device by continuing to shoot the game balls toward the variable ball entry means during the special game state. In order to make the game ball held in the holding device enter a prize winning opening other than the variable ball entry means, it is necessary to operate the operation means well in accordance with the timing when the operation request is displayed during the operation presentation. Therefore, it is possible to impart technical intervention to the winning of prizes other than the variable ball-entering means during the special game state.

Note that the right-handed game is to perform an operation of shooting a game ball so that the game ball flows down the right side of the game area when viewed from the front of the gaming machine.

(A2) In the gaming machine described in (A1) above,
display effect control means for selecting a predetermined display effect from among a plurality of patterns of display effects displayed on the display means during the special game state and displaying the display effect on the display means;
A gaming machine, wherein the operation effect is displayed on the display means as part of the predetermined display effect.

According to the invention described in (A2) above, the operation effect is displayed on the display means as part of a predetermined display effect selected from among a plurality of patterns of display effects displayed on the display means during the special game state. be done. As a result, the player has a chance (as an operation effect) to obtain a predetermined game value during the display effect displayed on the display means during the special game state, so that the player is more interested in the special game effect. can be improved.

(A3) In the gaming machine according to (A1) or (A2) above,
The gaming machine, wherein the operation effect control means displays the operation effect on the display means based on a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the special game state.

According to the invention described in (A3) above, for example, if the predetermined time is the minimum required time for the game balls to be held in the holding device up to the upper limit number or a number close to the upper limit number, the game balls are held in the holding device Since the player can participate in the operation presentation in the state that is sufficiently suspended, the interest of the game using the suspending device can be improved.

(A4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (A1) to (A3),
The timing at which the distribution member comes to the second position is a plurality of times during one operation performance,
The game machine, wherein the operation effect control means displays the operation request multiple times in accordance with the timing when the distribution member, which is present multiple times, comes to the second position.

According to the invention described in (A4) above, the timing at which the distribution member comes to the second position is multiple times during one operation effect, and the distribution member comes to the second position a plurality of times. Since the operation effect in which the operation request is displayed multiple times is displayed on the display means, the player needs to operate the operation means multiple times in accordance with the multiple times the operation request is displayed. This allows the player to actively participate in the operation presentation displayed on the display means.

(A5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (A1) to (A4),
The display effect and the operation effect are effects accompanied by music reproduction,
part of the timing at which the distribution member comes to the second position matches the rhythm of the predetermined part of the music;
The game machine, wherein the display effect displays the operation request in time with the rhythm of a predetermined portion of the music.

According to the invention described in (A5) above, the display effect and the operation effect are effects accompanied by music reproduction, and part of the timing at which the distribution member comes to the second position is the rhythm of the predetermined part of the music. The display effect is to display the operation request in time with the rhythm of the music. As a result, the player can actively participate in the operation performance displayed on the display means while enjoying the action of operating the operation means in accordance with the operation request displayed in time with the rhythm of the music. can.

(A6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (A1) to (A5),
The distribution operation control means controls the distribution operation of the distribution member so as to repeat the distribution operation at a fixed movable cycle,
The operation effect control means is configured to control the timing at which the game ball that is released from the holding of the holding device reaches the distribution member when the operation means receives the operation of the player at the timing at which the operation request is displayed; A gaming machine, wherein the operation effect is displayed on the display means so as to match the timing when the distribution member comes to the second position.

According to the invention described in (A6) above, the sorting member repeats the sorting operation at a constant movable cycle, but when the operation means receives the player's operation at the timing when the operation request is displayed, Since the operation effect is displayed on the display means so that the timing when the game ball, which is released from the holding of the holding device, reaches the distribution member and the timing when the distribution member comes to the second position, the operation request is made. If the player operates the operation means at the displayed timing, the timing when the game balls that are released from the holding of the holding device reach the distribution member and the timing when the distribution member comes to the second position are matched. performance can be realized.

(A7) In the gaming machine described in (A6) above,
When it is a predetermined time from the timing when the holding of the holding device is canceled to the timing when the game ball discharged from the holding device reaches the distribution member due to the cancellation of the holding,
A gaming machine, wherein the operation effect control means displays the operation request a predetermined time before the timing at which the distribution member comes to the second position.

According to the invention described in (A7) above, the game ejected from the holding device by canceling the holding for a predetermined time (from the timing when the holding of the holding device is released) than the timing when the distribution member comes to the second position Since the operation request is displayed before the timing at which the ball reaches the sorting member, the hold of the holding device is canceled even though the player operates the operation means at the timing when the operation request is displayed. It is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the timing when the game ball reaches the distributing member does not match the timing when the distributing member comes to the second position.

(A8) In the gaming machine according to (A6) or (A7),
The game machine, wherein the operation effect control means adjusts the start timing of the display effect in the special game state.

According to the invention described in (A8) above, the operation effect control means adjusts the start timing of the display effect in the special game state. In other words, the start timing of the display effect is determined according to the timing of establishment of the start condition based on the detection of the entering ball by the predetermined entering means, but (if there is suspension of the variable display, However, since the movable member repeats the sorting operation at a constant movable period, if the display effect is started simply according to the timing when the start condition is satisfied, When the operation means receives the player's operation at the timing when the operation request is displayed, the game balls are released from the hold of the holding device, and the timing when the game ball reaches the distribution member, and the timing when the distribution member comes to the second position. may not match. Therefore, by adjusting the start timing of the display effect in the special game state so that the two timings are matched by the operation effect control means, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the two timings do not match.

(A9) In the gaming machine according to any one of (A1) to (A8),
A gaming machine, wherein the sorting member performs the sorting action in a manner that is difficult for a player to visually recognize.

According to the invention described in (A9) above, the distribution member performs the distribution operation in a manner that is difficult for the player to visually recognize. It becomes difficult to release the holding of the game ball at the timing when the member changes from the first position to the second position.

(A10) In the gaming machine described in (A9) above,
A game machine, wherein the mode in which the sorting motion is difficult for the player to visually recognize is a mode in which the sorting member moves faster than the motions of the other motion members.

According to the invention described in (A10) above, the aspect in which the sorting motion is difficult for the player to visually recognize is the aspect in which the sorting member operates faster than the motion of the other motion member. Even a player who is accustomed to the operation speed of (1) will find it difficult to release the holding of the game ball at the timing when the distribution member changes from the first position to the second position.

(A11) In the gaming machine according to (A9) or (A10),
The form in which the sorting operation is difficult for the player to visually recognize means that the sorting member is easily visible from the front side of the holding device when viewed from the front of the game machine. A gaming machine characterized in that it is a mode in which a member that lowers is arranged.

According to the invention described in the above (A11), the mode in which the sorting operation is difficult for the player to visually recognize is the state in which the holding device is positioned on the front side of the holding device when viewed from the front of the gaming machine, and from the front side of the holding device when viewed from the front of the gaming machine. It is a mode in which a member that reduces the visibility of the distribution member is arranged. As a result, it becomes difficult to visually recognize whether the distribution member located behind the member is in the first position or the second position, so the timing when the distribution member is in the second position and the timing when the game ball is released from the hold are determined. becomes difficult to match.

(A12) In the gaming machine according to any one of (A9) to (A11),
A gaming machine, wherein the aspect in which the sorting operation is difficult for the player to visually recognize is an aspect in which the member that reduces the visibility is operated.

According to the invention described in the above (A12), the aspect in which the sorting operation is difficult for the player to visually recognize is an aspect in which the member that reduces the visibility is operated. Since it becomes difficult to visually recognize whether the distributing member is at the first position or the second position, it becomes difficult to match the timing when the distributing member is at the second position and the timing when the game ball is released from the hold.

(A13) In the gaming machine according to any one of (A9) to (A12),
The mode in which the sorting operation is difficult for the player to visually recognize is that a light emitting means for emitting light from the back side of the sorting member is provided on the back side of the holding device when viewed from the front of the game machine, and the light emitting means emits light. A gaming machine characterized in that it is a mode for playing.

According to the invention described in the above (A13), the aspect in which the sorting operation is difficult for the player to visually recognize is the light emission that emits light from the back side of the sorting member on the back side of the holding device when viewed from the front of the game machine. A means is provided, and the light-emitting means emits light. As a result, it becomes difficult to visually recognize whether the position of the distribution member is the first position or the second position due to the light emitted from the back side of the distribution member. It becomes difficult to match the timing of canceling the hold of

(B1) a game board having a game area in which game balls can flow down;
a starting ball entry means capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area;
A closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can be entered at least when a right-handed game is performed, and a game ball is difficult to enter, and a game ball is easier to enter than the closed state. a variable entry means that changes between an open state and
ball entry detection means for detecting a gaming ball that has entered the starting ball entry means;
A lottery means for performing a lottery capable of determining whether or not to generate an advantageous game state based on the detection of the game ball by the entering ball detection means,
Symbols are variably displayed in a mode according to the result of the lottery by the lottery means,
When the result of the lottery is a specific result, as the advantageous game state, a game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state occurs by playing the right-handed game,
A gaming machine that switches to a gaming state in which a left-handed game is performed after the advantageous gaming state ends,
a holding device that changes between a holding state capable of holding at least the game ball fired during the right-handed game and a release state in which the holding of the game ball is released;
a prize-winning opening provided at a position where it is difficult to enter a game ball unless the game ball has been released from the holding device in the game area, and a predetermined game value can be obtained based on the entry of the game ball;
an operation means for receiving a player's operation, including an operation for changing the holding device from the holding state to the released state;
A sorting operation is performed to change between a first position that makes it difficult for the game balls whose reservation is canceled to enter the winning opening and a second position that makes it easy for the game balls whose reservation is canceled to enter the winning opening. a distribution member;
Distribution operation control means for controlling the distribution operation of the distribution member;
The effect includes displaying an operation request for requesting operation of the operation means, and the operation effect is set so that the timing of displaying the operation request is matched with the timing when the distribution member comes to the second position. and an operation effect control means for controlling display on a display means based on establishment of a predetermined condition in a game state in which the left-handed game is performed after the game state ends.

According to the invention described in (B1) above, if the player shoots game balls with right hand during an advantageous game state, some of the game balls that have been shot are held in the holding device. Therefore, the game ball can be retained in the retaining device by an easy operation during the advantageous game state. Here, even after switching to a game state in which a left-handed game is performed after an advantageous game state, game balls reserved in the reserve device may remain. Even in such a case, the player can operate the operation means in accordance with the timing at which the operation request is displayed in the operation effect displayed on the display means based on the establishment of the predetermined condition in the game state in which the left-handed game is performed. By operating , the holding device can be changed from the holding state to the released state in accordance with the timing when the distribution member comes to the second position. As a result, the game ball ejected from the holding device at the timing when the operation request is displayed easily enters the winning opening via the sorting member at the second position. On the other hand, even if the operation means receives the player's operation at a timing other than the timing at which the operation request is displayed, the timing at which the holding device changes from the holding state to the release state coincides with the timing at which the distribution member comes to the second position. Because there is not, it becomes difficult to enter the prize gate. Therefore, if the player performs the right-handed game during the advantageous game state, even if the game balls reserved in the holding device remain after switching from the advantageous game state to the left-handed game state, the player can make the left-handed game. It is possible to actively participate in the operation performance displayed on the display means based on the establishment of a predetermined condition in the game state to be played, and to operate the operation means well in accordance with the timing when the operation request is displayed during the operation performance. If possible, in addition to the profit that the player can enjoy during the advantageous game state, a predetermined game value corresponding to the number of game balls remaining in the holding device can be obtained in the game state of performing the left-handed game after switching. . As a result, it is possible to increase the merit of holding the game ball in the holding device, and to improve the interest of the game using the holding device.

After the advantageous game state ends, the player tends to lose the desire to continue the game. If the player knows that there is a chance to acquire a predetermined game value corresponding to the number of game balls retained in the retaining device by the operation effect, even in the left-handed game state after the end of the advantageous game state. Until the condition is established, it becomes easy to induce the game continuation motivation to continue the game.

Note that the right-handed game is to perform an operation of shooting a game ball so that the game ball flows down the right side of the game area when viewed from the front of the gaming machine. A left-handed game is an operation of shooting a game ball so that the game ball flows down the area on the left side of the game area as viewed from the front of the gaming machine.

(B2) In the gaming machine described in (B1) above,
A gaming machine, wherein the advantageous game state is a special game state in which a special game in which the variable ball entry means changes between the open state and the closed state is executed a plurality of times.

According to the invention described in (B2) above, since the advantageous game state is a special game state in which a special game in which the variable ball entry means changes between the open state and the closed state is executed a plurality of times, during the special game state It is possible to increase the advantage of holding the game ball in the holding device and to improve the interest of the game using the holding device in the game state in which the left-hand hitting game is performed after the end of the special game state.

(B3) In the gaming machine according to (B1) or (B2) above,
A gaming machine, wherein the advantageous game state is a high-probability game state in which the probability that the result of the lottery by the lottery means is the specific result is increased after the special game state ends.

According to the invention described in (B3) above, the advantageous gaming state is a high-probability gaming state in which the probability that the result of the lottery by the lottery means is a specific result is increased after the end of the special game state. It is possible to increase the merit of holding the game ball in the holding device during the probability game state, and to improve the interest of the game using the holding device in the game state in which the left-hand hitting game is performed after the end of the high-probability game state. .

(B4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (B1) to (B3),
The gaming machine is characterized in that the advantageous game state is a time-saving state in which the variable display time of the symbols is shortened after the special game state ends.

According to the invention described in (B4) above, the advantageous game state is a time-saving state in which the time for symbol fluctuation display is shortened after the end of the special game state. It is possible to increase the advantage of holding the ball and improve the interest of the game using the holding device in the game state of performing the left-handed game after the time saving state is finished.

(B5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (B1) to (B4),
It is provided at a position where at least a game ball to be shot during a right-handed game can enter, and changes between a closed state in which game balls are difficult to enter and an open state in which game balls are easier to enter than the closed state. a second starting ball entry means;
a second ball entry detection means for detecting a gaming ball that has entered the second starting ball entry means;
a second lottery means for performing a lottery capable of determining whether or not to cause the advantageous gaming state based on the detection of the gaming ball by the second ball-entering detection means;
game ball passage detection means for detecting passage of a game ball fired at least during a right-handed game;
a third lottery means for performing a third lottery as to whether or not the second starting ball entry means is to be in the open state based on the detection of the game ball by the game ball passage detection means;
The advantageous game state is the second start-up in another game state when the result of the third lottery is the result of opening the second start-up ball entry means after the end of the special game state. The second starting ball-entering means is in the open state for a time longer than the time in which the ball means is in the open state or the number of times the second start-up ball-entering means is in the open state in other game states more times than the number of times in the open state. A gaming machine characterized in that it is in a gaming state.

According to the invention described in (B5) above, the advantageous game state is when the result of the third lottery is the result of opening the second starting ball entry means after the end of the above-mentioned special game state. Since the second starting ball-entering means is in an open state for a longer time (number of times) than the time (number of times) in which the second starting ball-entering means is in an open state in the game state of , during the advantageous game state It is possible to enhance the advantage of holding the game ball in the holding device and improve the interest of the game using the holding device in the game state of performing the left-handed game after the end of the advantageous game state.

(B6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (B1) to (B5),
variable display effect selection means for selecting a predetermined variable display effect from among a plurality of patterns of variable display effects with varying symbols based on a lottery result of the lottery means;
In the predetermined condition, the variable display effect selected in the game state in which the left-handed game is performed after the end of the advantageous game state constitutes a part of the specific combination representing the specific result as the result of the lottery. A gaming machine comprising a predetermined ready-to-win effect performed by displaying a pattern, and a display time of the predetermined ready-to-win effect is at least longer than a display time of the operation effect.

According to the invention described in (B6) above, in the gaming state in which a left-handed game is performed after the end of the advantageous gaming state, the variable display effect displays symbols constituting a part of a specific combination representing a specific result as a result of a lottery. When a predetermined ready-to-win effect to be displayed is included and the display time of the ready-to-win effect is at least longer than the display time of the operation effect, the operation effect is displayed on the display means. A player can be entertained by the display time of the ready-to-win performance in a game state in which a beating game is performed.

(B7) In the gaming machine described in (B6) above,
The ready-to-win effect includes, as constituent elements, an expected effect in which the degree of expectation that suggests the advantageous gaming state is at a predetermined level, and the expectation degree that suggests the advantageous gaming state is the expected effect. At least including a pattern that includes a specific expected performance higher than
The predetermined condition is a pattern in which the predetermined ready-to-win effect included in the variable display effect selected in the game state in which the left-handed game is performed after the end of the advantageous game state includes the specific expected effect as a constituent element. A gaming machine characterized in that it is to be.

According to the invention described in (B7), the predetermined ready-to-win effect included in the variable display effect selected in the game state in which the left-handed game is performed after the end of the advantageous game state is the advantageous game state. Since the operation performance is displayed on the display means when the implied degree of expectation is a pattern including a specific expected performance higher than the expected performance of a predetermined height as a constituent element, the player can hit left after the end of the advantageous game state. The player can be entertained by the display time of the ready-to-win performance including the specific expected performance in the game state in which the game is played.

(B8) In the gaming machine according to (B6) or (B7) above,
The predetermined condition is a second specified result in which the lottery result of the lottery means is not the advantageous game state in the game state in which the left-handed game is performed after the advantageous game state ends, and the second specified condition. A game machine, wherein the variable display effect selected after the result includes the predetermined ready-to-win effect.

According to the invention described in (B8) above, the lottery result of the lottery means in the gaming state in which the left-handed game is performed after the end of the advantageous gaming state is the second specified result that does not constitute the advantageous gaming state, and the second specified result. Since the operation performance is displayed on the display means when the variable display performance selected after the result includes the above-mentioned predetermined ready-to-win performance, the lottery is performed in the game state in which the left-handed game is performed after the end of the advantageous game state. If the result of the lottery by the means is a specific result that does not result in an advantageous game state, an opportunity to enter the game balls reserved during the previous advantageous game state into the winning opening is given after the second specific result. By giving it during the ready-to-win presentation, it is possible to reduce the disappointment of the second specified result that does not bring about an advantageous game state.

(B9) In the gaming machine according to any one of (B6) to (B8),
The ready-to-win effect includes, as constituent elements, an expected effect in which the degree of expectation that suggests the advantageous gaming state is at a predetermined level, and the expectation degree that suggests the advantageous gaming state is the expected effect. At least including a pattern that includes a specific expected performance higher than
The predetermined condition is a second specified result in which the lottery result of the lottery means is not the advantageous game state in the game state in which the left-handed game is performed after the advantageous game state ends, and the second specified condition. A gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined ready-to-win effect leading to a result is a pattern including the specific expected effect.

According to the invention described in (B9) above, the ready-to-win effect includes, as components, an expected effect having a predetermined level of expectation indicating that an advantageous game state is to be entered, and an advantageous game state to be entered. In a game state in which a left-handed game is performed after the end of the advantageous game state, the lottery result of the lottery means is an advantageous game. The operation effect is displayed on the display means when the second specified result is a non-state and the predetermined ready-to-win effect leading to the second specified result is a pattern including the specific expected effect. Thereby, when the result of the lottery by the lottery means performed after the end of the advantageous game state is the second specified result which does not make the advantageous game state in spite of including the specific expected performance with high expectation, By giving an opportunity during a predetermined ready-to-win performance to make a game ball withheld during a previous advantageous game state enter a prize winning opening, an advantageous game state is established despite execution of a variable display performance including a specific expected performance. It is possible to reduce the disappointment of being a specific result that does not exist.

(B10) In the gaming machine according to any one of (B1) to (B9),
Holding ball detection means for detecting a game ball held in the holding device;
The operation effect control means displays the operation effect on the display means based on the fact that the predetermined condition is satisfied and the game ball is determined to be held in the holding device by the held ball detection means. A gaming machine characterized by displaying.

According to the invention described in (B10) above, it is possible to reduce discomfort given to the player by executing the operation effect even though there are no game balls held in the holding device.

(B11) In the gaming machine according to any one of (B1) to (B10),
A game machine having the configuration described in any one of (A2) to (A11).

According to the invention described in (B11) above, the same effects as those of the gaming machine described in any one of (A2) to (A11) above can be achieved.

(C0) a game board having a game area in which game balls can flow down;
a starting ball entry means capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area;
A closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can be entered at least when a right-handed game is performed, and a game ball is difficult to enter, and a game ball is easier to enter than the closed state. a variable entry means that changes between an open state and
ball entry detection means for detecting a gaming ball that has entered the starting ball entry means;
A lottery means for performing a lottery capable of determining whether or not to cause a special game state based on the detection of the game ball by the entering ball detection means,
A gaming machine in which a predetermined display effect is displayed on display means based on the result of the lottery becoming a predetermined result,
a holding device that changes between a holding state in which the game ball flowing down the game area can be held and a release state in which the holding of the game ball is released;
a prize-winning opening provided at a position where it is difficult to enter a game ball unless the game ball has been released from the holding device in the game area, and a predetermined game value can be obtained based on the entry of the game ball;
an operation means for receiving a player's operation, including an operation for changing the holding device from the holding state to the released state;
A sorting operation is performed to change between a first position that makes it difficult for the game balls whose reservation is canceled to enter the winning opening and a second position that makes it easy for the game balls whose reservation is canceled to enter the winning opening. a distribution member;
Distribution operation control means for controlling the distribution operation of the distribution member;
A presentation including display of an operation request requesting an operation of the operating means, wherein the predetermined operation presentation is performed in such a manner that the timing of displaying the operation request is matched with the timing when the distribution member comes to the second position. and operation effect control means for controlling display on the display means after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the display effect of (1).

According to the invention described in (C0) above, the player operates the operation means in the operation effect displayed on the display means in accordance with the timing at which the operation request is displayed, thereby causing the distribution member to move to the second position. The holding device can be changed from the holding state to the released state in accordance with the timing of coming to the position. As a result, the game ball ejected from the holding device at the timing when the operation request is displayed easily enters the winning opening via the sorting member at the second position. On the other hand, even if the operation means receives the player's operation at a timing other than the timing at which the operation request is displayed, the timing at which the holding device changes from the holding state to the release state coincides with the timing at which the distribution member comes to the second position. Because there is not, it becomes difficult to enter the prize gate. Therefore, if the player can successfully operate the operation means in accordance with the timing at which the operation request is displayed during the operation presentation, the predetermined game value corresponding to the number of game balls held in the holding device can be Can be obtained in the special game state. Further, since the operation effect is displayed on the display means after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the predetermined display effect displayed based on the result of the lottery becoming the predetermined result, the operation effect start timing. It is possible to reduce the amount of memory used for appropriately executing the operation presentation without the need for complicated control to determine . As a result, it is possible to increase the merit of holding the game ball in the holding device, and to improve the interest of the game using the holding device.

As the above-mentioned predetermined display effect, for example, a specific reach effect in the normal game state (for example, a super reach effect in which the reach effect period is longer than other reach effects), and an effect during the jackpot round in the jackpot state (hereinafter referred to as A display effect that indicates the right-handed advantageous game state (variable probability state, time-saving state, etc.) Display effect such as "Please hit right" to inform that it is in a state). In such an example, the timing at which the operation request is displayed and the timing at which the distribution member comes to the second position in the operation effect that starts after the lapse of a predetermined time at the start of the predetermined display effect. are adjusted to match.

(C1) a game board having a game area in which game balls can flow down;
a starting ball entry means capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area;
A variable ball entry is provided at a position where a game ball flowing down the game area can be entered, and changes between a closed state in which a game ball is difficult to enter and an open state in which a game ball is easier to enter than in the closed state. means and
ball entry detection means for detecting a gaming ball that has entered the starting ball entry means;
A lottery means for performing a lottery capable of determining whether or not to cause a special game state based on the detection of the game ball by the entering ball detection means,
Symbols are variably displayed in a mode according to the result of the lottery by the lottery means,
A gaming machine that repeatedly changes the variable ball entry means between the open state and the closed state as the specific game state when the result of the lottery is a specific result,
a holding device that changes between a holding state in which a game ball fired in a right-handed game can be held in a non-special game state that is not at least the special game state, and a release state in which the game ball is released from holding;
a prize-winning opening provided at a position where it is difficult to enter a game ball unless the game ball has been released from the holding device in the game area, and a predetermined game value can be obtained based on the entry of the game ball;
an operation means for receiving a player's operation, including an operation for changing the holding device from the holding state to the released state;
A sorting operation is performed to change between a first position that makes it difficult for the game balls whose reservation is canceled to enter the winning opening and a second position that makes it easy for the game balls whose reservation is canceled to enter the winning opening. a distribution member;
Distribution operation control means for controlling the distribution operation of the distribution member;
An effect including display of an operation request for requesting an operation of the operation means, wherein the operation effect is such that the timing of displaying the operation request is matched with the timing when the distribution member comes to the second position. and an operation effect control means for controlling display on the display means during a special game state and during a specific variable display according to the result of the lottery.

According to the invention described in (C1) above, the player operates the operation means in the operation effect displayed on the display means in accordance with the timing at which the operation request is displayed, thereby causing the distribution member to move to the second position. The holding device can be changed from the holding state to the released state in accordance with the timing of coming to the position. As a result, the game ball ejected from the holding device at the timing when the operation request is displayed easily enters the winning opening via the sorting member at the second position. On the other hand, even if the operation means receives the player's operation at a timing other than the timing at which the operation request is displayed, the timing at which the holding device changes from the holding state to the release state coincides with the timing at which the distribution member comes to the second position. Because there is not, it becomes difficult to enter the prize gate. In addition, the player plays a right-handed game during the non-special game state, and is positive about the operation effect displayed on the display means during the non-special game state and during the specific variable display according to the result of the lottery. , and if the operation means can be successfully operated in accordance with the timing at which the operation request is displayed during the operation presentation, a predetermined game value corresponding to the number of game balls held in the holding device is obtained in a non-special game Since it can be obtained in the state, it is possible to increase the player's willingness to participate in the game during the non-special game state. As a result, it is possible to increase the merit of holding the game ball in the holding device, and to improve the interest of the game using the holding device.

The non-special game state includes not only the normal game state in which the probability that the result of the lottery by the lottery means becomes the specified result is normal probability, but also the result of the lottery by the lottery means after the special game state ends. Also includes a high probability game state in which the probability of becoming higher than the normal game state, and a time saving state in which the time of variable display is shortened.

(C2) In the gaming machine described in (C1) above,
The specific variable display is a specific ready-to-win effect performed by displaying a pattern forming part of a specific combination representing the specific result as a result of the lottery, and is at least longer than the display time of the operation effect. A gaming machine characterized by a specific ready-to-win effect in which the variable display is performed for a long time.

According to the invention described in (C2) above, the specific variable display is a specific ready-to-win effect in which the variable display is performed for at least a time longer than the display time of the operation effect. By making the player participate in the game using the holding device executed during the specific ready-to-win performance, it is possible to reduce the player's boredom with the ready-to-win performance with a long fluctuation time like the specific ready-to-win performance.

(C3) In the gaming machine described in (C2) above,
The operation effect control means performs right-handed notification for notifying the player that the right-handed game will be played during the specific variation display, and after the right-handed notification and during the specific variation display, A gaming machine, wherein the operation effect is displayed on the display means.

According to the invention described in (C3) above, the operation effect is displayed on the display means by the operation effect control means after the right-hand hitting notification is performed by the operation effect control means by the right-hand hitting notification means during the specific variable display. As a result, it is possible to reduce chances that the player misses the opportunity to reserve the game ball in the reserve device during the specific variable display.

(C4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (C1) to (C3),
The gaming machine is characterized in that the game board is configured such that a game ball launched in the right-handed game is more likely to be held by the holding device in the non-special game state than in the specific game state.

According to the invention described in (C4) above, the game ball fired in the right-handed game is more likely to be held in the holding device in the non-special game state than in the specific game state due to the configuration of the game board. In the special game state, the player can be made to actively play the right-handed game during the specific variable display.

(C5) In the gaming machine described in (C4) above,
A game machine, wherein the game board is provided with a guiding member that guides a game ball launched in the right-handed game to the holding device in the non-special game state.

According to the invention described in (C5), the game ball fired in the right-handed game in the non-special game state is guided to the holding device by the guiding member provided on the game board, so that the holding device is guided by the nail adjustment. A game ball shot in a right-handed game in a non-special game state can be guided to a holding device more reliably than in the case of induction.

(C6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (C1) to (C3),
The game board is configured such that the game ball fired in the right-handed game is more likely to be held by the holding device during the specific variable display than during the variable display different from the specific variable display. A gaming machine characterized in that

According to the invention described in (C6) above, the game ball fired in the right-handed game is held during the specific variable display rather than during the variable display different from the specific variable display, depending on the configuration of the game board. Since it is easy to be held by the device, even though it is the original game that the player performs the right-handed game during the specific variation display in the non-special game state, the player does not perform other variation display in the non-special game state. In addition, it is possible to reduce the occurrence of a game that deviates from the original game of playing the right-handed game.

(C7) In the gaming machine described in (C6), the game board is provided with a guiding member that guides a game ball launched in the right-handed game to the holding device during the specific variable display. A gaming machine characterized in that

According to the invention described in (C7) above, the game ball shot in the right-handed game during the specific variable display is guided to the holding device by the guide member provided on the game board, and is held by the nail adjustment. A game ball shot in a right-handed game can be guided to the holding device more reliably than when guided to the device during the specific variable display. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with the amusement of performing a right-handed game aiming at the guiding member during the specific variable display.

(D1) a game board having a game area in which game balls can flow down;
a holding device that changes between a holding state in which the game ball flowing down the game area can be held and a release state in which the holding of the game ball is released;
detection means for detecting a game ball held in the holding device;
a prize-winning opening provided at a position where it is difficult to enter a game ball unless the game ball has been released from the holding device in the game area, and a predetermined game value can be obtained based on the entry of the game ball;
an operation means for receiving a player's operation, including an operation for changing the holding device from the holding state to the released state;
A sorting operation is performed to change between a first position that makes it difficult for the game balls whose reservation is canceled to enter the winning opening and a second position that makes it easy for the game balls whose reservation is canceled to enter the winning opening. a distribution member;
Distribution operation control means for controlling the distribution operation of the distribution member;
means for controlling a display effect including an operation effect in which an operation request image for requesting an operation of the operating means is displayed, wherein when a game ball held in the holding device is detected by the detecting means, the display effect control means for controlling display means to display the operation effect in which the timing at which the operation request image is displayed is matched with the timing at which the distribution member comes to the second position. game machine.

According to the invention described in (D1) above, the player operates the operation means in the operation effect displayed on the display means in accordance with the timing at which the operation request is displayed, thereby causing the distribution member to move to the second position. The holding device can be changed from the holding state to the released state in accordance with the timing of coming to the position. As a result, the game ball ejected from the holding device at the timing when the operation request is displayed easily enters the winning opening via the sorting member at the second position. On the other hand, even if the operation means receives the player's operation at a timing other than the timing at which the operation request is displayed, the timing at which the holding device changes from the holding state to the release state coincides with the timing at which the distribution member comes to the second position. Because there is not, it becomes difficult to enter the prize gate. Therefore, in order for the player to display the display effect including the operation effect described above, the game ball is retained in the retaining device and must be continuously shot until the game ball is detected by the detecting means. It is possible to reduce the stopping strike that interrupts the shooting of the game ball during. As a result, it is possible to increase the merit of holding the game ball in the holding device, and to improve the interest of the game using the holding device.

(D2) In the gaming machine described in (D1) above,
Upper limit number determination means for determining whether or not the upper limit number of game balls are retained in the retaining device based on the detection of the game balls by the detection means,
When it is determined that the upper limit number of game balls are reserved, the effect control means adjusts the timing at which the operation request image is displayed to the timing at which the distribution member comes to the second position. a gaming machine characterized by controlling the operation effect to be displayed on the display means.

According to the invention described in (D2), the operation effect is the operation request image by the effect control means when it is determined that the upper limit number of game balls are retained in the retaining device by the upper limit number determination means. is displayed in accordance with the timing when the distribution member comes to the second position. It is possible to reduce the complexity of the player due to this.

(D3) In the gaming machine described in (D2).
a lower limit timing determination means for determining whether or not the execution time of the display effect has reached the lower limit timing for starting the operation effect;
The effect control means, when it is determined that the game balls in the upper limit number of reservations are reserved again by the time it is determined that the execution time of the display effect has reached the lower limit timing, the operation request image is displayed on the display means, and the new operation effect is displayed on the display means in accordance with the timing when the distribution member comes to the second position.

According to the invention described in (D3) above, when it is determined that the number of game balls in the upper limit of the reservation is reserved again by the time it is determined that the execution time of the display effect has reached the lower limit timing, the operation request Since a new operation effect is displayed on the display means by adjusting the timing of displaying the image to the timing when the distribution member comes to the second position, the upper limit number of game balls are reserved during the execution period of the display effect. Even after the operation effect is displayed, the upper limit number of game balls are suspended again and a new operation effect is displayed before the execution time of the display effect reaches the lower limit timing (as a result, a new game value is displayed. ), the player can be made to actively shoot the game ball.

(D4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (D1) to (D3),
lower limit timing determination means for determining whether or not the execution time of the display effect has reached the lower limit timing for starting the operation effect;
a second determination means for determining whether or not at least a lower limit number of game balls smaller than the upper limit number of reservations are reserved in the holding device based on the detection of the game balls by the detection means;
The effect control means, when it is determined that at least the game balls of the reserve lower limit number are reserved by the time it is determined that the execution time of the display effect has reached the lower limit timing, the operation request image is displayed on the display means, and the operation effect is displayed in accordance with the timing when the distribution member comes to the second position.

According to the invention described in the above (D4), when it is determined that at least the number of game balls in the reserve lower limit number is reserved by the time it is determined that the execution time of the display effect reaches the lower limit timing, the effect control By means of the means, an operation effect is displayed on the display means in which the timing at which the operation request image is displayed is matched with the timing at which the distribution member comes to the second position. As a result, even if it is determined by the first determination means that the game balls in the upper limit number of reservations are not reserved in the reservation device, at least the number of game balls in the lower limit number of reservations will be When it is determined that the game ball is reserved, the display means displays an operation performance in which the timing of displaying the operation request image is matched with the timing of the distribution member coming to the second position. Even though the game balls are reserved in the reserve device, it is possible to reduce the decrease in motivation to play due to the fact that the operation presentation is not displayed only because the number of reserved upper limits is not reached.

(D5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (D1) to (D4),
The operation effect includes a first operation effect in which the operation request image is displayed in a first operation mode, and a second operation effect in which the operation request image is displayed in a second operation mode that is easier for the player to operate than the first operation mode. At least including 2 operation effects,
difficulty level selection display means for displaying on the display means a selection image for selecting which operation effect to display at least from the first operation effect or the second operation effect;
The gaming machine, wherein the effect control means displays an operation effect selected while the selection image is being displayed by the difficulty level selection display means on the display means.

According to the invention described in (D5) above, the operation effect includes the first operation effect in which the operation request image is displayed in the first operation mode, and the second operation mode that is easier for the player to operate than the first operation mode. A selection image including at least a second operation effect in which an operation request image is displayed, and which operation effect to be displayed can be selected by the difficulty level selection display means at least between the first operation effect and the second operation effect. is displayed on the display means, and the operation effect selected during the display of the selection image is displayed on the display means by the effect control means, so that the player who does not like difficult operations can select the second operation effect. Players who do not can select the first operation effect. In this way, it is possible to provide an operation effect according to the taste of the player.

(D6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (D1) to (D5),
The distribution operation of the distribution member has a plurality of types of movable periods including a first movable period and a second movable period with different periods,
The distribution operation control means comprises a movable period changing means for changing the movable period from the first movable period to the second movable period,
The display effect control means matches the timing at which the operation request image is displayed with the timing at which the distribution member comes to the second position according to the type of the movable cycle changed by the cycle changing means. A gaming machine characterized by displaying the operation effect.

According to the invention described in (D6), the distribution operation of the distribution member has a plurality of types of movable periods including a first movable period and a second movable period having different periods, and the movable period changing means , even when the movable period is changed from the first movable period to the second movable period, the timing at which the operation request image is displayed is changed according to the type of the changed movable period so that the distribution member is at the second position. An operation performance matching the coming timing is displayed by the display performance control means. Thereby, it is possible to make it more difficult to detect the operation timing of the movable member than in the case where the distribution operation is performed in the same movable cycle.

(D7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (D1) to (D6),
The distributing operation of the distributing member has a plurality of types of movable patterns including a first movable pattern and a second movable pattern with different timings of changing between the first position and the second position,
The distribution operation control means includes a movable pattern changing unit that changes the movable pattern from the first movable pattern to the second movable pattern,
The display effect control means matches the timing at which the operation request image is displayed with the timing at which the distribution member comes to the second position according to the type of the movable pattern changed by the movable pattern changing unit. A gaming machine characterized by displaying the operation effect.

According to the invention described in (D7), the sorting operation of the sorting member includes a plurality of types including a first movable pattern and a second movable pattern with different timings of changing between the first position and the second position. and the operation request image is displayed according to the type of the changed movable pattern even when the movable pattern is changed from the first movable pattern to the second movable pattern by the movable pattern changing unit. The display effect control means displays an operation effect whose timing is matched with the timing when the distribution member comes to the second position. As a result, it is possible to make it more difficult to detect the operation timing of the movable member than when the distribution operation is performed in the same movable pattern.

(D8) In the gaming machine according to any one of (D1) to (D7),
The distribution operation control means repeats the distribution operation at a predetermined movable period from at least before the operation effect is started,
The display effect control means controls the timing at which the operation request image is displayed after the game ball held in the holding device is detected by the detection means and before the operation effect is started. Execution of an adjustment performance for adjusting to match the timing when the dividing member comes to the second position,
The display effect control means has, as the adjustment effects, a plurality of types of adjustment effects having different lengths of time during which the adjustment effects are executed, and is suspended in the suspension device by the detection means for the predetermined movable period. A gaming machine characterized by: controlling to display the adjustment effect of the different length determined according to the timing at which the game ball is detected on the display means.

According to the invention described in (D8) above, the distribution operation control means repeats the distribution operation at least before the operation effect is started at the predetermined movable period. When the timing at which the game ball held in the holding device is detected (that is, the timing at which the operation effect in the display effect is started) comes, the display effect control means detects the game ball held in the holding device by the detection means. During the period from the detection of the ball to the start of the operation performance, an adjustment performance is executed to adjust the timing of displaying the operation request image so as to match the timing of the distribution member coming to the second position. The display effect control means has a plurality of types of adjustment effects with different lengths of time during which the adjustment effects are executed as the adjustment effects, and the game ball held in the holding device by the detection means for a predetermined movable cycle is Adjustment performances of different lengths determined according to the detected timing are displayed on a display means. As a result, even when the timing at which the game ball held in the holding device is detected (that is, the timing at which the operation effect in the display effect is started) arrives in the middle of the predetermined movable cycle, the operation request image is displayed. can be adjusted so that the timing at which is displayed does not deviate from the timing at which the distribution member comes to the second position.

(D9) In the gaming machine according to (D8),
The gaming machine, wherein the display effect control means has a plurality of types of the adjustment effect having a length shorter than the length of time during which the operation effect is executed.

According to the invention described in (D9) above, since the display effect control means has a plurality of types of adjustment effects having a length shorter than the length of time during which the operation effect is executed, the timing at which the operation request image is displayed is determined. , in order to match the timing when the distribution member comes to the second position, the images for the operation effect with a plurality of lengths are stored in the memory when the images for the adjustment effect with a plurality of types of lengths are stored in the memory. It uses less memory than when

(D10) In the gaming machine according to (D8),
The game machine, wherein the display effect control means has a plurality of types of the adjustment effect having an image with less information than an image for displaying the operation effect.

According to the invention described in (D10) above, since there are a plurality of types of adjustment effects having an image with less information than the image for displaying the operation effect, even if the length of the adjustment effect and the length of the operation effect are the same. Even in this case, in order to match the timing at which the operation request image is displayed with the timing at which the distribution member comes to the second position, images (for example, still images) for adjusting effect of multiple types of length are stored in the memory. In this case, it is possible to reduce the amount of memory used compared to the case of storing images (for example, moving images) for operation rendering of a plurality of types of lengths in the memory.

(D11) In the gaming machine according to any one of (D1) to (D7),
The distribution operation control means repeats the distribution operation at a predetermined movable period from at least before the operation effect is started,
The display effect control means has a plurality of types of operation effects with different lengths of time during which the operation effects are executed, and the game ball held in the holding device is detected by the detection means for the predetermined movable period. A game machine characterized by: controlling the display means to display the operation effect of the different length determined according to the timing of the operation.

According to the invention described in (D11) above, the distribution operation control means repeats the distribution operation at a predetermined movable period from at least before the operation effect is started, and the display effect control means repeats the operation effect. It has a plurality of types of operation performances with different lengths of time to be executed, and the operation performances of different lengths determined according to the timing at which the game balls held in the holding device are detected by the detection means for the predetermined movable cycle. Since it is displayed on the display means, even if the timing at which the game ball held in the holding device is detected (that is, the timing at which the operation effect in the display effect is started) comes in the middle of the predetermined movable cycle. , the timing at which the operation request image is displayed and the timing at which the distribution member comes to the second position can be adjusted so as not to deviate.

(D12) In the gaming machine according to any one of (D8) to (D11),
The game machine, wherein the distribution operation control means executes the distribution operation in the predetermined movable cycle in a manner that is difficult for a player to visually recognize.

According to the invention described in (D12) above, the distribution operation control means executes the distribution operation in a predetermined movable cycle in a manner that is difficult for the player to visually recognize. Even when the sorting motion is repeated at the movable cycle of , the player decodes the movable cycle of the sorting motion, and based on the timing obtained by decoding, the timing of the sorting member coming to the second position is matched. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the operation means is operated and the predetermined game value is obtained.

(E1) a game board having a game area in which game balls can flow down;
a starting ball entry means capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area;
A closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can be entered at least when a right-handed game is performed, and a game ball is difficult to enter, and a game ball is easier to enter than the closed state. a variable entry means that changes between an open state and
ball entry detection means for detecting a gaming ball that has entered the starting ball entry means;
A lottery means for performing a lottery capable of determining whether or not to cause a special game state based on the detection of the game ball by the entering ball detection means,
A gaming machine in which a predetermined display effect is displayed on display means based on the result of the lottery becoming a predetermined result,
a holding device that changes between a holding state in which the game ball flowing down the game area can be held and a release state in which the holding of the game ball is released;
a prize-winning opening provided at a position where it is difficult to enter a game ball unless the game ball has been released from the holding device in the game area, and a predetermined game value can be obtained based on the entry of the game ball;
an operation means for receiving a player's operation, including an operation for changing the holding device from the holding state to the released state;
A sorting operation is performed to change between a first position that makes it difficult for the game balls whose reservation is canceled to enter the winning opening and a second position that makes it easy for the game balls whose reservation is canceled to enter the winning opening. a distribution member;
an operation effect control means for controlling to display an operation effect including a display of an operation request requesting an operation of the operation means on the display means while the predetermined display effect is being displayed;
Distribution operation control means for controlling the distribution operation of the distribution member at a timing that is not synchronized with the start timing of the predetermined display effect and the operation effect;
The operation effect control means adjusts at least one of the predetermined display effect and the operation effect so that the timing at which the operation request is displayed coincides with the timing at which the distribution member comes to the second position. A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the invention described in (E1) above, the holding device changes between a holding state in which the game ball flowing down the game area can be held, and a release state in which the holding of the game ball is released. A prize-winning opening from which a predetermined game value can be obtained based on the entry of a game ball is provided at a position in the game area where it is difficult to enter the game ball unless the game ball has been released from the holding device. The operation means receives a player's operation including an operation of changing the holding device from the holding state to the released state. The distributing member changes between a first position that makes it difficult for the game balls that have been released from the holding to enter the winning opening, and a second position that makes it easier for the game balls that have been released from the holding to enter the winning opening. A minute action is performed. The operation effect control means controls the display means to display the operation effect including the display of the operation request requesting the operation of the operation means during the display of the predetermined display effect. The distribution operation control means controls the distribution operation of the distribution member at a timing that is not synchronized with the start timing of the predetermined display effect and operation effect. Here, if no measures are taken, there is concern that the timing at which the operation request is displayed may deviate from the timing at which the distribution member comes to the second position. Therefore, the operation effect control means adjusts at least one of the predetermined display effect and the operation effect so that the timing at which the operation request is displayed coincides with the timing at which the distribution member comes to the second position.

As a result, the player can operate the operation means in accordance with the timing of displaying the operation request in the operation presentation displayed on the display means, thereby allowing the player to hold the distribution member in accordance with the timing when the distribution member comes to the second position. A device can be changed from a pending state to a released state. Also, the game ball ejected from the holding device at the timing when the operation request is displayed easily enters the winning opening via the sorting member that comes to the second position. On the other hand, even if the operation means receives the player's operation at a timing other than the timing at which the operation request is displayed, the timing at which the holding device changes from the holding state to the release state coincides with the timing at which the distribution member comes to the second position. Because there is not, it becomes difficult to enter the prize gate. Therefore, if the player can successfully operate the operation means at the timing when the operation request is displayed during the operation presentation, the player can obtain a predetermined game value corresponding to the number of game balls held in the holding device. can be done. As a result, it is possible to increase the merit of holding the game ball in the holding device, and to improve the interest of the game using the holding device.

(E2) In the gaming machine described in (E1) above,
The operation effect control means provides the display means with an adjustment effect for adjusting the start timing of the operation effect so that the timing at which the operation request is displayed coincides with the timing at which the distribution member comes to the second position. A gaming machine characterized by controlling to display.

According to the invention described in (E2) above, the timing at which the operation request is displayed can be adjusted to the timing at which the distribution member comes to the second position, and in addition to the operation effect, a predetermined display effect is obtained by the adjustment effect. can improve interest in

(E3) In the invention described in (E1) above,
The operation effect control means adjusts the length of the operation effect so that the timing at which the operation request is displayed coincides with the timing at which the distribution member comes to the second position. .

According to the invention described in (E3) above, the timing at which the operation request is displayed can be adjusted to the timing at which the distribution member comes to the second position, and the operation can be performed according to the length of the operation presentation. It is possible to improve interest in predetermined display effects including effects.

(E4) In the invention according to any one of (E1) to (E3),
A gaming machine comprising the configuration described in at least one of (A1) to (D12).

According to the invention according to (E4), the invention according to any one of (E1) to (E3) has the same effect as the invention according to at least one of (A1) to (D12). can be played.

An embodiment of a pachinko game machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10, FIG. 2 is a front view showing the configuration of the game board 30 attached to the inner frame 12, and FIG. 3 is an enlarged view of a lower right game area 30a3 of the game board 30 shown in FIG. 2; FIG. FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view showing a state in which the decoration plate 413 is removed from the retaining device 400 shown in FIG. FIG. 5 is an enlarged view around the movable sorting valve 409 shown in FIG. FIG. 6 is a timing chart for explaining the displacement of the sorting movable valve 409. As shown in FIG. 7 is a back view of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. FIG. 8 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. 9A and 9B are explanatory diagrams showing the display contents of the third pattern display device, FIG. 9A shows a state in which the main decorative patterns are arranged, and FIG. 9B shows a state in which the secondary decorative patterns are arranged. .

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 that forms the outer shell of the pachinko machine 10 and is fixed to a game island of a game hall (hall), and one side of the outer frame 11 (for example, the front An inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable with respect to an outer frame 11 with the left side as viewed from the front) as an opening/closing axis, and an inner frame having one side of the inner frame 12 (for example, the left side as viewed from the front) as an opening/closing axis. 12 is provided with a front frame set 14 that can be freely opened and closed.

The outer frame 11 is made of wooden plate members and is generally rectangular in a front view, and each plate member is assembled with a detachable fastener such as a machine screw. In this embodiment, for example, the outer frame 11 has a vertical outer dimension of 809 mm (inner dimension of 771 mm) and a lateral outer dimension of 518 mm (inner dimension of 480 mm). Note that the outer frame 11 may be made of resin, light metal such as aluminum, or the like.

As shown in FIG. 1, the inner frame 12 can be roughly divided into a lower tray unit 13 attached to the bottom and a vertical opening and closing mechanism on the left side of the inner frame 12 in a range above the lower tray unit 13. It comprises a front frame set 14 that is openable and closable around an axis, and a game board 30 (see FIG. 2) that is detachably attached to a rectangular resin base (not shown).

As shown in FIG. 1, the lower tray unit 13 is fixed to the inner frame 12 by fasteners such as screws. A lower tray 15, a ball extraction lever 17, a game ball shooting handle 18, and a sound output port 24 are provided on the front side of the lower tray unit 13. - 特許庁A lower tray 15 as a ball receiving tray is provided substantially at the center of the lower tray unit 13, and game balls discharged from a discharge port 16 can be stored in the lower tray 15. - 特許庁The ball removing lever 17 is for removing game balls from the lower tray 15. By moving the ball removing lever 17 to the left in FIG. The game balls stored in the tray 15 can be drawn downward to the outside through the opening portion of the bottom surface of the lower tray 15.例文帳に追加The game ball shooting handle 18 is arranged so as to protrude to the front side on the right side of the lower plate 15.例文帳に追加A game ball is driven toward a game board 30 to be described later by a game ball shooting device 38 according to the operation of the game ball shooting handle 18 by the player. The game ball shooting device 38 is composed of, for example, a game ball shooting handle 18 and a shooting device 229 (see FIG. 8). The sound output port 24 is an output port for outputting sound from a speaker provided inside the lower tray unit 13 or on the back surface.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 1, the front frame set 14 is attached to the inner frame 12 so that it can be opened and closed. It is designed so that it can be opened to the front side around the axis.

As shown in FIG. 1, an upper plate 19 as a receiving plate for game balls is integrally provided at the lower portion of the front frame set 14 (above the lower plate 15 described above). Here, the upper plate 19 is a ball receiver for temporarily storing game balls and leading them out toward the game ball launcher 38 while aligning them in a line. Further, the front frame set 14 is formed with a substantially elliptical window portion 101 so that most of the game area 30a (see FIG. 2) of the game board 30 can be visually recognized from the outside. Specifically, the window part 101 is a frame body having a hollow center in a substantially elliptical shape in which substantially central portions on the left and right sides thereof are curved relatively gently compared to the upper and lower sides thereof. A substantially elliptical glass plate 137 is attached to the hollow portion of the. This glass plate 137 has a double glass structure. It should be noted that the substantially central portion of the window portion 101 may be formed in a straight line, and the glass plate 137 may be made to conform to that shape. Further, the glass plate 137 is not limited to glass, and any material may be used as long as it is a transparent plate having a predetermined strength.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 1, the front frame set 14 has a first frame button 20 and a second frame button 21 which receive an operation instruction (for example, a push instruction) from the player at the lower left portion of the upper plate 19. It has As shown in FIG. 8, the first frame button 20 is connected to the sub-controller 262 . The second frame button 21 is connected to the main controller 261 . For example, when a predetermined operation valid condition is satisfied, the operation of the first frame button 20 becomes valid, and by pressing the frame button 20, the screen display of the third pattern display device 42 changes, or the output sound changes. , the lamp display is changed, etc., so that the player can actively participate in the game. The second frame button 21 has a shape that imitates the striking surface of a drum, and is used to change the holding state of the holding device 400 from the holding state to the releasing state, as will be described later.

In addition, the front frame set 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the window portion 101 (for example, corner portions) on the front side thereof. These light emitting means play a role of increasing the effect during the game by changing the light emitting mode such as lighting and blinking according to the change of the game state such as when a big win or a predetermined reach. For example, on the peripheral edge of the window 101, a ring-shaped decorative section 102 containing a light-emitting means such as an LED is provided symmetrically. A central illumination section 103 is also provided that incorporates a light-emitting means such as an LED. In the pachinko machine 10, the central illumination part 103 functions as a jackpot lamp, and notifies that the jackpot is in progress by lighting or flashing at the time of the jackpot. In addition, on the left and right sides of the central decorative part 103, there are provided a prize ball lamp 105 that lights up during prize ball payout and an error display lamp 106 that lights up when a predetermined error occurs. Also, a small window 107 made of transparent resin is provided so as to be adjacent to the lower end portion of the annular decorative portion 102 so that a part of the surface of the inner frame 12, the surface of the game board 30, etc. can be visually recognized. Since a predetermined portion of the small window 107 is flat, a certificate stamp or the like attached to the lower right corner of the game board 30 can be read by a machine through the flat portion of the small window 107 .

A ball rental operation unit 120 is arranged below the window 101, and the ball rental operation unit 120 is provided with a ball rental button 121, a return button 122, and a frequency display unit 123. When the ball lending operation unit 120 is operated with banknotes, cards, etc. inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, game balls are lent according to the operation. done. The ball lending button 121 is operated to obtain lending balls based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and lending balls are supplied to the upper tray 19 as long as the card or the like has a balance. be done. The return button 122 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. The frequency display section 123 displays the balance information of the card or the like. The ball lending operation unit 120 is not required in a pachinko machine in which game balls are directly lent to the upper tray from a ball lending device or the like without going through the card unit, that is, a so-called cash machine. Therefore, a decorative sticker or the like is attached to the installation portion of the ball rental operation unit 120. - 特許庁As a result, the pachinko machine using the card unit and the cash machine can share the ball rental operation unit.

Next, the configuration of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. The game board 30 is made of a rectangular plywood board, and is attached with its peripheral edge in contact with the back side of the resin base (not shown) of the inner frame 12. A partial play area 30a is exposed to the front side of the inner frame 12 through the substantially circular resin-based window portion 101 (glass plate 137) shown in FIG. In FIG. 2, only a portion of the inner frame 12 corresponding to the size of the game board 30 is shown, and other regions are omitted.

The game board 30 includes a general prize winning port 31a, a general prize winning port 31b, a variable winning device 32, a first starting port 33a (for example, navel), a first starting port 33b (for example, an electric chew, an operating chucker), a second starting It has a port 34 (for example a through gate), a variable display unit 35 and the like. These parts are arranged in respective through holes formed by router processing in the game board 30, and attached from the front side of the game board 30 with wood screws or the like. A game ball enters the above-described general winning openings 31a, 31b, the variable winning device 32, and the first starting openings 33a, 33b, and is detected by a detection switch, which will be described later, based on the output of this detection switch. , a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the upper tray 19 (or the lower tray 15). An incoming ball detection switch 31c is provided at the first starting port 33a. An incoming ball detection switch 31d is provided at the first starting port 33b. A passage detection switch 34a is provided at the second starting port 33b. It should be noted that the entry into the first starting ports 33a and 33b is a starting condition for the first symbol display device 40 and the third symbol display device 42 to start the variable display of the first symbol and the third symbol. there is Passing through the second starting port 34 is a starting condition for the second symbol display device 41 to start variable display of the second symbol.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 2, the game board 30 is provided with an out port 36, and game balls that do not enter the various prize-winning devices pass through the out port 36 to a ball discharge path (not shown). It is designed to be guided to the direction. A large number of nails are planted on the game board 30 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game balls.

The variable display device unit 35 is triggered by the winning of the first starting ports 33a and 33b, and the first pattern display device 40 that variably displays the first pattern (for example, a special pattern) and the passage of the second starting port 34. Triggered by the second pattern display device 41 for variably displaying the second pattern (for example, normal pattern), and by using the winning to the first start ports 33a and 33b as a trigger, the third pattern (for example, decorative pattern) is variably displayed. A third pattern display device 42 is provided. The first pattern, the second pattern and the third pattern are identifications that allow the player to identify whether the result of the variable display of the first pattern, the second pattern and the third pattern is the special game state advantageous to the player. Information.

The first pattern display device 40 includes, for example, a plurality of (two in this embodiment) two-color light emitting type LEDs (light emitting diodes) 40a and 40b, and a hold indicating the number of holdings of variable display by the LEDs 40a and 40b. and a lamp 40c. The number of times the game ball passes through the first starting ports 33a and 33b is suspended up to four times, and the number of suspensions is displayed by the suspension lamp 40c. The suspension lamp 40c may be configured such that a suspension display or the like is performed on a part of the display screen of the third symbol display device 42, or the like. The LEDs 40a and 40b can emit red and blue light, for example. The first pattern display device 40 alternately changes the light emission colors of the LEDs 40a and 40b to generate a variable display state of the first pattern (in this embodiment, the light emission color mode of the LEDs 40a and 40b). For example, in the case of a light emission mode in which both LEDs 40a and 40b stop in a blue light emission state, it indicates that the first special game state (for example, normal jackpot state) has been won. In addition, in the case of the light emission mode in which the LED 40a stops in the blue light emission state and the LED 40b stops in the red light emission state, it indicates that the second special game state (for example, the time saving jackpot state) has been won. Also, in the case of the light emission mode in which both LEDs 40a and 40b stop in the red light emission state, it indicates that the third special game state (for example, probability variable jackpot state) has been won. In addition, in the case of the light emitting mode in which the LED 40a stops in the red light emitting state and the LED 40b stops in the blue light emitting state, it indicates a failure (that the special game state has been lost).

As the first pattern display device 40, a single LED capable of emitting light of at least three colors may be employed. When the LED stops emitting light in a first color, it indicates a probability variable jackpot, when the LED stops emitting light in a second color, it indicates a normal jackpot, and the LED emits light in a third color. Stopping in the state may indicate a time-saving jackpot, and stopping while the LED is emitting light in the fourth color may indicate a loss.

The second pattern display device 41 includes a display portion 41a for the second pattern on which, for example, "○" is drawn, a display portion 41b for which the second pattern is drawn, for example, "X", and a holding lamp 41c. Each time the game ball passes through the second starting port 34, for example, the display pattern (normal pattern) by the display parts 41a and 41b fluctuates, and when the fluctuation display stops at a predetermined pattern, the lower side One starting port 33b is configured to be in an operating state (opened) for a predetermined time. The number of times the game ball passes through the second starting port 34 is suspended up to four times, and the number of suspensions is displayed by the suspension lamp 41c. The display units 41a and 41b have LEDs (light-emitting diodes) inside thereof, and are configured to perform variable display by switching the light emission of these LEDs (or the lighting of lamps).

The third pattern display device 42 is composed of, for example, a liquid crystal display device, and display contents are controlled by a display control device 45, which will be described later. On the third pattern display device 42, three decorative pattern rows L, M, and R of left, middle, and right are displayed, as shown in FIG. 9, which will be described later. Each of the decorative pattern rows L, M, and R is composed of a plurality of decorative patterns, and these decorative patterns are variably displayed on the third pattern display device 42 so as to be scrolled for each of the decorative pattern rows L, M, and R. It has become so. Also, the third pattern display device 42 can display a special game moving image in which an image of a predetermined character or the like is operated during a period in which the opening/closing operation member changes between the open state and the closed state. In this embodiment, the third pattern display device 42 (liquid crystal display device) is provided with a large liquid crystal display of 9.3 inches, for example. A center frame 47 is arranged in the variable display device unit 35 so as to surround the third pattern display device 42 . Incidentally, the third pattern display device 42 described above corresponds to the image display device in the present invention.

As shown in FIG. 2, the variable prize winning device 32 is normally in a closed state in which game balls cannot or hardly win prizes, and can be switched between an open state in which game balls are likely to win in the event of a big win and a normal closed state. It is operated repeatedly. In this way, the state in which the variable winning device 32 is repeatedly operated between the open state and the normal closed state at the time of a big win is called a special game state (for example, a big win state). Since the ball enters (wins a prize) and a large number of game balls are paid out in response to the winning, the game state is advantageous for the player.

More specifically, when the game ball wins the first start openings 33a, 33b, the two LEDs 40a, 40b of the first symbol display device 40 are variably displayed, and the display of the LEDs 40a, 40b after the variability is stopped is set in advance. A special game state occurs when a combination of light emission modes is achieved.

In this embodiment, the variable prize winning device 32 has a door member 32b that opens and closes the big prize opening 32a. is in an open state, and the game ball is configured to easily win a prize. Specifically, the variable prize winning device 32 is set to 1 round when a predetermined time elapses or a predetermined number of prizes are won in the open state. ) is repeatedly opened. For example, one round is set to end (the door member 32b is closed) when 30 seconds have passed since the opening of the door member 32b or when 10 game balls have been won. .

In addition, as shown in FIG. 2, the game board 30 is provided with a rail unit 50 for guiding game balls fired from a game ball launcher 38 (see FIG. 7) to the upper part of the game board 30. A game ball shot in accordance with the turning operation of the game ball shooting handle 18 is guided to a predetermined game area 30a through a ball guide passage 49 of the rail unit 50, which will be described later. The rail unit 50 is composed of a ring-shaped resin molded product (for example, molded by adding fluororesin), and has an inner rail 51 and an outer rail 52 which are integrally formed inside and outside. . The inner rail 51 is formed in a substantially annular shape except for about 1/4 of the upper part, and the outer rail 52 is formed so that a part (mainly the left side) faces the inner rail 51 . In this case, the guide rail is constituted by the inner rail 51 and the outer rail 52, and the ball guide passage 49 is formed by the portion (on the left side) where the rails 51 and 52 are parallel to each other with a predetermined interval therebetween. . The ball guide passage 49 is formed in a groove shape having a contact surface with the game board 30, that is, in a groove shape with an open front side.

A return ball prevention member 53 is attached to the tip portion of the inner rail 51 (upper left portion in FIG. 2). As a result, the game ball once guided from the ball guide passage 49 between the inner rail 51 and the outer rail 52 to the upper part of the game board 30 is prevented from returning to the ball guide passage 49 again. It's becoming A return rubber 54 is attached to the outer rail 52 at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the game ball (upper right in FIG. 2: a portion corresponding to the tip of the outer rail 52). Therefore, a game ball shot with a force greater than or equal to a predetermined amount hits the return rubber 54 and is bounced back. On the inner surface of the outer rail 52, a sliding plate 55 as an elongated stainless steel metal belt is provided in order to smoothen the flight of the game ball, that is, to reduce the frictional resistance of the game ball. is attached.

In addition, an arc-shaped flange 56 is formed on the outer peripheral portion of the rail unit 50 so as to protrude outward when viewed from the front. The flange 56 constitutes a mounting surface for the game board 30 . When the rail unit 50 is attached to the game board 30, the flange 56 is brought into contact with the game board 30. In this state, screws or the like are inserted through the plurality of through-holes formed in the flange 56 to attach the rail unit 50 to the game board. Fastening of the rail unit 50 to 30 is made.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the upper, lower, left, and right ends of the rail unit 50 are formed substantially straight (flat) when viewed from the front. That is, the flanges 56 are cut off from the upper, lower, left, and right ends of the rail unit 50 so that the rail diameter can be expanded in the finite area of the pachinko machine 10, that is, the game area 30a on the game board 30 can be expanded. It's becoming

A protrusion 57 is formed at the entrance of the ball guide passage 49 between the inner rail 51 and the outer rail 52 so as to partially close the ball guide passage 49 . The convex portion 57 is provided in a substantially vertical direction from the inner rail 51 to the lower end of the rail unit 50, and is provided on the inner frame 12 to prevent foul balls flowing backward in the ball guide passage 49 without reaching the game area 30a. It serves to lead to a ball passage (not shown). The lower right corner and the lower left corner of the game board 30 are spaces for affixing stickers (S1 and S2 in FIG. 2) such as certificate stamps (for example, manufacturing numbers are written) and plates. , notches 58 and 59 are formed in the flange 56 in order to secure this affixing space. By attaching seals such as certificate stamps (S1 and S2 in FIG. 2) to the lower right corner and lower left corner of the game board 30, the game board 30 and the certificate stamp can be made unique.

Next, the game area 30a of the game board 30 will be described. As shown in FIG. 2, the game area 30a is defined in a substantially circular shape by the inner periphery (inner and outer rails) of the rail unit 50. The game area 30a is configured to be much larger than before. In this embodiment, the distance from the top of the outer rail 52 to the bottom of the game board 30 is 445 mm (58 mm longer than the conventional product), and the distance from the extreme left position of the outer rail 52 to the extreme right position of the inner rail 51 is 445 mm. is 435 mm (50 mm longer than the conventional product). The distance from the extreme left position of the inner rail 51 to the extreme right position of the inner rail 51 is 418 mm.

In this embodiment, the game area 30a is defined by the inner rail 51 and the outer rail 52 when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10, except for the guide rail area that is the parallel portion of the inner and outer rails 51 and 52. area. Therefore, when referring to the game area 30a, the guide rail portion is not included. The left limit position of the game area 30 a is specified by the inner rail 51 . The right limit position of the game area 30a is specified by the outer rail 52 and the components of the inner frame 12 arranged along the outer rail 52. As shown in FIG. Also, the lower limit position of the game area 30 a is specified by the lower end position of the game board 30 . Also, the upper limit position of the game area 30a is specified by the outer rail 52. As shown in FIG.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the width of the game area 30a (maximum width in the horizontal direction) is 418 mm, and the height of the game area 30a (maximum width in the vertical direction) is 445 mm.

Although the disclosure of detailed drawings is omitted, game balls are supplied one by one to the game ball launcher 38 from the ball outlet on the front frame set 14 side (the ball outlet leading from the most downstream part of the upper tray 19). .

In the game area 30a, a third pattern display device 42 is arranged at a position slightly above the central portion, and a left narrow region 30a1 in which a plurality of nails are arranged on the left lateral side of the third pattern display device 42. is formed. In addition, the game area 30a has a width narrower than the width of the left narrow area 30a1 from the upper side to the vicinity of the center on the right lateral side of the third symbol display device 42, and is such that one game ball can barely pass through. An upper right narrow region 30a2 is formed, and extends from the vicinity of the center to the lower side of the right lateral side of the third pattern display device 42, continues to the downstream side of the upper right narrow region 30a2, and extends from the width of the upper right narrow region 30a2. A lower right game area 30a3 is formed which is wide and has a plurality of flow-down paths for game balls. A second starting port 34, a first starting port 33b, and a variable winning device 32 are arranged in the lower right game area 30a3, and a holding device capable of holding a plurality of game balls is provided on the left side of the variable winning device 32. A device 400 is provided, and a general prize winning opening 31b is provided on the lower left side of the holding device 400. - 特許庁

In the normal game state, an operation (left-handed game) of shooting a game ball from the left narrow region 30a1 aiming at the first starting port 33a is performed. During the jackpot state (during the jackpot round game), an operation (right hitting game) of shooting a game ball aiming at the variable winning device 32 from the right narrow area 30a2 is performed. In the case of a probability variable big win or a time-saving big win, a right-handed game is played during the big win state, and a right-handed game aiming at the first start port 33b is played also during the probability variable state or the time-saving state after the big win state.

When a game ball is shot to the right aiming at the upper right narrow area 30a2, the game ball exiting the upper right narrow area 30a2 passes through the second starting port . When the result of the lottery (second symbol lottery) based on the detection of passing through the second starting port 34 is a win, the opening and closing member 33c (see FIG. 4) of the first starting port 33b is opened, and after a predetermined time Closed. The opening/closing member 33c is formed in a horizontally elongated, substantially S-shape, and is inclined downward toward the left. The game ball may enter the open first starting port 33b, or may roll on the closed opening/closing member 33c and flow further downstream. A game ball entered into the first starting port 33b is detected by the entering ball detection switch 31d. The detection of an incoming ball by the incoming ball detection switch 31d is a starting condition for starting the variable display of symbols. However, during the normal game state, the probability of winning the result of the second symbol lottery is set to be very low compared to the variable probability state. Therefore, even if the player hits right during the normal game state, winning the second symbol lottery and opening the opening/closing member 33c of the first starting port 33b are unlikely to be expected, so the player hits left during the normal game state. will be

Three nails are arranged in a V-shape on the downstream side of the opening/closing member 33c, and the flow path of the game ball that rolls and flows down on the opening/closing member 33c is divided between the variable winning device 32 side and the holding device 400 side. branch left and right. The game ball diverted to the right side may enter the open big winning hole 32a if it is in the jackpot state, or pass in front of the closed big winning hole 32a and exit from the lower right game area 30a3. It may be discharged and guided to the out port 36 in some cases. Up to five game balls diverted to the left side are held by the holding device 400. - 特許庁The game balls held by the holding device 400 are discharged toward the general winning opening 31b when the holding is released. If the ejected game ball can be successfully placed on a sorting movable valve 409, which will be described later, it enters the general winning hole 31b. When winning to the general winning hole 31b is detected, 15 game balls are paid out as prize balls. The holding device 400 can hold some of the game balls launched toward the big winning opening 32a in the jackpot state. For example, the flow path is formed so that one out of 15 game balls passing through three nails is diverted to the retaining device 400 side.

In order to allow the game ball discharged from the holding device 400 to enter the general winning hole 31b, it is necessary to press the second frame button 21, which will be described later. However, as will be described later, the movable sorting valve 409 operates in a manner that is difficult for the player to visually recognize. It is difficult to enter the game ball discharged from the general winning hole 31b. In addition, the general winning hole 31b is arranged at a position in the lower right game area 30a3 at a position where it is difficult for a game ball not discharged from the holding device 400 to enter. On the other hand, the general prize winning opening 31a is arranged in the left narrow area 30a1 at a position where it is easier for a ball to enter than the general winning opening 31b. In this way, in the normal game state, it is difficult to expect the ball to enter the general winning hole 31b or the first starting hole 33b even if the ball is hit to the right. A left-handed hit that can be expected to enter the ball is performed.

Next, the configuration of the holding device 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 3 and 4. FIG. 4 shows a state in which the decorative plate 413 is removed from the holding device 400 is a cross section of the game board 30 cut parallel to the game area.

The holding device 400 is configured to change between a holding state in which a game ball flowing down the lower right game area 30a3 can be held and a release state in which the holding of the game ball is released. The holding device 400 is configured to change from the holding state to the release state when the player presses the second frame button 21 .

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, the holding device 400 includes a horizontally long rectangular main body part 401 whose upper side is inclined downward to the left, and a plurality of games using the upper surface of the main body part 401. A holding part 403 for holding balls, a holding position for blocking the game balls held in the holding part 403, and a discharge position for allowing discharge of the game balls held in the holding part 403 to the downstream side. and a state switching unit 405 .

The retaining unit 403 can retain up to five game balls in an area surrounded by the upper surface of the main body component 401 and the stake-like game component and the nail arranged on the upper right side thereof (see the figure to be described later). 44). After reserving five game balls, the reserving unit 403 does not accept further reserving of game balls. In this case, the additional game ball collides with the game ball reserved as the fifth ball, and either heads for the big winning opening 32a, or passes the big winning opening 32a and passes through the out opening 36 (see FIG. 2). ).

The holding state switching unit 405 has a rotating shaft at a position slightly above the upper left end of the holding unit 403, and includes a discharge prevention valve 406 that is driven between the holding position and the discharging position about the rotating shaft. ing. The holding position is a position where the discharge prevention valve 406 takes a standing posture so as to block the game ball held in the holding portion 403 . The ejection position is a position in which the ejection prevention valve 406 takes a tilted posture so as to eject the game balls held in the holding portion 403 .

Switching between the holding position and the ejection position of the ejection prevention valve 406 is performed by the player pressing the second frame button 21 . When the player presses the second frame button 21, the ejection prevention valve 406 is driven to tilt from the holding position to the ejection position, and one game ball held in the holding portion 403 is discharged. The discharge prevention valve 406 returns from the discharge position to the holding position at the timing when one game ball is discharged. As a result, each time the player presses the second frame button 21, the game balls stored in the storage unit 403 can be discharged one by one.

A configuration example for driving the discharge prevention valve 406 has a solenoid and a power transmission mechanism arranged on the back surface of the game board 30, and when the depression of the second frame button 21 is detected, the solenoid is projected or attracted, and the projection or attraction is performed. In response, the power transmission mechanism drives the ejection check valve 406 from the hold position to the ejection position. In this configuration, at the timing when one game ball is discharged, the solenoid operates in the opposite direction, and the power transmission mechanism drives the discharge prevention valve 406 from the discharge position to the holding position according to the operation.

On the downstream side of the holding state switching part 405, there is a retreat position that makes it difficult for the game balls whose reservation is canceled to enter the general winning opening 31b, and a game ball whose holding is canceled makes it easy for the game balls to enter the general winning opening 31b. A diverting movable valve 409 is provided for performing a diverting operation that changes between the projecting position and the projecting position. Specifically, the sorting movable valve 409 is recessed inwardly recessed in the left side surface of the main body component 401 at the retracted position, and is driven to be exposed from the recessed portion at the projecting position. be done. The distribution movable valve 409 is switched between a protruded position and a retracted position by a solenoid arranged on the back surface of the game board 30 and a power transmission mechanism. The solenoid and the power transmission mechanism for driving the distribution movable valve 409 are the same as those for driving the distribution state switching piece 405 described above.

When the game ball ejected from the holding portion 403 rides on the movable sorting valve 409 in the protruding position, it is guided from the movable sorting valve 409 to the general winning opening 31b, and enters the general winning opening 31b. win a prize.

The sorting operation of the sorting movable valve 409 is performed in a manner that is difficult for the player to visually recognize. A mode in which the sorting action is difficult for the player to visually recognize is realized by a plurality of modes. Specifically, the first aspect in which the sorting operation is difficult for the player to visually recognize is the aspect in which the sorting movable valve 409 operates at high speed. The sorting movable valve 409 changes from the retracted position to the projecting position and returns to the retracted position, for example, in about 0.9 seconds. Such an operation is, for example, sufficiently faster than the opening and closing speed of the door member 32b that opens and closes the big prize opening 32a, so it is difficult for the player to visually recognize it. Therefore, normally, it is difficult to put the game ball discharged from the holding device 400 on the movable sorting valve 409 while the movable sorting valve 409 is in the protruding position and win the general prize winning opening 31b.

The operation of the sorting movable valve 409 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 and 6. FIG.

In FIG. 5, the position of the tip of the diverting movable valve 409 in the retracted position is called P1, and the diverting movable valve 409 extends about half of the total length (slightly longer than half of the maximum protrusion amount). The position of the tip in the projected state is called P2, and the position of the tip when the sorting movable valve 409 is in the projected position is called P3. The movable iron core of the distribution movable valve 409 is attracted by applying an electric current to the solenoid, and is shifted from P1 to P3 via P2 in accordance with the movement of the movable iron core. In addition, when the current to the solenoid is cut off, the movable iron core of the sorting movable valve 409 is pulled back by the restoring force of a spring or the like. be done.

As shown in FIG. 6, the sorting movable valve 409 is shifted from P1 to P2 over 0.2 seconds from 0.0 seconds after the start of the movable timing to 0.2 seconds after the start of the movable timing (this period is referred to as the first period). The game ball that falls to the height of the sorting movable valve 409 in the first period falls without hitting the sorting movable valve 409, or is pushed from the side (to the left) by the tip of the sorting movable valve 409. , it is not guided to the general prize winning port 31b, and it is difficult to win the general prize winning port 31b.

The transition from P2 to P3 takes 0.1 seconds from 0.2 seconds after the start of the movable timing to 0.3 seconds after the start of the movable timing (this period is called a second A period). The transition from P3 to P2 takes 0.1 seconds from 0.6 seconds after the start of the movable timing to 0.7 seconds after the start of the movable timing (this period is called a second B period). A game ball falling to the height of the sorting movable valve 409 in the 2A period and the 2B period easily rides on the sorting movable valve 409, is guided to the general winning opening 31b, and easily enters the general winning opening 31b.

The sorting movable valve 409 stops at position P3 for 0.3 seconds from 0.3 seconds after the start of the movable timing to 0.6 seconds after the start of the movable timing (this period is called a third period). The game ball that falls to the height of the sorting movable valve 409 in the third period has the largest protrusion amount of the sorting movable valve 409, so it is surely guided to the general winning opening 31b, and wins the most to the general winning opening 31b. easy.

The transition from P2 to P1 takes 0.2 seconds from 0.7 seconds after the start of the movable timing to 0.9 seconds after the start of the movable timing (this period is called a fourth period). The game ball that falls to the height of the sorting movable valve 409 in the fourth period only slightly touches the tip of the sorting movable valve 409, so the game ball may drop down the side of the main body part 401 as it is. many. Therefore, in the fourth period, the player is not guided to the general prize-winning opening 31b, and it is difficult to win the general prize-winning opening 31b.

In this way, the distribution movable valve 409 maintains the projecting position for a short period of time, and the transition from the retracted position to the projecting position (projection operation) is also the transition from the projecting position to the retracted position (return operation). operation) is also fast. Therefore, even if the player can see the operation of the sorting movable valve 409, it is difficult for the player to win the game ball held in the holding device 400 into the general prize winning opening 31b.

The sorting operation of the sorting movable valve 409 employs a mode that is difficult for the player to visually recognize, in addition to the speed of the operation. For example, as shown in FIG. 3, the holding device 400 is arranged on the front side of the main body part 401, and is arranged on the front side of the decorative plate 413 made of colored and transparent resin and the decorative plate 413. !” and a transparent resinous movable decorative piece 415 on which characters are applied. The decorative plate 413 is sized to cover the movable sorting valve 409 . The movable decorative piece 415 swings up and down little by little behind the discharge check valve 406 and the sorting movable valve 409 .

Here, if the sorting movable valve 409 and the movable decorative piece 415 start to move at the same time, even if the sorting movable valve 409 operates in a manner that is difficult for the player to visually recognize, the movement of the movable decorative piece 415 will not occur. The operation timing of the sorting movable valve 409 may be predicted from the timing. However, in this embodiment, the movable decorative piece 415 starts to move at a trigger different from the operation of the sorting movable valve 409 . For example, the sorting movable valve 409 operates when the game machine is turned on, but the movable decorative piece 415 operates upon detection of a ball entering the first starting port 33a. Since the sorting movable valve 409 and the movable decorative piece 415 operate asynchronously, it is difficult for the player to predict the operating timing of the sorting movable valve 409 from the operating timing of the movable decorative piece 415 . As a result, it becomes difficult to visually recognize whether the sorting movable valve 409 is at the retracted position or the protruding position, so it becomes difficult to match the timing when the sorting movable valve 409 is at the protruding position and the timing at which the game ball is released.

Further, the holding device 400 is provided with a holding area light emitting part 417 that emits light toward the front side at a location adjacent to the discharge blocking valve 406 and the movable sorting valve 409 . The light emitted from the reservation area light emitting part 417 is diffused by the decorative plate 413 and the movable decorative piece 415, and the diffused light makes the operation of the sorting movable valve 409 difficult to see. As a result, it becomes difficult to visually recognize whether the movable sorting valve 409 is at the retracted position or the protruding position, so it becomes difficult to match the timing when the sorting movable valve 409 is at the protruding position and the timing at which the game ball is released from the hold. .

In this way, if a game ball is shot toward the big winning opening 32a during a jackpot game, the game ball can be held in the holding device 400 at the same time. Also, the game balls held in the holding device 400 can be ejected from the holding device 400 at any timing when the player operates the second frame button 21, aiming at winning the general prize winning opening 31b. . However, as will be described later, the distribution movable valve 409 operates at a constant cycle from the time the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, and operates in a manner that is difficult for the player to visually recognize, such as operating at high speed as described above. Then, it is difficult to make the game balls held in the holding device 400 enter the general winning opening 31b. In order to make the game ball held in the holding device 400 enter the general prize winning opening 31b, the player participates in a movable pattern suggesting performance that suggests the movable pattern of the movable cycle of the sorting movable valve 409, as will be described later. There is a need.

Next, the configuration of the rear surface of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. As shown in FIG. 7, the pachinko machine 10 has various control boards arranged vertically and horizontally on its rear surface (actually, the rear surface of the inner frame 12 and the game board 30), or stacked vertically and horizontally. Further, a game ball supply device (payout mechanism section 352) for supplying game balls, a resin protective cover, and the like are attached. In this embodiment, various control boards are mounted on two mounting bases to constitute two control board units, and these control board units are individually mounted on the inner frame 12 or the back surface of the game board 30. ing. In this case, the main control device 261 and the sub-control device 262 shown in FIG. 8 to be described later are mounted on one mounting base to form a unit, and the payout control device 311 and the launch control device 312 shown in FIG. 8 to be described later and the power supply device 313 are mounted on the other mount to form a unit. Here, for convenience, the former unit will be referred to as "first control board unit 201" and the latter unit will be referred to as "second control board unit 202".

The dispensing mechanism 352 and the protective cover are also integrated as one unit, and the resin portion is generally called a back pack, so the unit is called a "back pack unit 203" here. A detailed configuration of each unit 201 to 203 will be described later.

The first control board unit 201, the second control board unit 202, and the back pack unit 203 are configured so that they can be attached and detached on a unit-by-unit basis without using any tools. It is provided so that it can be opened and closed with respect to the inner frame 12 or the back surface of the game board 30 . This is also a contrivance for making it possible to easily confirm hidden structures and the like even when the units 201 to 203 and other structures are stacked one on top of the other.

In addition, on the back side of the game board 30, a prize winning detection mechanism for detecting passage of game balls such as various prize winning ports is provided. Specifically, a winning opening switch is provided at a position corresponding to the general winning opening 31 on the front side of the game board 30, and the variable winning device 32 is provided with a count switch. The count switch is a switch for counting winning balls. In addition, operating port switches are provided at positions corresponding to the first starting ports 33a and 33b, respectively, and the entry of a game ball into the first starting ports 33a and 33b is detected by the operating port switches. A gate switch is provided at a position corresponding to the second starting port 34, and the passage of the game ball to the second starting port 34 is detected by the operating port switch.

The winning slot switch and the gate switch are connected to a board connection board (not shown) through electrical wiring (not shown), and this board connection board is further connected to a main control board 261a (see FIG. 8) in the main control device 261, which will be described later. ing. In addition, the count switch is connected to a large winning opening relay terminal board (not shown), and this large winning opening relay terminal board (not shown) is also connected to the main control board 261a. On the other hand, the operation port switch is directly connected to the main control board 261a without going through the relay board.

The variable winning device 32 is provided with a later-described large winning opening solenoid 432 for opening the large winning opening 32a. Further, the first starting port 33b is provided with an actuation port solenoid for opening the electric accessory.

The detection results respectively detected by the winning detection mechanism are taken into a main control board 261a in the main controller 261, which will be described later, and the main control board 261a issues a payout command (game ball payout number) is transmitted to the payout control board 311a. Then, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out according to the output of the payout control board 311a. In such a case, the conventional method (the so-called evidence ball method) is to collect the game balls that have entered the various winning holes in the winning ball processing device, and then check the existence of the winning balls one by one by the winning ball processing device. ), in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the winning of game balls is electrically detected for each of the various winning holes, and the payout is immediately performed (that is, in the pachinko machine 10, the winning ball processing device is eliminated. is doing). Therefore, even if there are a large number of game balls to be put out, it is possible to quickly carry out the putout. However, the conventional "evidence ball system" may be applied to the present invention.

The first control board unit 201 has a substantially L-shaped mounting base (not shown) on which a main controller 261 and a sub-controller 262 are mounted. Here, the main control device 261 has a main control board 261a, which will be described later. The board box 263 includes a substantially rectangular parallelepiped box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. These box base and box cover are unopenably connected by a sealing unit (sealing means), whereby the substrate box 263 is sealed.

Any configuration can be applied to the sealing unit as the sealing means as long as it is configured to connect the box base and the box cover in an unopenable manner. In this embodiment, for example, five sealing members are connected. The box base and the box cover are unopenably connected to each other by inserting locking claws into the elongated holes of the sealing member. The sealing process by the sealing unit prevents unauthorized opening after sealing, and even if unauthorized opening should occur, such a situation can be detected early and easily. It is possible to perform the opening/sealing process again later. That is, the sealing process is performed by inserting the locking claw into the long hole of at least one of the five sealing members forming the sealing unit (not shown). When the board box 263 is to be opened due to, for example, a problem with the main control board 261a housed therein, the connection between the sealing member into which the engaging claw is inserted and the other sealing member is cut off. After that, when the sealing process is performed again, the locking claw is inserted into the long hole of another sealing member. If the history of the opening of the circuit board box 263 is left in the circuit board box 263, it can be easily detected that the circuit board box 263 has been illegally opened.

Further, the sub-controller 262 has a sub-control board 262a, which will be described later, and this sub-control board 262a is housed in a board box (not shown) made of a transparent resin material or the like. A power relay board (not shown) is mounted on the sub-control device 262, and power supplied from a power board (described later) is supplied to the sub-control device 262 and the display control device 45 via this power relay board (not shown). is output to

The second control board unit 202 has a horizontally long mounting base (not shown) on which a payout control device 311, a launch control device 312, a power supply device 313 and a card unit connection board (not shown) are mounted. ing. The payout control device 311 is equipped with a CPU that forms the center of control, and a control board including ROM, RAM, various ports, etc. The launch control device 312 is equipped with a launch control board, and the power supply device 313 is a power supply. It has a control board. A payout control board 311a of the payout control device 311 controls payout of prize balls and rental balls. In addition, the shooting control board of the shooting control device 312 controls the shooting device 229 (see FIG. 8) according to the operation of the game ball shooting handle 18 by the player, and the power supply board of the power supply device 313 controls various control devices. A required predetermined power supply voltage is generated and output. As the launching device 229, there are various types such as a mechanical launching part that shoots a game ball by hitting it with a launching punch that operates according to the drive of a launching motor, and an electromagnetic launching part that shoots a game ball by generating an electromagnetic field. can be adopted. The card unit connection board (not shown) is electrically connected to the ball lending operation unit 120 (see FIG. 1) on the front of the pachinko machine and the card unit (not shown), takes in the player's ball lending operation command, and pays it out. It outputs to the control device 311 . Note that the card unit connection board 314 is unnecessary in a cash machine in which game balls are directly lent to the upper tray 19 from a ball lending device or the like without going through the card unit.

The payout control device 311, the launch control device 312, the power supply device 313 and the card unit connection board (not shown) are housed in a board box (not shown) made of a transparent resin material or the like. In particular, in the payout control device 311, similarly to the above-described main control device 261, the box base and the box cover constituting the substrate box (enveloping means) are unopenably connected by a sealing unit (sealing means). The box is sealed.

The payout control device 311 is provided with a state return switch (not shown). For example, if a state recovery switch (not shown) is pressed when a dispensing error such as a ball clogging occurs in the dispensing motor section, the dispensing motor 358a (see FIG. 8) is slowly rotated forward to clear the ball clogging (normal state). (return to

Also, a RAM erase switch 323 is provided on the power monitor board 261b. This pachinko machine 10 has a backup function, so that even in the event of a power failure, the state at the time of the power failure is maintained, and when the power is restored from the power failure (recovery of power), the state at the time of the power failure can be restored. It's becoming Therefore, when the power is turned off in a normal procedure (for example, when the hall is closed), the state before the power is turned off is memorized and held. I am planning to put it in.

Next, the configuration of the back pack unit 203 will be described. As shown in FIG. 7, the back pack unit 203 is formed by integrating a resin-molded back pack 351 and a game ball payout mechanism 352 .

The back pack unit 203 is provided with a tank 355 which opens upward at the uppermost portion thereof, and the tank 355 is sequentially replenished with game balls supplied from island facilities (game island facilities) of the game hall. Below the tank 355 is connected a tank rail 356 which has, for example, two rows of ball passages in the horizontal direction and gently slopes downward toward the downstream side. are connected. A payout device 358 is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 357, and payout of the required number of game balls is appropriately performed by a predetermined electrical configuration such as a payout motor 358a. The game balls paid out from the payout device 358 are supplied to the upper tray 19 through a payout passage (not shown) or the like.

Also, the tank rail 356 is provided with a vibrator 360 for applying vibration to the tank rail 356 . For example, the vibrator 360 is fastened and attached to the tank rail 356 with, for example, two screws. Furthermore, the vibrator 360 does not come into surface contact with the tank rail 356 but comes into contact with the two screws, so that the vibration of the vibrator 360 is more effectively transmitted to the tank rail 356. ing. Therefore, if ball clogging occurs near the tank rail 356, the vibrator 360 is driven to clear the ball clogging.

A payout relay board (not shown) for relaying a payout command signal from the payout control device 311 to the payout device 358 is installed in the payout mechanism section 352, and a power switch board 382 for taking in main power from the outside is installed. is set up. The power switch board 382 is supplied with a main power supply of, for example, 24 V AC via a voltage converter, and is turned on or off by switching operation of the power switch 382a.

The payout mechanism 352 from the tank 355 to the payout passage (not shown) is made of a conductive resin material (for example, a conductive polycarbonate resin) and partly grounded. As a result, the generation of noise due to electrification of game balls is suppressed.

As shown in FIG. 7, an inner frame open detection switch 388 for detecting that the inner frame 12 is opened with respect to the outer frame 11 is provided on the upper right side of the inner frame 12 . When the inner frame 12 is opened, the information is output from the inner frame open detection switch 388 to the computer for inside the hall (inside the pachinko parlor).

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. The pachinko machine 10 includes a main control device 261, a payout control device 311, a launch control device 312, a sub control device 262, a display control device 45, a power supply device 313, and the like. These devices are individually described in detail below.

The main control device 261 of the pachinko machine 10 is equipped with a CPU 501 as a one-chip microcomputer, which is an arithmetic device for main control. The CPU 501 includes a ROM 502 storing various control programs such as a game program executed by the CPU 501 and fixed value data, and various data stored in the ROM 502 such as necessary data according to the progress of the game when executing the control program. etc., an input/output port 505 for communicating with various devices, various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data transmission/reception circuit, and the like, which are used in various lotteries. A random number generator (not shown) used for counting time and a clock pulse generating circuit (not shown) used for time counting and synchronization are provided. These electronic components and electronic circuits are provided on the main control board 261a.

The RAM 503 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 313 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and the RAM 503 temporarily stores various data and the like. It has a memory and area for

That is, when the power supply is cut off due to a power failure or the like, the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 executes the normal processing of FIG. Therefore, the RAM 503 only needs to store and hold the contents of the counter buffer and the reserved ball storage area when the power is turned off (including when a power failure occurs; the same shall apply hereinafter). It is possible to return to the state before disconnection. Specifically, the RAM 503 has a dedicated backup area for storing the values of each register and I/O, etc. regarding the game information during normal processing when the power is turned off (including when a power failure occurs; the same shall apply hereinafter). does not need to be set to The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the CPU 501 is configured to receive a power failure signal S1 output from a power failure monitoring circuit 542, which will be described later, when the power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. Upon occurrence, power failure processing (NMI interrupt processing) in FIG. 17 is immediately executed.

An input/output port 505 is connected to the CPU 501 containing the ROM 502 and RAM 503 through a bus line 504 comprising an address bus and a data bus. Connected to the input/output port 505 are a RAM erasure switch circuit 543, a payout control device 311, a launch control device 312, a sub-control device 262, a first symbol display device 40, and a second symbol display device 41, which will be described later.

In addition, the sub-control device 262, for example, in accordance with the instructions from the main control board 261a in the main control device 261, CPU551 and CPU551 to control the sound and lamp display in the variable display effect and the jackpot game effect and the control of the display control device 45 A ROM 552 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the ROM 552; and an input/output port 555 and the like. These electronic components are provided with a sub-control board 262a.

The payout control device 311 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls by means of a payout motor 358a. A CPU 511, which is an arithmetic device, includes a ROM 512 storing control programs executed by the CPU 511, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 513 used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 513 of the payout control device 311, like the RAM 503 of the main control device 261 described above, is configured so that data can be held (backed up) by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 313 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off. The RAM 513 has memories and areas for temporarily storing various data. The payout control device 311 is programmed to pay out 5 game balls for winning a prize in the general winning opening 31a and to pay out 15 gaming balls for winning a prize in the general winning opening 41b.

The RAM 513 stores and retains information regarding the state at the time of power-off in order to restore the state of the pachinko machine 10 to the state before the power-off when power is turned on again when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like. In other words, the storage of the RAM 513 is executed by the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 17) and steps S1015 and S1016 (see FIG. 19) in the second half of the payout control processing when the power is turned off. is executed in power recovery processing at power-on.

An input/output port 515 is connected to the CPU 511 containing the ROM 512 and RAM 513 via a bus line 514 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 515 is connected to the main controller 261, the firing controller 312, the dispensing motor 358a, and the like.

As shown in FIG. 8, the launch control device 312 permits or prohibits the launching of game balls by the launching device 229, and the launching device 229 is permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the launch control device 312 receives the card unit connection signal S4 from the payout control device 311 (a signal output when the card unit described above is connected to the pachinko machine 10), and the player A touch detection signal S5 output when the game ball shooting handle 18 is touched, and output when the shooting stop switch 18a provided on the game ball shooting handle 18 for stopping shooting is not operated. On the condition that all of the firing sustaining signal S6 received are input, the firing permitting signal S7 is output to the main controller 261.

That is, the firing permission state is established while the firing permission signal S7 is ON (high level), and the firing non-permission state is established while the firing permission signal S7 is OFF (low level). That is, the main controller 261, during the period in which the input launch permission signal S7 is ON (high level), the launch control signal S8 (pulse signal) for controlling the launch solenoid that shoots the game ball, and the launch rail A ball feed control signal S9 (pulse signal) for controlling a ball feed solenoid for feeding game balls is repeatedly output to the launch control device 312 at a predetermined repetition cycle. The shooting control device 312 drives and controls the shooting device 229 based on the shooting control signal S8 and the ball feeding control signal S9, and the game ball is shot with an intensity corresponding to the operation amount of the game ball shooting handle 18. Conversely, the main controller 261 does not output the firing control signal S8 and the ball feed control signal S9 to the firing control device 312 while the input firing permission signal S7 is OFF (low level). 229 will not launch a game ball.

The display control device 45 controls the variable display of the third pattern (decorative pattern) in the third pattern display device 42 . The display control device 45 includes a CPU 521 , a ROM (program ROM) 522 , a work RAM 523 , a video RAM 524 , a character ROM 525 , an image controller 526 , an input port 527 , an output port 529 , bus lines 530 and 531 . and The output of the sub-controller 262 is connected to the input of the input port 527 , and the CPU 521 , ROM 522 , work RAM 523 and image controller 526 are connected to the input port 527 . An output port 529 is connected to the image controller 526 via a bus line 531, and the output of the output port 529 is connected to the third pattern display device 42, which is a liquid crystal display device.

The CPU 521 of the display control device 45 controls the decorative design display on the third design display device 42 based on various commands sent from the main control device 261 after being edited by the sub-control device 262 . The ROM 522 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 521, and the work RAM 523 temporarily stores work data and flags used when executing various programs by the CPU 521. memory for

The video RAM 524 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 42. By rewriting the contents of the video RAM 524, the display contents of the third symbol display device 42 are changed. The character ROM 525 is a memory for storing character data such as decorative designs displayed on the third design display device 42 . The image controller 526 adjusts the timings of the CPU 521, the video RAM 524, and the output port 529 to intervene in the reading and writing of data. It is displayed on the pattern display device 42 .

The power supply device 313 also includes a power supply section 541 for supplying power to each section of the pachinko machine 10 . The power supply unit 541 supplies necessary operating power to each of the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 through a power supply path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply unit 541 takes in an AC 24V power supply supplied from the outside, and provides a +12V power supply for driving various switches and motors, a +5V power supply for logic, a backup power supply for RAM backup, and the like. Generate and supply these +12V power, +5V power and backup power to the main control device 261, the payout control device 311 and the like. An operating power source (+12V power source, +5V power source, etc.) is supplied to the launch control device 312 via the payout control device 311 .

As shown in FIG. 8, the main controller 261 includes a main control board 261a and a power monitoring board 261b separate from the main control board 261a in a board box 263 made of a transparent resin material or the like. . The power monitoring board 261b includes a power failure monitoring circuit 542 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure or the like, and a RAM erasing switch circuit 543 connected to the RAM erasing switch 323 .

The power failure monitoring circuit 542 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal S1 to each NMI terminal of the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 and the CPU 511 of the payout controller 311 when the power is shut off due to power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 542 monitors the voltage of 24 volts AC in the power supply unit 541, and determines that a power failure (power failure) has occurred when the time for which the voltage becomes less than 24 volts exceeds, for example, 20 milliseconds. , and outputs a power failure signal S1 to the main controller 261 and the payout controller 311 . By the output of this power failure signal S1, the main controller 261 and the payout controller 311 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute power failure processing (NMI interrupt processing in FIG. 17).

Note that the power supply unit 541 continues to operate the power supply unit 541 for a sufficient period of time to execute the power failure processing even after 20 milliseconds have passed since the AC 5 volts monitored by the power supply unit 541 became less than 5 volts. It is configured to maintain the output of 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, at a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 can normally execute and complete the power failure processing.

The RAM erase switch circuit 543 is a circuit for taking in the switch signal of the RAM erase switch 323 and clearing the backup data of the RAM 503 of the main controller 261 and the RAM 513 of the payout controller 311 according to the state of the switch 323 . When the RAM erase switch 323 is pressed, the RAM erase switch circuit 543 outputs the RAM erase signal S2 to the main control board 261a. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the RAM erasing switch 323 is pressed (including power-on due to power failure cancellation), the main controller 261 clears the data in the RAM 503, and the payout controller 311 is the main controller. 261, the data in the RAM 513 is cleared.

By the way, as shown in FIG. 9, the third pattern display device 42 (liquid crystal display device) is provided with three decorative pattern rows L, M, and R, left, middle, and right. Three decorative patterns, ie, an upper decorative pattern, a middle decorative pattern and a lower decorative pattern are variably displayed for each M and R. In the present embodiment, the third pattern is a main decorative pattern SZ with numbers "0" to "9", and a secondary decorative pattern FZ with a plurality of types of patterns (such as ●, ▲, ■, etc.). Main decorative patterns SZ are displayed in ascending or descending numerical order, and secondary decorative patterns FZ are arranged between the main decorative patterns SZ to form a series of decorative pattern rows L, M, and R. ing. The main decorative pattern SZ and the sub-decorative pattern FZ are variably displayed, for example, from top to bottom with periodicity.

In this case, in the left decorative design row L, the series of decorative designs are displayed in descending order (that is, in order of decreasing number of the main decorative design SZ), and in the middle decorative design row M and the right decorative design row R, the same The above series of decorative designs are displayed in ascending order (that is, in order of increasing numbers of the main decorative designs SZ). Then, the variable display is stopped in the order of the left decorative pattern row L→right decorative pattern row R→middle decorative pattern row M, and five effective lines on the third pattern display device 42, that is, the upper line L1 and the middle line L2 at the time of stopping. , the lower line L3, the upward right line L4, or the upward left line L5, the main decorative symbols SZ or the sub decorative symbols FZ can be arranged in a predetermined combination.

Specifically, the third symbol display device 42 is based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting ports 33a and 33b and the determination result of the CPU 501 of the main control device 261. A predetermined identification information variable display performance (variation display performance of the third symbol) for informing the success or failure of the jackpot state or probability variable jackpot state is performed. Winning in a normal jackpot state is indicated to the player by displaying a state in which the main decorative patterns SZ (third patterns) are even-numbered patterns, for example, on the display screen of the third pattern display device 42. - 特許庁Also, the display screen of the third design display device 42 is arranged with the main decorative designs SZ (third designs) arranged as, for example, odd-numbered designs (the main decorative designs SZ of "1" are arranged on the line L5 shown in FIG. 9A). Winning in the probability variable jackpot state is shown to the player by making a definite display of the state). In addition, the display screen of the third design display device 42 can confirm the state in which the secondary decorative patterns FZ are arranged (the state in which the secondary decorative patterns FZ of "●" are arranged on the line L2 shown in FIG. 9(b)). , the winning of the time-saving jackpot state is shown to the player. Then, the third symbol display device 42 displays a special game animation as a big win when the main decorative symbols SZ and the sub-decorative symbols FZ are combined with the big winning symbols.

Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above will be described.

In this embodiment, the CPU 501 in the main control device 261 uses the random numbers related to the actuation of the accessory and other random numbers used in the game to select the lottery of the first symbol display device 40 (jackpot lottery: first lottery). Pattern jackpot lottery) and pattern display setting, lottery of the second pattern display device 41 (second pattern winning lottery) and pattern display setting, decorative pattern (third pattern) of the third pattern display device 42 A lottery and setting for the variable display are to be carried out.

Specifically, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. A first jackpot random number counter C1a used for the lottery, a first jackpot pattern counter C2a used for selecting a jackpot pattern of the first pattern display device 40 based on the ball entering the first starting port 33a, and a first jackpot random number. A first initial value random number counter CINI1a used for setting the initial value of the counter C1a, and a second jackpot random number counter C1b used for the jackpot lottery of the first symbol display device 40 based on the ball entering the first starting port 33b. , the second jackpot pattern counter C2b used for selecting the jackpot pattern of the first pattern display device 40 based on the ball entering the first starting port 33b, and the second jackpot random number counter C1b used for setting the initial value of the second jackpot random number counter C1b. The initial value random number counter CINI1b and the number of rounds (in the embodiment, 15 A round number determination counter CR for determining (either round or 2 rounds), a second symbol random number counter C4 used for the lottery of the second symbol display device 41, and an initial value of the second symbol random number counter C4. An initial value second symbol random number counter CINI2 used for setting is used.

In addition, in this pachinko machine 10, as other random numbers used for games, as shown in FIG. First and second stop pattern selection counters C3a and C3b used to select the stop pattern, variation type counters CS1, CS2 and CS3 used to select the variation pattern of the decorative pattern of the third symbol display device 42, and the second A second missing symbol counter C5 used for selecting a missing symbol of the symbol display device 41 is used. Each counter described above is configured by a program executed by the CPU 501 .

For example, "stop pattern 0" indicates a group of completely outlier fluctuation patterns consisting of a plurality of types of completely outlier fluctuation patterns, and "stop pattern 1" is a group of outlier reach fluctuation patterns consisting of a plurality of types of outlier reach fluctuation patterns. , "Stop pattern 2" indicates a group of reach fluctuation patterns other than front and rear deviation consisting of a plurality of types of reach fluctuation patterns other than front and rear deviation, and "Stop pattern 3" is a plurality of types of normal jackpot fluctuation patterns. "Stopping pattern 4" shows a time-saving jackpot fluctuation pattern group consisting of a plurality of types of time-saving jackpot fluctuation patterns, and "Stopping pattern 5" shows a plurality of types of probability variable jackpot fluctuations. It shows a probability variable jackpot variation pattern group consisting of patterns.

All of these counters C1a-C3a, C1b-C3b, C4, C5, CINI1a, CIN1b, CINI2, CS1-CS3 add "1" to the previous value each time they are updated (hereinafter referred to as "update"), It is a loop counter that returns to "0" after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is periodically updated, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 503 shown in FIG.

In addition, the RAM 503 has a first holding ball storage area consisting of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas) related to the ball entering the first starting hole 33a, and a first starting A second reserved ball storage area is provided, which consists of one execution area and four reserved areas (first to fourth reserved areas) related to entering a ball into the mouth 33b. For example, in each area of the first reserved ball storage area, there are a first jackpot random number counter C1a, a first jackpot pattern counter C2a, and a first stop pattern selection according to the winning history of game balls to the first start port 33a. Each value of the counter C3a and the round number determination counter CR is stored in chronological order. In each area of the second reserved ball storage area, a second big hit random number counter C1b, a second big win pattern counter C2b, and a second stop pattern selection are provided in accordance with the winning history of game balls to the first start port 33b. Each value of the counter C3b is stored in chronological order.

Each counter described above will be described in detail below with reference to FIG. The first jackpot random number counter C1a is, for example, incremented by one within the range of "0" to "738", and returns to "0" after reaching the maximum value (that is, "738"). In particular, when the first jackpot random number counter C1a makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1a at that time is read as the initial value of the first jackpot random number counter C1a. The first initial value random number counter CINI1a is a loop counter similar to the first jackpot random number counter C1a (value = 0 to 738), and is updated once for each timer interrupt (see FIG. 15), which will be described later. It is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of normal processing (see FIG. 12), which will be described later. The first jackpot random number counter C1a is periodically updated (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt (see FIG. 15), which will be described later), and the RAM 503 is reserved at the timing when the game ball enters the first start port 33a. Stored in the ball storage area.

Similarly, the second jackpot random number counter C1b is also configured to be incremented by 1 in sequence within the range of, for example, "0" to "738" and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value (that is, "738"). It's becoming In particular, when the second big hit random number counter C1b makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI1b at that time is read as the initial value of the second big hit random number counter C1b. The second initial value random number counter CINI1b is a loop counter similar to the second big hit random number counter C1b (value = 0 to 738), and is updated once for each timer interrupt (see FIG. 15), which will be described later. It is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of normal processing (see FIG. 12), which will be described later. The second big hit random number counter C1b is periodically updated (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt (see FIG. 15), which will be described later). 2 Stored in the reserved ball storage area.

The winning values of the first big-hit random number counter C1a and the second big-hit random number counter C1b, that is, the number of random number values to be the big winnings are set to two types, one for low probability (normal time) and one for high probability. The number of random number values that become a big hit at the probability is 2, and the value is "350,700", and the number of random number values that become a big hit at the high probability is 14, and the values are "50, 101, 160, 209, 257, 310, 361, 418, 480, 517, 578, 635, 677, 730". In addition, the high probability time is, for example, a state in which a predetermined probability fluctuation pattern results in a jackpot, and the probability of the subsequent jackpot is increased as an added value, so-called "probability change" time, normal time (low probability time) refers to the time when such a variable state is not present. Also, in the normal game state, the opening time of the first starting port 33b is, for example, 1.0 seconds, while in the variable probability state and the time saving state, the opening time of the second starting port 33b is, for example, 3 0 seconds, it is easier for a game ball to enter the first starting port 33b than the first starting port 33a in the variable probability state and the time saving state.

The first big winning symbol counter C2a is the symbol when the fluctuation of the first symbol display device 40 (consisting of two LEDs 40a and 40b) stops (in this embodiment, after the fluctuation display of the two LEDs 40a and 40b). (final emission state). In this embodiment, the jackpot pattern counter C2 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of, for example, "0" to "4", and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value (that is, "4"). there is The first jackpot symbol counter C2a is periodically updated (once per timer interrupt (see FIG. 15) to be described later) in the same manner as the first jackpot random number counter C1a, and the game ball is first started. It is stored in the first reserved ball storage area of the RAM 503 at the timing of winning the mouth 33a. For example, when the first jackpot random number counter C1a is a jackpot and the values of the first jackpot symbol counter C2a are "0" and "4", both the LEDs 40a and 40b of the first symbol display device 40 emit blue light. state to indicate winning to the normal jackpot state. Further, when the first jackpot random number counter C1a is a jackpot and the value of the first jackpot pattern counter C2a is "1" or "3", the LED 40a stops in a blue light emission state and the LED 40b in a red light emission state. Stops to indicate winning to the time-saving jackpot state. Further, when the first jackpot random number counter C1a is a jackpot and the value of the first jackpot pattern counter C2a is "2", both the LEDs 40a and 40b stop in a red light emission state, and winning to the probability variable jackpot state is made. indicate. In other words, the odd probability of winning the first starting port 33a is 20%. When the first big win random number counter C1a is out, regardless of the value of the first big win symbol counter C2a, both the LEDs 40a and 40b stop in the extinguished state to indicate the loss.

The second big-hit symbol counter C2b is the symbol when the first symbol display device 40 (consisting of two LEDs 40d and 40e) stops fluctuating (in this embodiment, after the two LEDs 40d and 40e fluctuate). (final light emission state). In this embodiment, the second jackpot pattern counter C2b is configured to be incremented by 1 in sequence within the range of, for example, "0" to "4", and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value (that is, "4"). It's becoming The second jackpot symbol counter C2b is periodically updated (once per timer interrupt (see FIG. 15) described later) in the same manner as the above-described second jackpot random number counter C1b, and the game ball is first started. It is stored in the second reserved ball storage area of the RAM 503 at the timing of winning the mouth 33b. For example, when the second jackpot random number counter C1b is a jackpot and the value of the second jackpot symbol counter C2b is "0", both the LEDs 40d and 40e of the first symbol display device 40 stop emitting blue light. , indicating winning to the normal jackpot state. Further, when the second big win random number counter C1b is a big win and the value of the second big win pattern counter C2b is "4", the LED 40a stops in the blue light emission state and the LED 40b stops in the red light emission state, thereby shortening the time. Indicates winning to the jackpot state. In addition, when the second jackpot random number counter C1b is a jackpot and the value of the second jackpot pattern counter C2b is "1" to "3", both LEDs 40a and 40b stop in a red light emitting state, and the probability variable jackpot is won. Indicates election to state. In other words, the odd probability of winning the first starting port 33b is 60%. When the second big winning random number counter C1b is out, regardless of the value of the second big winning symbol counter C2b, both the LEDs 40c and 40d stop in the extinguished state to indicate the out.

Further, the first stop pattern selection counter C3a and the second stop pattern selection counter C3b are incremented by 1 in order within the range of, for example, "0" to "238", and after reaching the maximum value (that is, 238), "0" is reached. It is configured to return to In the present embodiment, as for the winning to the first starting port 33a, the final stop decorative pattern after the reach of the decorative pattern in the third pattern display device 42 is generated by the first stop pattern selection counter C3a. "Reach off the front and back" that stops with only one shift in the front and rear of the reach, and "Reach other than front and back off" in which the final stop decorative pattern stops after reaching the reach decorative pattern other than before and after the reach decorative pattern, and "Complete off without reach" ” will be selected by lottery. In addition, regarding the winning of the first starting port 33b, the second stop pattern selection counter C3b is used to draw lots for "front-rear out-of-reach reach", "front-rear out-of-reach without reach", and "completely out-of-order" in the same manner as described above. there is For example, C3a, C3b=0 to 201 corresponds to complete out, C3a, C3b=202 to 208 corresponds to front-rear out-of-reach reach, and C3a, C3b=209-238 corresponds to non-rear-rear out-of-rear reach. The content of the lottery (drawing of reach) of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is whether the pachinko machine 10 is at a low probability or at a high probability, or the variation time shortening function of the first symbol display device 40 is not activated. It may be individually set according to whether it is an operation or how many balls are in operation at the start of the fluctuation of the first symbol. The first stop pattern selection counter C3a is periodically updated (once per timer interrupt (see FIG. 15), which will be described later), and at the timing when the game ball enters the first starting port 33a, the first reserved ball in the RAM 503 Stored in the storage area. Similarly, the second stop pattern selection counter C3b is also periodically updated (once per timer interrupt (see FIG. 15), which will be described later), and the RAM 503 is stored in the second reserved ball storage area.

The round number determination counter CR is the number of rounds (15 in the embodiment) to open the big winning opening 32a of the variable winning device 32 when the first big winning random number counter C1a becomes a big hit by winning the first starting opening 33a. (either round or 2 rounds). In this embodiment, the round number determination counter CR is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of, for example, "0" to "4", and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value (that is, "4"). ing. The round number determination counter CR is updated periodically (once per timer interrupt (see FIG. 15) to be described later) in the same manner as the above-described first big hit random number counter C1a, and the game ball reaches the first start port. 33a is stored in the first reserved ball storage area of the RAM 503 at the timing of winning. In addition, when the aforementioned first jackpot random number counter C1a is a jackpot and the value of the round number determination counter CR is "0", the number of rounds to open the jackpot 32a of the variable prize winning device 32 is, for example, 15 rounds. (Hereinafter, 15R is shown as appropriate). In addition, when the aforementioned first jackpot random number counter C1a is a jackpot and the value of the round number determination counter CR is "1" to "4", the number of rounds to open the jackpot 32a of the variable prize winning device 32 , for example, two rounds (hereinafter, 2R is shown as appropriate). In other words, when the winning to the first starting port 33a results in a big hit (the first big hit random number counter C1a is a big hit), the number of rounds is set such that the 15R hit is 20% and the 2R hit is 80%. A jackpot state is set.

In addition, when a jackpot is achieved by winning a prize to the first starting port 33b (the second jackpot random number counter C1b is a jackpot), for example, a 15R hit is always executed (15R hit is 100%). In addition, a big win state is set in which the game value given to the player is greater than in the case of winning a prize in the first starting port 33a.

Further, among the three fluctuation type counters CS1 to CS3, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 in order within the range of, for example, "0 to 198", and reaches "0" after reaching the maximum value (that is, "198"). , and the fluctuation type counter CS2 is, for example, incremented one by one within the range of "0 to 240", and after reaching the maximum value (that is, "240"), it returns to "0". The fluctuation type counter CS3, for example, is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of "0 to 162" and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value (that is, "162"). In the following description, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is also called a "first fluctuation type counter", the fluctuation type counter CS2 is called a "second fluctuation type counter", and the fluctuation type counter CS3 is also called a "third fluctuation type counter". .

The first variation type counter CS1 determines a rough variation pattern group of decorative symbols, such as the reach type of decorative symbols (third symbol) such as so-called normal reach, super reach, premium reach, etc., and the type of complete loss. . Here, for example, it is assumed that the first stop pattern selection counter C3a has a value indicating "stop pattern 1" (that is, a value indicating the front-rear off reach fluctuation pattern group), and the front-back off reach fluctuation pattern group is the first It is assumed that the variation pattern of the normal reach group (consisting of a plurality of different types of normal reach) is determined by one variation type counter CS1.

Subsequently, one variation pattern is determined by the second variation type counter CS2 from among the variation pattern group determined by the first variation type counter CS1 in this way. Here, for example, it is assumed that one type of normal reach is determined from the normal reach group by the second variation type counter CS2. In addition, as a plurality of different types of normal reach, it is possible to realize by giving a difference such as a different elapsed time until the final stop decorative pattern (for example, the middle decorative pattern in this embodiment) stops after the occurrence of reach. are mentioned.

Subsequently, the third variation type counter CS3 determines which time to add the variation time in one variation pattern determined by the second variation type counter CS2. For example, as this addition time, when the decorative design (third design) of the middle decorative design row on the third design display device 42 stops sliding, the decorative design of the middle decorative design row slides and then Additional time, which is the time until the display is stopped, can be used. In this way, the variation type counters CS1 to CS3 can determine a more detailed decorative pattern variation mode. In other words, by combining these fluctuation type counters CS1 to CS3, it is possible to easily realize diversification of fluctuation patterns.

In addition, the symbol variation mode is determined only by the first variation type counter CS1, the symbol variation mode is determined only by the first variation type counter CS1 and the second variation type counter CS2, or the first variation type counter CS1 and the stop symbol It is also possible to determine the symbol variation mode by combining with , or to determine the symbol variation mode by combining the first variation type counter CS1 and the second variation type counter CS2 with the stop symbol.

The fluctuation type counters CS1 to CS3 are updated once each time the normal processing described later is executed, and are repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the normal processing. Then, the buffer values of the variation type counters CS1 to CS3 are acquired when determining the variation pattern when the first symbol display device 40 starts to vary the first symbol. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 10, the variation type counters CS1 to CS3 are acquired at the start of variation of the first symbol by the first symbol display device 40, so the first reserved ball storage area or the second reserved ball storage area There is no need to store it in the area, and it is sufficient to sequentially update and store it in the counter buffer.

Note that the sizes and ranges of the respective counters described above are merely examples and can be arbitrarily changed. However, the size of the first jackpot random number counter C1a, the second jackpot random number counter C1b, the first stop pattern selection counter C3a, the second stop pattern selection counter C3b, and the fluctuation type counters CS1 to CS3 are all different prime numbers, and in any case It is desirable to set the values that are not synchronized with each other. Also, the counter values of the first big-hit random number counter C1a and the second big-hit random number counter C1b may be different values.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10, a second symbol random number counter C4 is used for the second symbol lottery of the second symbol display device 41. FIG. The second symbol random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by one within the range of, for example, "0" to "250" and returns to "0" after reaching the maximum value (that is, 250). The second symbol random number counter C4 is periodically updated (once per timer interrupt (see FIG. 15), which will be described later), and is obtained when the game ball passes through either the left or right second starting port 34.

The winning value of the second symbol random number counter C4, that is, the number of random number values to be the second symbol winning is set in two types, one for low probability (normal) and one for high probability. The number of values of the random number that becomes the second pattern at the time of low probability is five, and the values are "50, 101, 150, 201, 250". The number of values of the random number that will be the second symbol at the time of high probability is 200, and the values are "0" to "199".

In particular, when the second symbol random number counter C4 makes one round, the initial value of the second symbol random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second symbol random number counter C4. The initial value second symbol random number counter CINI2 is a loop counter similar to the second symbol random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 250), and is updated once for each timer interrupt (see FIG. 15) to be described later. , are repeatedly updated within the remaining time of normal processing (see FIG. 12), which will be described later. The second symbol random number counter C4 is periodically updated (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt (see FIG. 15), which will be described later), and at the timing when the game ball passes through the second starting port 34, the RAM 503 It is stored in the 2-symbol reserve storage area.

In other words, the RAM 503 also has a second symbol retention storage area which is an area different from the first retention ball storage area and the second retention ball storage area. A second symbol reservation storage area consisting of two symbol reservation areas (second symbol reservation first to fourth areas) is provided, and each of these areas has a game to the second start port 34. Each value of the second symbol random number counter C4 is stored chronologically in accordance with the winning history of the ball.

In addition, the second symbol missing symbol counter C5 is updated once each time the second symbol control process of the normal process in FIG. When the buffer is updated and acquired and the second symbol random number counter C4 is stored in the second symbol reserved ball storage area, the second symbol lost symbol counter C5 updated and acquired by this second symbol lost symbol buffer is also the second symbol. Stored in the reserved ball storage area. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 10, when the value of the second symbol random number counter C4 is a failure, "X" is drawn based on the value of the second symbol lost symbol counter C5 in the second symbol reserved ball storage area. The displayed display portion 41b is illuminated. It should be noted that the second symbol variation display result may be performed based only on the second symbol random number counter C4 without providing the second symbol discrepancy symbol counter C5. In other words, if the second symbol random number counter C4 wins, the display portion 41a drawn with "O" is lit, and if the prize is lost, the display portion 41b with "x" is lit.

In this way, since the probability of the second symbol lottery is high during the variable probability state or the time saving state, it is easy to win the second symbol lottery. Further, when the second symbol lottery is won, the opening frequency of the first starting port 33b is higher than during the normal game state, and the opening time of the first starting port 33b is also longer than during the normal game state. Moreover, if the game ball enters the first starting hole 33b, the 15R hit is 100%. Therefore, the player performs a right-handed game aiming at the first starting port 33b during the variable probability state or the time saving state. On the other hand, after the variable probability state or the time saving state ends, it is difficult to win the second symbol lottery. Since it is short, it is extremely difficult to enter the ball into the first starting opening 33b. Therefore, the player performs a left-handed game aiming at the first starting port 33a after the variable probability state or the time saving state ends. Also, if a left-handed game is played, a prize to the general winning opening 31a can be expected, so the player performs a left-handed game after the variable probability state ends.

Next, each control process executed by the CPU 501 in the main controller 261 will be described with reference to the flow charts of FIGS. 11 to 21. FIG. The processing of the CPU 501 can be broadly classified into main processing that is activated when the power is turned on, timer interrupt processing that is periodically activated (every 2 msec in this embodiment), and power failure to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal). There is an NMI interrupt process that is activated by the input of a signal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process will be explained first, and then the main process will be explained.

FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing, which is executed by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261, for example, every 2 msec.

In FIG. 15, first, in step S601, various prize winning switches are read. That is, it reads the states of various switches (except for the RAM erase switch 323) connected to the main controller 261, determines the states of the switches, and saves detection information (winning detection information).

After that, in step S602, the first and second initial value random number counters CINI1a, CINI1b and the initial value second symbol random number counter CINI2 are updated. Specifically, the first and second initial value random number counters CINI1a and CINI1b are incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value ("738" in this embodiment), it is cleared to "0", The initial value second symbol random number counter CINI2 is incremented by one, and cleared to "0" at the time of one increment after the counter value reaches the maximum value ("250" in this embodiment). Then, the updated values of the first and second initial value random number counters CINI1a and CINI1b are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 503 (see FIG. 10).

Further, as shown in FIG. 15, in subsequent step S603, first and second jackpot random number counters C1a and C1b, first and second jackpot pattern counters C2a and C2b, and first and second stop pattern selection counters C3a and C3b. update. Specifically, the first and second jackpot random number counters C1a and C1b, the first and second jackpot pattern counters C2a and C2b, and the first and second stop pattern selection counters C3a and C3b are incremented by one, respectively, and After the counter value reaches the maximum value ("738", "4" and "250" respectively in this embodiment), it is cleared to "0" when incremented by one. Then, the updated values of the counters C1a to C3a and C1b to C3b are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 503 (see FIG. 10).

After that, as shown in FIG. 15, in step S604, a starting prize-winning process associated with winning to the first starting ports 33a and 33b is executed. This starting winning process will be explained with reference to the flow chart of FIG. 16. In step S701, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the first starting openings 33a, 33b based on the detection information of the operation opening switch. When it is determined that the game ball has won the first starting ports 33a and 33b, in the subsequent step S702, in the case of winning to the first starting port 33a, the first starting port of the first symbol display device 40 It is determined whether or not the number N1 of operation pending balls for 33a is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment). Also, in the case of winning to the first starting port 33b, whether the number N2 of operation suspension balls for the first starting port 33b of the first symbol display device 40 is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) determine whether or not There is a prize in the first starting port 33a, 33b, and the number of operation suspension balls N1<4 in the first starting port 33a with the winning, or the second starting port 33b with the winning On the condition that the number of balls N2<4, the process proceeds to step S703, and the numbers N1 and N2 of balls N1 and N2 of the winning first starting hole 33a or 33b are incremented by one.

In addition, in the following step S704, a random number related to winning or losing the first symbol is obtained. Specifically, in the case of winning the first starting port 33a, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1a, the first jackpot pattern counter C2a, and the first stop pattern selection counter C3 updated in step S603 is changed to the value of FIG. is stored in the first area of the free storage areas of the first reserved ball storage area of the RAM 503 shown in FIG. In addition, in the case of winning the first starting port 33b, the values of the second big hit random number counter C1b, the second big win pattern counter C2b and the second stop pattern selection counter C3b updated in step S603 are shown in FIG. It is stored in the first area of the empty storage areas of the second reserved ball storage area of the RAM 503 shown. In addition, in the case of winning to the second starting port 33b, the values of the second big hit random number counter C1b, the second big win pattern counter C2b and the second stop pattern selection counter C3b updated in step S603 are shown in FIG. It is stored in the first area of the empty storage areas of the second reserved ball storage area of the RAM 503 shown. In this way, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 performs a lottery to determine whether or not to generate a special game state based on the establishment of the starting condition by means of the function of acquiring random numbers relating to winning or losing the first symbol in step S704. In other words, the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 has a lottery section corresponding to the lottery means of the present invention.

Further, as shown in FIG. 15, in subsequent step S605, a firing control process is executed. Specifically, in the firing control process, the CPU 501 of the main controller 261, as shown in FIG. A signal S9 is output to the shooting control device 312, and game ball shooting control by the shooting device 229 is performed. After executing the firing control process in this manner, the CPU 501 once terminates this timer interrupt process.

FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing NMI interrupt processing, and this processing is executed by the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt, the state of main controller 261 at the time of power failure is stored in the backup area of RAM 503 .

That is, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to power failure or the like, the power failure signal S1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 501 in the main controller 261 . Then, the CPU 501 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. The NMI interrupt processing in FIG. 17 is stored in the ROM 502 of the main controller 261. FIG. For a predetermined time after the power failure signal S1 is output, power is supplied from the power supply unit 541 so that the processing of the main controller 261 can be executed, and NMI interrupt processing is executed within this predetermined time.

In the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 17, in step S801, power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area. In this embodiment, a flag is set for information on the occurrence of power failure and stored in the backup area.

Next, main processing will be described.
FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of main processing executed by the CPU 501 in the main control device 261, and this main processing is activated upon resetting when the power is turned on.

First, in step S101, the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 executes initial setting processing upon power-on. Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Further, in step S102, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 waits for about one second, for example, to wait for the sub-side control devices (the sub-control device 262, the payout control device 311, etc.) to become operable. to run. In subsequent step S103, the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 permits RAM access.

After that, data backup processing is executed for the RAM 503 in the CPU 501 . That is, in step S104, the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 determines whether or not the RAM erase switch 323 provided on the power monitoring board 261b is pressed (ON). If so, the process proceeds to step S114. In the subsequent step S105, the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 determines whether or not power failure occurrence information is set in the backup area of the RAM 503 (whether or not the power failure occurrence information flag is set). In step S106, the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 calculates the RAM determination value, and in the subsequent step S107, the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 determines that the RAM determination value matches the RAM determination value saved when the power was turned off. or not, that is, the validity of the backup. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 503 . It is also possible to determine the validity of the backup by checking whether the keywords written in a predetermined area of the RAM 503 are correctly saved.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 is powered on while pressing the RAM erase switch 323 when it is desired to return to the initial state when the power is turned on, such as when the hall starts operating. Therefore, if the RAM erasing switch 323 is ON, the initialization process of the RAM 503 (step S114, etc.) is performed. Similarly, when power failure occurrence information is not set, or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.), the used RAM area is cleared and the RAM 503 is initialized (step S114, etc.). That is, in step S114, the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 clears the used area of the RAM 503 to "0" and executes the initialization processing of the RAM 503. FIG.

In subsequent step S115, the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 transmits a payout initialization command. Thus, the payout initialization command is output to the payout control device 311 when the main control device 261 is initialized.

Also, in step S116, the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 transmits a power-on command to the sub-control board 262a. This power-on command includes a command for discriminating the model of the pachinko machine, and the sub-side such as the sub-control board 262a and the display control device 45 can discriminate the model based on the content of the command. It is possible.

Also, in step S117, the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 executes initial setting of the CTC (Counter/Timer Circuit).

In step S118, the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 reads the movable pattern stored in the ROM 502, and drives the movable dividing valve 409 so that the movable dividing valve 409 is driven according to the read movable pattern. Giving direction to the solenoid. The movable pattern of the sorting movable valve 409 will be described later, but the sorting movable valve 409 is set to be driven at a constant cycle. The CPU 501 of the main controller 261 has a function of driving the sorting movable valve 409 according to the movement pattern. That is, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 has a distribution operation control section corresponding to the distribution operation control means of the present invention.

In step S119, the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 sets interrupt permission, and shifts to normal processing (see FIG. 12), which will be described later.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 323 is not pressed, the power failure occurrence information is set and the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) is normal. Execute the process (process at the time of power failure recovery). That is, in step S108, the power failure occurrence information is cleared. In step S109, the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 transmits a payout return command to the payout control device 311 and instructs the payout control device 311 to start payout control. Although details will be described later, when the payout control device 311 receives a payout return command from the main control device 261, it returns and starts payout control.

In step S110, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 transmits a command to return the sub-side control device to the game state at the time of power failure. / Timer Circuit). In step S112, the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 drives the above-mentioned sorting movable valve 409 at a constant cycle. Further, in step S113, an interrupt permission is set, and then normal processing (see FIG. 12), which will be described later, is performed. For example, even if a power failure occurs in the middle of normal processing, the normal processing is executed up to the last step (“RAM access prohibition” step shown in FIG. 12) before the power is shut off. is executed from step S201, which is the first step of the normal processing.

Next, the flow of normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Main processing of the game is executed in this normal processing. As an overview, the processing of steps S201 to S207 is executed as regular processing with a period of 4 msec, and the counter update processing of steps S210 and S211 is executed during the remaining time.

In FIG. 12, first, in step S201, the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 performs an external output process of transmitting output data such as commands updated in the previous process to each sub-side controller. Specifically, the presence or absence of winning detection information is determined, and if there is winning detection information, a prize ball payout command corresponding to the number of winning game balls is transmitted to the payout control device 311 . In addition, in conjunction with the first symbol variation display (variation display of the two LEDs 40a and 40b) of the first symbol display device 40, the third symbol display device 42 also performs the variation display of the decorative symbol (third symbol). However, when the variable display of the first pattern of the first pattern display device 40, a variation pattern designation command, a decorative pattern designation command, a complete stop command (determination command), etc. are transmitted to the sub-control device 262 in the external output process.

In this pachinko machine 10, at the start of variation of the first symbol, external output of normal processing is performed in the order of variation pattern designation command -> performance command (command for designating change of variation time, etc.) -> decoration design designation command. A predetermined number (for example, 3) of commands are sent each time processing is performed (that is, 3 commands are sent every 4 msec), and an all-stop command is sent at the timing when the fluctuation time has elapsed. In addition, after the start of the variation of the first symbol, a predetermined number (for example, three) each time the external output process of the normal process is performed in the order of the variation pattern designation command → production command → decorative design designation command (that is, three every 4 msec command may be sent one by one, and the all-stop command may be sent at the timing when the variable time has elapsed.

The variation pattern designation command is a command for designating the variation pattern of the decorative design (third design) variably displayed on the third design display device 42 . The variation pattern designation command is transmitted from the main controller 261 to the sub-controller 262 and transmitted from the sub-controller 262 to the display controller 45 . The display control device 45 controls the third design display device 42 to display the variation pattern of the decorative design based on the transmitted variation pattern designation command.

The decorative design designation command is a command for designating whether the variable display performance of the decorative design (third design) on the third design display device 42 is a normal jackpot, a time-saving jackpot, a probability variable jackpot, or a loss. . The decorative design designation command is transmitted from the main controller 261 to the sub-controller 262 and transmitted from the sub-controller 262 to the display controller 45 . The display control device 45 controls the display of the third symbol display device 42 so that the display result of the variation pattern of the decorative symbols is the result corresponding to the received decorative symbol designation command.

The all-stop command is a command for instructing to stop the variation pattern of the decorative symbols (third symbols) that are variably displayed on the third symbol display device 42 . The all-stop command is transmitted from the main controller 261 to the sub-controller 262 and transmitted from the sub-controller 262 to the display controller 45 . The display control device 45 controls the third symbol display device 42 to stop-display the variation pattern of the decorative symbols based on the transmitted all-stop command.

In addition, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 sends a variation pattern designation command and an effect command (a command for designating a change in variation time, etc.) to the sub-control device 262 in the external output processing (step S201) of the normal processing. may be sent. That is, based on the value of the variation type counter CS3, it is determined which time to add the variation time (additional time by the sliding effect of the decorative symbol described above), and such addition time is appropriately sent to the sub-controller 262. Directive commands are used to give instructions. Therefore, after the first pattern starts to fluctuate, a predetermined number (for example, three) each time the external output process of the normal process is performed in the order of the fluctuation pattern designation command → effect command → decorative design designation command (that is, three every 4 msec One by one) command is sent out, and an all-stop command may be sent out at the timing when the variable time has passed.

Next, in step S202, the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 updates the fluctuation type counters CS1 to CS3. Specifically, each of the fluctuation type counters CS1 to CS3 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198, 240, 162 in this embodiment), each increment is "0 ” to clear. Then, the updated values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 to CS3 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503 shown in FIG.

In subsequent step S203 in FIG. 12, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 reads the prize ball counting signal, the payout abnormality signal, and the lower tray full signal received from the payout control device 311. FIG. After that, in step S204, the first symbol variation processing for performing the variation display of the first symbol by the first symbol display device 40 is executed. By this first symbol variation processing, big hit determination, setting of variation pattern of the first symbol, and the like are performed. However, the details of the first symbol variation process will be described later.

After that, in step S205, the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 executes a big winning opening opening/closing process for opening or closing the big winning opening 32a of the variable winning device 32 in the case of the jackpot state. In other words, the big winning hole 32a is opened for each round of the big win state, and for each round, it is checked whether the maximum opening time of the big winning hole 32a has passed or whether a specified number of game balls have entered the big winning hole 32a. judge. When any one of these conditions is established, the opening of the big winning hole 32a in that round is stopped and closed, and when there are remaining rounds, the opening of the big winning hole 32a is repeatedly executed for the number of remaining rounds.

Further, in step S206, the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 executes display control of the second symbol by the second symbol display device 41. FIG. Briefly, on the condition that the game ball passes through the second starting port 34, the second symbol random number counter C4 is acquired each time, and at the display portions 41a and 41b of the second symbol display device 41, A variable display of the second symbol is performed. Then, a lottery for the second symbol is carried out according to the value of the second symbol random number counter C4, and when the second symbol wins, the CPU 501 of the main controller 261, as shown in step S207, selects the first symbol on the lower side. A process for opening the first starting port 33b is performed to open the starting port 33b for a predetermined period of time. In the normal game state, the first starting port 33b opens for 1.0 seconds, for example. In the case of the variable probability state and the time saving state, the first starting port 33b is opened for 3.0 seconds, for example. Although the description is omitted, the second symbol random number counter C4 is also updated by the timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. ing.

In step S208, the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 determines whether or not power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area of the RAM 503 (whether or not the power-off occurrence information flag is set). If power-off occurrence information is not set, the process proceeds to step S209, and if power-off occurrence information is set, the process proceeds to step S212.

After that, in step S209, it is determined whether or not it is time to execute the next normal process, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous normal process. Then, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process, the first and second initial value random number counters CINI1a and CINI1b, the initial value second symbol random number counter CINI2 and the variation type counters CS1 to CS3 are repeatedly updated. Execute (steps S210, S211). That is, in step S210, the first and second initial value random number counters CINI1a, CINI1b and the initial value second symbol random number counter CINI2 are updated. Specifically, the first and second initial random number counters CINI1a and CINI1b are each incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value ("738" in this embodiment), the increment by 1 Clear to "0". Then, the updated values of the first and second initial value random number counters CINI1a and CINI1b are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 503, respectively. Similarly, the initial value second symbol random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and the counter value is cleared to "0" when incremented by 1 after reaching the maximum value ("250" in this embodiment). do. Then, the updated value of the initial value second symbol random number counter CINI2 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM503.

Further, in step S211, the fluctuation type counters CS1 to CS3 are updated (similar to step S202). Specifically, the variation type counters CS1 to CS3 are incremented by 1, and their counter values reach the maximum value ("198", "240", "162" in this embodiment). Clear to "0" each time. Then, the updated values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 to CS3 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM503.

Here, since the execution time of each process of steps S201 to S207 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by using the remaining time to repeatedly update the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the initial value second symbol random number counter CINI2, the initial value random number counter CINI1 (that is, the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1) and the initial The second symbol random number counter CINI2 (that is, the initial value of the second symbol random number counter C4) can be randomly updated.

In addition, in step S208, when power-off occurrence information is set and the process proceeds to step S212, the CPU 501 of the main control unit 261 sets interrupt prohibition. Subsequently, in step S213, the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 transmits to the other controllers a power-off notification command indicating that the power supply has been cut off quickly. Subsequently, in step S214, the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 stops outputting the control signal. Subsequently, in step S215, the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 calculates the RAM determination value and saves it in the backup area. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of RAM 503 . Subsequently, in step S216, the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 prohibits RAM access. After that, an infinite loop is entered in preparation for the complete shutdown of the power supply and the inability to execute processing.

Next, the first symbol variation process of step S205 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In FIG. 13, in step S401, the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 determines whether or not the jackpot is currently in progress. It should be noted that during the big win includes the middle of the special game displayed on the third symbol display device 42 at the time of the big win and the middle of a predetermined time after the end of the special game. In subsequent step S402, the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 determines whether or not the first symbol display device 40 is in the process of displaying the first symbol. Then, if the jackpot is not in progress and the first symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner, the process proceeds to step S403, and the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines the number N2 of operation pending balls for the first starting port 33b of the first symbol display device 40. is greater than "0", and if the number N2 of balls withheld in operation is greater than "0", the process proceeds to step S404; proceed to At this time, if the jackpot is in progress, or if the number N2 of operation pending balls is "0" and the number N1 of operation pending balls is also "0", this process is finished as it is.

Further, if neither the big hit nor the variable display of the first symbol is being performed and the number of balls to be activated is N2>0, the process proceeds to step S404. In step S404, the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 subtracts "1" from the number N2 of balls to be activated. In step S405, a process of shifting the data stored in the second reserved ball storage area is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth reserved areas of the second reserved ball storage area to the execution area side. The data in each area is shifted in the order of area→reserved first area, reserved third area→reserved second area, reserved fourth area→reserved third area, and so on.

In addition, if neither the jackpot state nor the variable display of the first symbol is in progress and the number of activated balls N2=0, the process proceeds to step S403a. , the process proceeds to step S404a. In step S404a, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 subtracts "1" from the number N1 of balls to be activated. In step S405a, a process of shifting the data stored in the first reserved ball storage area is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth reserved areas of the first reserved ball storage area to the execution area side. The data in each area is shifted in the following order: area→reserved first area, reserved third area→reserved second area, reserved fourth area→reserved third area, and so on.

After that, in step S406, the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 executes fluctuation start processing. Here, the variation start processing will be described in detail using the flowchart of FIG. It is determined whether or not it is a big hit based on the value of the second big hit random number counter C1b. After step S405a, it is determined whether or not the game is a big hit based on the value of the first big hit random number counter C1a stored in the execution area of the first reserved ball storage area. Specifically, whether or not it is a big hit is determined by the relationship between the value of the first big hit random number counter C1a and the mode at that time (variable probability state or normal state) for the execution area of the first reserved ball storage area. determined based on The execution area of the second reserved ball storage area is determined based on the relationship between the value of the second big hit random number counter C1b and the mode at that time (variable probability state or normal state). As described above, at normal low probability, "350,700" among numerical values "0" to "738" of the first and second big hit random number counters C1a and C1b is the hit value (two), and at high probability, "50". , 101, 160, 209, 257, 310, 361, 418, 480, 517, 578, 635, 677, 730” are the winning values (14). In addition, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 stores the winning values of the first big-hit random number counter C1a and the second big-hit random number counter C1b at the time of low probability and at the time of high probability respectively in the table for discrimination, and the game state is Each time it changes, the corresponding table is used for determination.

When the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines that the jackpot is hit, in step S502, the jackpot pattern corresponding to the value of the first jackpot pattern counter C2a stored in the execution area of the first reserved ball storage area, that is, Displayed by two LEDs 40a, 40b of the first pattern display device 40, blue lighting display of both LEDs 40a, 40b indicating normal jackpot, or combination lighting display of blue lighting of LED 40a and red lighting of LED 40b indicating time-saving jackpot Alternatively, a stop pattern (stop display) is obtained which is either a red lighting display of both LEDs 40a and 40b indicating a variable probability big win, or a combined lighting display of red lighting of the LED 40 and blue lighting of the LED 40b indicating a normal jackpot. In other words, the jackpot symbol corresponding to the value of the first jackpot symbol counter C2a is obtained based on a table (not shown) showing the correspondence relationship between the value of the first jackpot symbol counter C2a and the symbols.

Further, in step S502, in the case of the second reserved ball storage area, two big win symbols corresponding to the value of the second big win symbol counter C2b stored in the execution area, that is, two of the first symbol display device 40 are displayed. Both LEDs 40d and 40e, which are displayed by the LEDs 40d and 40e and indicate a normal jackpot, are displayed in blue, or a combination of the blue lighting of the LED 40c and the red lighting of the LED 40d, which indicates a time-saving jackpot, or both the LEDs 40d and 40e, which indicate a variable jackpot. A stop symbol (stop display) is obtained by either red lighting display of . That is, based on a table (not shown) representing the correspondence between the value of the second big-hit symbol counter C2b and the symbols, the big-hit symbol (“specific winning symbol” or “non-specific Winning pattern").

Next, in step S503, the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 determines a variation pattern (jackpot variation pattern) at the time of the jackpot. Specifically, the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 does not use the first and second stop pattern selection counters C3a and C3b, and in the case of the first reserved ball storage area, the first jackpot symbol counter C2a of the execution area. and the values of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 503 are checked in that order to determine the variation pattern. In the case of the second reserved ball storage area, the value of the second jackpot pattern counter C2b in the execution area and the values of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 503 are confirmed in that order, and the variation pattern is determined. decide.

That is, based on the values of the first and second jackpot pattern counters C2a and C2b, whether the decorative pattern on the third pattern display device 42 is displayed in the normal jackpot "stop pattern 3" or the third pattern display device 42 It is determined whether the decorative pattern is to be displayed as a ``stop pattern 4'' for a time-saving jackpot or whether the decorative pattern on the third pattern display device 42 is to be displayed as a ``stop pattern 5'' for a probability variable jackpot. The types of "stop pattern 3" to "stop pattern 5" thus determined are further determined based on the value of the first variation type counter CS1. In other words, a general variation pattern group of the decorative design is determined, such as the reach type of the decorative design (third design) such as normal reach, super reach, premium reach, and the like. Subsequently, one variation pattern is determined from the thus determined rough variation pattern group of decorative symbols based on the value of the second variation type counter CS2. For example, based on the value of the second variation type counter CS2, finer decorative patterns such as setting the elapsed time until the final stop decorative pattern (middle decorative pattern in the present embodiment) stops after the occurrence of reach to a predetermined time Determine the mode of variation. In addition, the following relationships in the case of a big win, that is, the relationship between the numerical values of the first and second big winning symbol counters C2a and C2b and the stop pattern, the relationship between the numerical value of the first variation type counter CS1 and the variation pattern, the second The relationship between the numerical value of the variation type counter CS2 and the stop symbol time is defined in advance by a table for big hits or the like.

In addition, during the time saving state, the variation mode is different, such as the stop symbol time being shorter than during other game states. Therefore, different tables corresponding to the length of stop symbol time are prepared for the time saving state and other game states. Therefore, when the time saving state is switched to, for example, the normal game state, the time saving state stop design time determination table is switched to the non-time saving state stop design time determination table.

In this way, the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 causes the third symbol display device 42 to display one of a plurality of patterns of variable display effects in which the symbols vary based on the result of the lottery performed by the lottery unit in step S503 described above. It has a function of selecting a predetermined variable display effect. That is, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 has a variable display effect selection section corresponding to the variable display effect selection means of the present invention.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S501 that it is not a big hit, in step S504, the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 displays the 2nd symbol of the first symbol display device 40 in the case of the missing symbol, that is, the first reserved ball storage area. A stop pattern is set in which the LEDs 40a and 40b are stopped and displayed in different colors. In addition, in the case of the second reserved ball storage area, the stop pattern is set such that the two LEDs 40d and 40e of the first pattern display device 40 stop and display in different colors.

Next, in step S505, the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 determines a variation pattern (loss performance pattern) at the time of failure, and sets the failure variation pattern as a variation pattern designation command. Specifically, in the case of the first reserved ball storage area, the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 controls the first stop pattern selection counter C3a and the variation type stored in the execution area of the first reserved ball storage area of the RAM 503. The values of the counters CS1 and CS2 are checked in that order to determine the variation pattern. In the case of the second reserved ball storage area, the values of the second stop pattern selection counter C3b and the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 stored in the execution area of the second reserved ball storage area of the RAM 503 are checked in that order. , determines the variation pattern.

That is, in the case of the first reserved ball storage area, based on the value of the first stop pattern selection counter C3a, in the case of the second reserved ball storage area, based on the value of the second stop pattern selection counter C3b, the third A "stop pattern 1" which is a "front-rear out-of-reach reach" in which the final stop decorative pattern after occurrence of the reach of the decorative pattern on the pattern display device 42 is shifted to the front and rear of the reach decorative pattern by one and stops, and after the occurrence of the reach similarly. Either "stop pattern 2" which is "reach other than front and rear deviation" in which the final stop decorative pattern stops other than before and after the reach decorative pattern, and "stop pattern 0" which is "complete deviation" in which reach does not occur. decide whether to For example, if the determined stop pattern is "stop pattern 1", which is a reach out of the front and back, for example, based on the value of the first variation type counter CS1, normal reach, super reach from the change pattern group of reach out of the front and back A rough variation pattern group of decorative symbols is determined, for example, a variation pattern in which the reach type of the decorative symbol (third symbol) such as is determined is determined. It is assumed here that normal reach is determined. Subsequently, one variation pattern is further determined from the thus determined normal reach variation pattern group of rough decorative symbols based on the value of the second variation type counter CS2. For example, based on the value of the second variation type counter CS2, finer decorative patterns such as setting the elapsed time until the final stop decorative pattern (middle decorative pattern in the present embodiment) stops after the occurrence of reach to a predetermined time Determine the mode of variation. In addition, the following relationships in the case of deviation, that is, the relationship between the numerical values of the first and second stop pattern selection counters C3a and C3b and the stop pattern, the relationship between the numerical value of the first variation type counter CS1 and the variation pattern, The relationship between the numerical value of the 2-variation type counter CS2 and the stop symbol time is defined in advance by a table or the like for losing.

In the present embodiment, one of the tables for outliers described above is, for example, at a low probability, in the state of the variation time shortening function of the first symbol display device 40, at the start of variation of the first symbol. Some are adopted when the number of operation suspensions of the first symbol is "0", and no reach (complete "202-208" correspond to front-rear out-of-reach reach, and "209-238" correspond to non-front-rear out-of-reach reach.

Subsequently, in step S506, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 decides to add the production time, that is, decides to add the production time of the big hit variation pattern determined in step S503 or the deviation variation pattern determined in step S505. conduct. More specifically, based on the value of the variation type counter CS3, the decorative pattern (third pattern) of the middle decorative pattern row in the third pattern display device 42 stops sliding, etc. Increase in production time (the middle decoration A variation pattern is determined, including an increase in the amount of time it takes for a decorative symbol in the symbol row to slip and stop displaying.

Also, in step S507, the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 issues a variation pattern designation command corresponding to the big hit variation pattern determined in step S503, or a variation pattern designation command corresponding to the outlier variation pattern determined in step S505. set.

Subsequently, in step S508, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 sets a decorative design designation command corresponding to the jackpot design of the first design display device 40 determined in step S502 when steps S502 and S503 have been passed. Then, when steps S504 and S505 have been passed, a decorative design designation command corresponding to the outlier design of the first design display device 40 determined in step S504 is set.

Subsequently, in step S509, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 sets an effect time addition designation command corresponding to the effect time addition determined in step S506, and ends this process.

Returning to the description of FIG. 13, if step S402 is YES, ie, the first symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, the process proceeds to step S407, and the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 determines whether or not the first symbol variation time has elapsed. determine whether The variation time of the first symbol is determined based on the variation pattern determined as described above with reference to FIG. 14 and the effect time addition. is determined, and step S407 is affirmatively determined when this variation time has elapsed. If the variable time has not passed, the process proceeds to step S408, and if the variable time has passed, the process proceeds to step S409.

Then, in step S408, the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 updates the variable display of the first symbol on the first symbol display device 40. FIG. In other words, the variable display of the two LEDs 40a and 40b of the first symbol display device 40 is continued, and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in step S409, the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 stops the variable display of the first symbol and sets the stop symbol of the first symbol to the display symbol. That is, in step S502 of FIG. 14, when the normal jackpot is determined, after the fluctuation display of the two LEDs 40a and 40b (or LEDs 40d and 40e) of the first symbol display device 40, both LEDs 40a and 40b (or The LEDs 40d, 40e) are illuminated in blue to indicate a normal jackpot. When it is determined to be a time saving jackpot, after the fluctuation display of the two LEDs 40a and 40b of the first symbol display device 40, the LED 40a (or LED 40d) is lit in blue and the LED 40b (or LED 40e) is lit in red, Indicates a short-time jackpot. When the probability variable jackpot is determined, after the variable display of the two LEDs 40a, 40b (or LEDs 40d, 40e) of the first symbol display device 40, both LEDs 40a, 40b (or LEDs 40d, 40e) are displayed in red lighting. , indicates a variable jackpot. When it is determined to be a lost symbol in step S504 of FIG. 14, after the two LEDs 40a and 40b (or LEDs 40d and 40e) of the first symbol display device 40 are changed, the LED 40a (or LED 40d) is lit in red. At the same time, the LED 40b (or LED 40e) is illuminated in blue to indicate the disconnection.

Subsequently, in step S410, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 sets an all-stop command for instructing the stop of the variation pattern of the decorative design (third design) variably displayed on the third design display device 42, After that, this process is terminated.

Next, the payout control executed by the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311 will be described. FIG. 18 is a flow chart showing the main processing of the payout control device 311, and this main processing is activated upon resetting when the power is turned on.

First, in step S901, initial setting processing is executed upon power-on. Specifically, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 sets a stack address and an interrupt mode. In step S902, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 permits RAM access, and in step S903, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 sets an external interrupt vector.

After that, in step S904, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 determines whether information on the occurrence of power failure is set in the backup area of the RAM 513 or not. In step S905, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 calculates the RAM determination value. determine gender. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the work area address of RAM 513 . It is also possible to determine the effectiveness of the backup by checking whether the keywords written in a predetermined area of the RAM 513 are correctly saved.

Subsequently, in step S907, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 initializes the RAM 513 when power is restored. Specifically, when the main control device 261 is initialized, a payout initialization command is transmitted from the main control device 261 to the payout control device 311, and the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 receives the payout initialization command from the main control device 261. When the reset command is received, the RAM 513 is initialized at power recovery in step S907. In other words, the RAM area is initialized, and the game ball payout control is started.

Therefore, when the RAM erase switch 323 is pressed (ON) when the power is turned on, the main control device 261 is initialized, and a payout initialization command is transmitted from the main control device 261 to the payout control device 311. As a result, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 initializes the RAM 513 based on the payout initialization command from the main control device 261 .

Subsequently, in step S908, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 performs initial setting of the peripheral device of the CPU 511 concerned. Specifically, the CPU peripheral device is a timer control device called CTC (Counter/Timer Circuit), which is set to a predetermined value to generate a timer interrupt every 2 milliseconds (ms).

Subsequently, in step S909, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 sets interrupt permission, and shifts to payout control processing to be described later.

On the other hand, if the power failure occurrence information is not set in step S904, or if the backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) in step S906, the payout control device 311 The CPU 511 clears the entire area of the RAM 513 to "0" (step S910) and performs initialization processing (step S911).

Next, the flow of payout control processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In FIG. 19, in step S1001, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 acquires a command from the main control device 261 and stores it. Here, as the commands to be stored, 15 types of prize ball commands (15 types of prize ball commands for instructing the payout of 1 to 15 balls) and the start of payout control to the payout control device 311 are instructed. There are 17 types of commands including a payout return command for the purpose and a payout initialization command for instructing the payout control device 311 to initialize the payout.

In step S1002, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 determines whether or not the payout permission has been received. That is, it is determined whether or not a payout return command or a prize ball command is received. Further, in step S1003, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 checks the state return switch (not shown), and executes the state return operation when it is determined to start the state return operation.

Thereafter, in step S1004, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 executes setting of the lower tray full state or the lower tray full state canceled state according to the change in the state of the lower tray 15. FIG. That is, the full state of the lower tray 15 is determined by the detection signal of the lower tray full switch. , execute the setting of the lower tray full state release state.

Further, in step S1005, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 executes the setting of the no-ball-in-tank state or the no-ball-in-tank cancellation state according to the change in the state of the ball in the tank. That is, the no-ball-in-tank state is determined by the detection signal of the no-ball-in-tank switch. Run the settings.

After that, in step S1006, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 determines whether or not there is a state to be notified.

In steps S1007 to S1009, processing for paying out prize balls is executed. In this case, if the prize balls are not dispensable and the total number of prize balls stored in step S1001 is not "0" (both steps S1007 and S1008 are NO), the process advances to step S1009 to perform prize ball control processing ( FIG. 20) to be described later is started. Also, if the payout of prize balls is disabled or if the total number of prize balls is 0 (YES in either step S1007 or S1008), the process of paying out the balls for rent is performed.

After that, in steps S1010 to S1012, the process of paying out rental balls is executed. In this case, if the ball is not dispensable and a request for ball dispensation is received from the card unit (NO in step S1010, YES in step S1011), the process proceeds to step S1012 to perform ball rental control processing (to be described later). FIG. 21) is started. Also, if the ball cannot be dispensed or the ball dispensation request has not been received (YES in step S1010 or NO in step S1011), subsequent vibration motor control (step S1013) is executed.

In step S1013, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 executes control (vibration motor control) of the vibrator 360 (see FIG. 7). After that, in step S1014, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 determines whether or not a power failure has occurred. If a power failure has occurred, the process proceeds to step S1015; otherwise, the process returns to step S1001. In step S1015, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 sets information on occurrence of power failure, and in step S1016, creates a RAM determination value. After that, an infinite loop is entered in preparation for the complete shutdown of the power supply and the inability to execute processing.

Here, in the prize ball control process shown in FIG. 20, in step S1101, the payout motor 358a is driven to execute payout of prize balls. In the subsequent step S1102, it is determined whether or not the rotation of the payout motor 358a is normal based on the detection result of the payout rotation sensor. If the rotation of the payout motor 358a is not normal, the process advances to step S1103 to drive the payout motor 358a to execute retry processing and stop processing of the payout motor 358a, and then return to the payout control processing of FIG.

If the rotation of the payout motor 358a is normal, the process proceeds to step S1104, and it is determined by the detection result of the payout count switch whether or not the game balls are normally counted. If the count of game balls is not normal, the process proceeds to step S1105, the payout motor 358a is driven to execute the retry process and the stop process of the payout motor 358a is executed, and then the process returns to the payout control process of FIG.

Further, if the count of game balls is normal, the process proceeds to step S1106, and it is determined whether or not the number of game balls counted by the payout count switch reaches the total number of prize balls and the payout is completed. If the payout has been completed, the stop processing of the payout motor 358a is executed in step S1107, and then the payout control processing of FIG. 19 is returned to.

In the ball rental control process shown in FIG. 21, in step S1201, the ball rental motor 358a is driven to execute the ball rental. In subsequent step S1202, it is determined whether or not the rotation of the payout motor 358a is normal based on the detection result of the payout rotation sensor. If the rotation of the payout motor 358a is not normal, the process advances to step S1203 to drive the payout motor 358a to execute retry processing and stop processing of the payout motor 358a, and then return to the payout control processing of FIG.

Also, if the rotation of the payout motor 358a is normal, the process proceeds to step S1204, and it is determined by the detection result of the payout count switch whether or not the game balls are normally counted. If the count of game balls is not normal, the process proceeds to step S1205, the payout motor 358a is driven to execute the retry process and the stop process of the payout motor 358a is executed, and then the process returns to the payout control process of FIG.

Further, if the game ball count is normal, the process advances to step S1206 to determine whether or not the number of game balls counted by the payout count switch reaches a predetermined number of rental balls (25) and payout is completed. If the payout has been completed, the stop processing of the payout motor 358a is executed in step S1207, and then the payout control processing of FIG. 19 is returned to.

The above NMI interrupt processing is similarly executed in the payout control device 311, and the state of the payout control device 311 at the time of power failure due to power failure or the like is stored in the backup area of the RAM 513 by the NMI interrupt. Similarly, power is supplied from the power supply unit 541 so that the processing of the payout control device 311 can be executed for a predetermined time after the power failure signal S1 is output. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal S1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311, and the CPU 511 interrupts the control being executed. to start the NMI interrupt processing in FIG. The contents are as explained in FIG.

Next, main processing and normal processing of the sub-controller 262 will be described with reference to FIGS. 22 and 23. FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing an example of main processing executed by the CPU 551 of the sub-controller 262, and this main processing is activated upon reset when the power is turned on. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing an example of normal processing executed by the CPU 551 of the sub-controller 262. As shown in FIG.

First, in step S1301, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 executes initial setting processing upon power-on. Specifically, port settings (port I/O switching and initial value output), timer settings (1 millisecond interval timer, liquid crystal command strobe output timer), and interrupt settings (sub-command strobe interrupt) are performed. .

Also, in step S1302, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not the power-off process has not been completed. Specifically, whether or not the various lamps (annular illumination portion 102, central illumination portion 103, etc.) of the front frame set 14 of the pachinko machine 10 are all turned off and the speaker is in a mute state is checked. discriminate. If the power-off process has not been completed, the process proceeds to step S1304; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1303.

Subsequently, in step S1303, the CPU 551 of the sub-controller 262 determines whether or not the RAM of the sub-controller 262 is destroyed. . In step S1304, the CPU 551 of the sub-controller 262 performs a RAM area read/write check of the sub-controller 262. FIG. Then, in step S1305, the CPU 551 of the sub-controller 262 determines whether the RAM of the sub-controller 262 is normal. If the RAM of the sub-controller 262 is normal, the process proceeds to step S1306, and if abnormal, the process proceeds to step S1311. In step S1306, the CPU 551 of the sub-controller 262 writes RAM destruction check data for each area of the RAM 553, and sets RAM destruction check data for determining destruction if there is a reading error.

Then, in step S1307, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not the power is turned on after being turned off. If the power is turned on after being turned off, the process proceeds to step S1308; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1309.

In step S1308, the CPU 551 of the sub-controller 262 clears the RAM area other than the unprocessed RAM area. Specifically, the unprocessed RAM area is an area for storing information that will cause system problems if the data is cleared, and is an area for information that should be retained except when the RAM area is destroyed. For example, sub-command reception buffer, power-on information, etc. can be mentioned. When the main controller 261 is powered off and the sub-controller 262 is reset (when a power-off notification command is received from the main controller 261), the RAM area other than the unprocessed RAM area is cleared.

In step S1309, the CPU 551 of the sub-controller 262 sets interrupt permission. In step S1310, the CPU 551 of the sub-controller 262 initializes the RAM of the sub-controller 262, and shifts to normal processing shown in FIG.

In step S1311, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 notifies the RAM abnormality and enters an infinite loop. For example, it is possible to issue a notification such as unconditionally turning on a predetermined lamp.

As shown in FIG. 23, in step S1401, the CPU 551 of the sub-controller 262 determines whether or not 1 ms or more has elapsed since the start of normal processing. If 1 ms or more has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S1402, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1410.

In step S1402, the CPU 551 of the sub-controller 262 performs lamp output processing. Specifically, the lamp is output in accordance with the variation pattern presentation of the decorative pattern (third pattern) on the third pattern display device 42 .

In step S1403, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 performs power-on notification. Specifically, the notification for 30 seconds by the power-on command is performed.

In step S1404, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 performs a customer waiting effect. Specifically, the title/still image is switched. That is, so-called demo screen display is performed.

In step S1405, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 performs a pending number display update process for the first symbol variation. Specifically, since this pending number display update process is a process for performing a display corresponding to the pending lamp 40c of the first symbol display device 40 also on the third symbol display device 42, the first symbol display device 40 In the case of a pachinko machine that displays only with the hold lamp 40c, this process is unnecessary.

In step S1406, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 performs frame button input monitoring/effect processing. Specifically, this frame button input monitoring/effect processing is for performing model-specific effects by pressing the frame button 20 in a pachinko machine having the frame button 20 that the player can press. Therefore, this process is unnecessary for pachinko machines that do not have such a frame button 20 .

In step S1407, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 performs lamp editing processing. Specifically, a process of editing a lamp lighting pattern corresponding to (synchronized with) the variable pattern rendering of the decorative design on the third design display device 42 is performed.

In step S1408, the CPU 551 of the sub-controller 262 performs sound editing/output processing. Specifically, a process of sounding a sound corresponding to (synchronized with) the variation pattern presentation of the decorative design on the third design display device 42 is performed.

In step S1409, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 performs liquid crystal effect execution management processing. Concretely, time management etc. are performed to synchronize lamps, sounds and liquid crystal effects (variation pattern effects of decorative patterns on the third pattern display device 42).

In step S1410, the CPU 551 of the sub-controller 262 performs a process of updating the random number value for determining the variation pattern of decorative symbols to be performed by the third symbol display device 42 and the effect of the sound lamp. Specifically, this random number takes a value from "0" to "32767", for example, and returns to "0" when it reaches the upper limit of "37268".

In step S1411, when the CPU 551 of the sub-controller 262 receives a command from the main controller 261, it performs processing corresponding to each command.

Specifically, when the CPU 551 of the sub-controller 262 receives a variation pattern specification command from the main controller 261 , the variation pattern specification command is converted into a command and transmitted to the display control device 45 . It should be noted that the variation pattern specification command may be directly output through. Further, when the CPU 551 of the sub-controller 262 receives a decorative special symbol designation command from the main controller 261 , it transmits the decorative special symbol designation command and the advance notice effect command to the display control device 45 . This advance notice command includes, for example, the presence or absence of the appearance of a school of fish as a notice. Further, when the CPU 551 of the sub-controller 262 receives an all-stop command (determined command) from the main controller 261 , the CPU 551 transmits this all-stop command to the display control device 45 as it is.

In step S1412, the CPU 551 of the sub-controller 262 determines whether or not the RAM of the sub-controller 262 has been destroyed. If the RAM has not been destroyed, the process returns to step S1401, and if it has been destroyed, an infinite loop is entered.

In addition, in the display control device 45, based on each command from the sub-control device 262 (variation pattern designation command, decoration special design designation command, advance notice effect command, all stop command), the decoration to be performed by the third design display device 42 Image generation control of the variation pattern of the design is performed. Specifically, the display control device 45 executes image generation processing for the decorative design variation pattern in the third design display device 42, for example, generates an image at a frame rate of 30 (30 images per second), By storing these generated images in the video RAM 524 (for example, frame buffer) and displaying them on the third design display device 42 as appropriate, the decorative design variation display on the third design display device 42 is realized. ing.

Next, the big winning opening opening/closing process performed by the main controller 261 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24 is a flow chart showing the big winning opening opening/closing process by the main controller 261 . The normal processing shown in FIG. 12 by the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 also includes the big winning opening opening/closing processing (step S205) as described above.

In step S1451, the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 determines whether or not the first and second jackpot random number counters C1a and C1b are hit. The CPU 501 of the main controller 261 proceeds to step 1452 if it is a win, and terminates this process if it is a miss.

In step S1452, the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 transmits to the sub-controller 262 an opening command for executing an opening effect informing the start of the jackpot round game, and proceeds to step S1453.

In step S1453, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 controls the large winning opening solenoid that opens and closes the door member 32b of the variable winning device 32 to open the door member 32b of the large winning opening 32a, and activates the timer function. to start timing the open time. Also, the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 transmits to the sub-controller 262 a round number designation command indicating the number of the jackpot round to be started from now on.

In step S1454, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 detects whether or not a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls have won in the large winning opening of the variable winning device 32, and the timing of the opening time is the maximum opening time. (For example, 30 seconds) is detected, and if a predetermined number of game balls have won in the large winning opening of the variable winning device 32, or if the opening time is measured (counted up), the maximum opening time is detected. If it has passed, the process proceeds to step S1455. If the predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls have not yet been won in the big winning opening of the variable winning device 32, or if the opening time has not passed the maximum opening time, the process returns to step S1454.

In step S1455, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 controls the large winning opening solenoid to close the door member 32b of the variable winning device 32, stops timing the opening time, and steps S1456. proceed to

At step S1456, the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 controls the large winning opening solenoid to keep the large winning opening closed during the predetermined interval time of the corresponding round.

After that, in step S1457, the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 determines whether or not there is a next round, returns to step S1453 if there is a next round, and proceeds to step S1458 if there is no next round.

In step S1458, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 transmits an ending command for executing an ending effect for notifying the end of the jackpot round game to the sub control device 262, and ends this process.

Next, the movable pattern suggestive effect performed by the sub-controller 262 will be described with reference to FIGS. 25 to 28. FIG. FIG. 25 is a flow chart showing liquid crystal effect execution management processing by the sub-controller 262. As shown in FIG. FIG. 26 is a flow chart showing the opening/closing mode (jackpot) display setting process by the sub-controller 262 . FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing music start timing adjustment processing by the sub-controller 262 . FIG. 28 is a flow chart showing a game process during a round by the sub-controller 262. As shown in FIG.

(Liquid crystal presentation execution management processing)
In step S1501, as shown in FIG. 25, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 performs opening/closing mode (jackpot) display setting processing. In step S1502, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 performs variable display mode setting processing.

(Open/close mode (jackpot) display setting processing)
In step S1601, as shown in FIG. 26, if the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 has received the opening command transmitted from the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 in step S1452, the process proceeds to step S1602; Proceed to S1605.

In step S1602, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets a display opening command, and proceeds to step S1603. In step S1603, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 performs music start timing adjustment processing.

In step S1604, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets a display jackpot effect command at the start timing of the music adjusted in step S1603. The display jackpot effect command is a command for selecting a predetermined jackpot effect to be displayed on the third pattern display device 42 from a plurality of patterns of jackpot effects displayed on the third pattern display device 42 during the jackpot state. is. That is, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 has a display effect control section (function for executing the process of step S1604).

In step S1605, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 designates that the jackpot round to be started is the first round based on the number-of-rounds designation command transmitted from the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 in step S1453. 1R” image is set on the third symbol display device 42. A round number display command is set.

In step S1606, the CPU 551 of the sub-controller 262 proceeds to step S1607 if the ending command transmitted from the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 in step S1458 is received, otherwise proceeds to step S1608.

In step S1606, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets a display ending command, and terminates this process.

In step S1608, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 performs in-round game processing, which will be described later.

(Music start timing adjustment processing)
The CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 controls the display of the operation request image requesting the operation of the second frame button 21, and sets the timing at which the operation request image is displayed so that the distribution movable valve 409 comes to the projecting position. The third pattern display device 42 is controlled to display the movable pattern suggestive effect matched to the timing. The CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 has a function of performing a movable pattern suggestion effect (a function of executing the processes of steps S1701 to S1713 described later). That is, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 has an operation effect control section.

In step S1701, as shown in FIG. 27, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 analyzes the content of the opening command and determines whether or not there are 16 rounds in the jackpot state. When the number of rounds is 16 rounds, there is a case where it is necessary to perform music start timing adjustment processing because the movable pattern suggestion effect is performed. Therefore, if the number of rounds is 16 rounds, the process proceeds to step S1702. On the other hand, if the number of rounds is not 16 rounds, basically no moving pattern suggestion effect is performed as described below, so there is no need to perform the music start timing adjustment processing. Therefore, if the number of rounds is not 16 rounds, this processing is terminated.

The reason why the music start timing adjustment processing is not performed when the number of rounds is not 16 is, for example, when the game ball is not retained in the retaining device 400 in a jackpot state with a small number of rounds, or when the game ball is not retained in the retaining device 400, or when the movable pattern suggestive effect is started. This is because time may not be secured. It should be noted that, even in a jackpot state with a small number of rounds, game balls may be held in the holding device 400 . In this case, the player may lose interest in the holding device 400 if the movable pattern suggestive effect is not started. Therefore, in the case of a jackpot state with a small number of rounds, as will be described later in the second embodiment, the start of the movable pattern suggestion effect may be executed during the variable display effect such as the ready-to-win effect.

In step S1702, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 acquires the time (delay time) from the start time of one movable cycle of the distribution movable valve 409 to the reception time of the opening command, and be memorized. In order to acquire this delay time, the CPU 551 of the sub-controller 262 is provided with a counting function that performs counting in synchronization with the operation cycle of the sorting movable valve 409 .

In step S1703, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 analyzes the received opening command and stores the time required for the opening effect in the storage area q of the RAM 553. In step S1704, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 causes the storage area r of the RAM 553 to store the total time obtained by adding the delay time stored in the storage area p and the time required for the opening effect stored in the storage area q. . The total time stored in the storage area r corresponds to the time from the start time of one movable cycle of the sorting movable valve 409 to the first opening of the door member 32b after the end of the opening effect.

In step S1705, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not the total time stored in the storage area r is longer than 15 seconds, which corresponds to half the period of movement of the distribution movable valve 409. If the total time is less than 15 seconds, the process proceeds to step S1714.

In step S<b>1706 , it is determined whether or not the total time stored in the storage area r matches 30 seconds, which corresponds to one cycle of the movement of the sorting movable valve 409 . If the total time is equal to 30 seconds, proceed to step S1707; otherwise, proceed to step S1711.

In step S1707, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 starts the image and sound of the song A after the time required for the opening effect stored in the storage area q has passed. The CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 executes the movable pattern suggesting effect accompanying the music A after a predetermined time has passed since the music A started.

In step S1708, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 proceeds to step S1709 if the total time stored in the storage area r is greater than 15 seconds and less than 30 seconds, otherwise proceeds to step S1711.

In step S1709, the time obtained by subtracting the total time stored in the storage area r from 30 seconds, which corresponds to one period of movement of the diverting movable valve 409, is stored in the storage area s. In step S1710, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 starts the image and sound of the song A after the time stored in the storage area q and the time stored in the storage area s have elapsed. It should be noted that the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 executes the movable pattern suggestive effect accompanied by the music A after a predetermined time has passed since the music A started.

In step S1711, if the total time stored in storage area r is greater than 30 seconds, the process proceeds to step S1712. In step S1712, the following calculation is performed and stored in storage area s.
s = 15 seconds - (total time stored in storage area r - 30 seconds)
It should be noted that 15 seconds is a time corresponding to a half cycle of the movable cycle, and 30 seconds is a time corresponding to one cycle of the movable cycle.

In step S1713, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 starts the image and sound of the song B after the time stored in the storage area q and the time stored in the storage area s have elapsed. It should be noted that the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 executes the movable pattern suggestive effect accompanied by the music B after a predetermined time has passed since the music B started.

In step S1714, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not the total time stored in the storage area r is equal to 15 seconds, which corresponds to half the period of movement of the diverting movable valve 409. If the total time is equal to 15 seconds, go to step S1715; if the total time is less than 15 seconds, go to step S1716.

In step S1715, after the time required for the opening effect stored in the storage area q has elapsed, the image and sound of the song B are started. In step S1716, the time obtained by subtracting the total time stored in the storage area r from 15 seconds corresponding to the half period of the movable period of the diverting movable valve 409 is stored in the storage area s. In step S1717, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 starts the image and sound of the song B after the time stored in the storage area q and the time stored in the storage area s have elapsed. It should be noted that the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 executes the movable pattern suggestive effect accompanied by the music A after a predetermined time has passed since the music B started.

In this way, if the song A or song B cannot be started at the start timing of the movable cycle (r=30 seconds) or the timing of the half cycle of the movable cycle of the sorting movable valve 409 (r=15 seconds), the opening performance is performed. By starting music A or music B after the time stored in the storage area s has elapsed from the end time, the start timing of music A or music B and the start timing of the movable cycle of the diverting movable valve 409 or the half cycle You can match the timing. As a result, it is possible to execute the movable pattern suggestive effect in which the rhythm of the music A or the music B and the movement timing of the sorting movable valve 409 are matched.

(Game processing during round)
Next, the in-round game processing will be described.

In step S1751, the CPU 551 of the sub-controller 262 analyzes the content of the round-number designation command sent from the CPU 501 of the main controller 261, and determines whether or not the round-number designation command for the second and subsequent rounds has been received. . If the round number designation command is a command for the second round or later, the process proceeds to step S1752, for example, a round number display command for displaying the image of "2R" designating the second round on the third pattern display device 42. set. If the command for designating the number of rounds from the second round onward is not received, this processing is terminated.

In step S1753, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 performs a process during the movable pattern suggestion effect which is executed during the movable pattern suggestion effect. In the movable pattern suggesting rendering process, for example, when the second frame button 21 is operated in time with the suggesting timing during the movable pattern suggesting rendering, if the timing is correct, an image indicating that the timing is correct is displayed. display or output the correct sound. Also, if the timing is not correct, an image indicating that the timing is not correct is displayed or an erroneous sound is output.

In step S 1754 , the CPU 551 of the sub-controller 262 determines whether or not a round end command has been received from the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 . If the round end command has been received, the process advances to step S1755 to erase the display of the number of rounds. If the round end command has not been received, the process ends.

Next, the relationship between the movable timing of the sorting movable valve 409 and the suggestive timing of the movable pattern suggestive effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 29 to 32. FIG. FIG. 29 is a timing chart of example 1 of movable pattern suggestive effect showing the relationship between the movable timing of the distribution movable valve 409 and the suggestive timing of the movable pattern suggestive effect during the jackpot state. FIG. 30 is a timing chart of example 2 of movable pattern suggestive presentation during the big win state. FIG. 31 is a timing chart of example 3 of movable pattern suggestive effect during the jackpot state. FIG. 32 is a timing chart of example 4 of movable pattern suggestive presentation during the big win state.

(Movable pattern suggestion production example 1 in jackpot state)
A movable pattern of the sorting movable valve 409 will be described. As shown in FIG. 29, the movable pattern of the sorting movable valve 409 starts when the game machine is powered on, and has a movable pattern A that is executed for 15 seconds and a movable pattern B that is executed for the next 15 seconds. is a pattern of one cycle of 30 seconds. In addition, below, one period is called a movable period. Specifically, the movable pattern A is 2 seconds (t1), 4 seconds (t2), 7 seconds (t3), 10 seconds (t4), and 11 seconds (t5) from the start of each movable cycle. , after 13 seconds (t6), the diverting movable valve 409 shifts from the retracted position to the projected position, maintains the projected position for about 0.3 seconds, and then shifts from the projected position to the retracted position. Movable pattern B is 16 seconds (t7), 20 seconds (t8), 21 seconds (t9), 22 seconds (t10), 26 seconds (t11), and 29 seconds (t12) after the start, The sorting movable valve 409 moves from the retracted position to the projecting position, maintains the projecting position for about 0.3 seconds, and then moves from the projecting position to the retracted position. Note that t1 to t12 are hereinafter referred to as movable timings t1 to t12.

Here, at a certain point in the game state, detection of a ball entering the first starting ports 33a and 33b occurs, and the lottery result based on this detection of a ball entering is the result of a jackpot state of 16 rounds, and the variable display time is 60 seconds, and the jackpot opening time from the end of fluctuation to the start of the jackpot state is 5 seconds.

In this embodiment, the variable display of the symbols based on the lottery results is started at the same timing as the movable timing t6, and ends 60 seconds later at the same timing as the movable timing t6. After that, the big win opening performance is started, and 5 seconds after that, the big win opening performance ends with a slight delay from the movable timing t7. After the end of the big winning opening performance, the big winning opening 32a is opened and the first round of the big winning state is started.

The CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 displays, on the third symbol display device 42, a jackpot effect image composed of the image of the song and the music of the song output from the speaker during the jackpot state. The jackpot effect images are set with two kinds of music A and music B that require about 3 to 4 minutes from the start to the end of the music in the case of the jackpot state of 16 rounds.

The moving pattern suggestion effect is set to start 90 seconds after the start of the song A in the jackpot effect images of 16 rounds (that is, the video and music of the song A). The reason is that the movable pattern suggestion effect is started after the game balls of the maximum number of reservations (five balls) are reserved in the sorting device 400 . Specifically, assuming that the game ball shooting device 38 shoots one game ball per second, if the player continuously shoots game balls immediately after the start of the jackpot state, the minimum time is 75 seconds. At a later time, the hold device 400 reaches its maximum hold count. As described above, the sorting device 400 reserves one game ball out of fifteen game balls shot toward the big winning opening 32a. Therefore, the movable pattern suggestion effect is set to be started at least 75 seconds after the start of the jackpot state.

Here, the timing of the end of the jackpot opening time is in the middle of the movable cycle, that is, in the middle of the movable pattern B. In this case, if song A or song B is started immediately after the jackpot opening time elapses, the suggested timing in the motion pattern suggestion performance, which will be described later, included in song A or song B and the motion timing in each motion pattern do not match. Therefore, the start timing of the song A or the song B is adjusted so that the start timing of the song A or the song B and the start timing of the movable pattern match.

The adjustment of the start timing of music A or music B is performed from the time of 30 seconds of the movable cycle to the time taken from the start time of one cycle of the movable cycle to the reception time of the opening command (hereinafter referred to as delay time) p, The start timing of the music piece A is delayed by the time s obtained by subtracting the total time r from the opening performance time q (hereinafter referred to as adjustment time s). Specifically, after performing an effect (hereinafter referred to as adjustment effect) that delays the start timing of song A for 12 seconds (s time), which is 18 seconds (total time r) subtracted from the movable cycle time of 30 seconds, The music A is started in accordance with the start timing of the movable pattern A.

During this adjustment time s, a display effect is performed to keep the player from getting bored. For example, a video that introduces a singer who sings the song A, a digest video that briefly summarizes the song A, and the like. The video ends when the adjustment time s elapses. A plurality of types of images may be prepared according to the adjustment time s. Such images are also included in the big hit production.

In this way, when the original display start timing of the jackpot effect image (that is, the video and music of the song A) is the timing in the middle of the movable cycle, that is, the timing in the middle of the movable pattern B, the start timing of the song A is changed. By performing an effect of delaying the adjustment time s, the timing at which the music A actually starts coincides with the timing at which the movable pattern A starts. As a result, in the movable pattern suggestive effect that starts 90 seconds after the start of the jackpot effect by the song A, the movable timing that constitutes the movable pattern A coincides with the suggested timing that the operation request image that suggests the movable timing is displayed. do.

The movable pattern suggestive effect executed in the song A is a rhythm game in which the player taps the second frame button 21 in time with the rhythm of the song A. Therefore, the movable pattern of the sorting movable valve 409 is set so that at least a part of it matches a part of any rhythm of the song A. Specifically, the five movable timings of t2 to t6 in the movable pattern A match part of the rhythm of the music piece A. FIG. That is, for the jackpot effect by the music A, suggesting timings st1 to st5 associated with movable timings t2 to t6 are set in advance.

Each suggested timing is set slightly earlier than the movable timing of the sorting movable valve 409 . Each suggestion timing is set based on the time until the game ball discharged from the reserve portion 403 reaches the distribution movable valve 409 in a state where the reserve state switching piece 405 is switched to the discharge position. Each suggestion timing and its setting method will be described later in detail.

(Movable pattern suggestion production example 2 in jackpot state)
Next, as shown in FIG. 30, the variation display of the symbols based on the lottery result is started at the same timing as the movable timing t6, as in example 1 of the movable pattern suggestive effect, but the variable display time is the same as the example of the movable pattern suggestive effect. Let it be 72 seconds, which is 12 seconds longer than 1 (60 seconds). That is, the variable display of the pattern ends at a timing delayed by three seconds from the movable timing t10. Since the jackpot opening effect is assumed to last for 5 seconds as in the example 1 of movable pattern suggestive effect, the end time of the jackpot opening effect coincides with the end timing of the movable period.

In this case, if the music A is started in accordance with the start of the jackpot state, the movable pattern suggestion performance is started 90 seconds after the start of the music A without performing the adjustment performance for delaying the start timing of the music A. , the movable timings t2 to t6 constituting the movable pattern A and the suggested timings st1 to st5 coincide with each other.

(Movable pattern suggestion production example 3 in jackpot state)
Next, as shown in FIG. 31, the variable display of the symbols based on the lottery result is started at the same timing as the movable timing t6 as in example 1 of the movable pattern suggestive effect, but the variable display time is the same as the example of the movable pattern suggestive effect. Assume that it is 51 seconds, which is 9 seconds shorter than 1 (60 seconds). That is, the variable display of the pattern ends at the same timing as the movable timing t2 four seconds after the start of the movable cycle. Since the jackpot opening effect is for 5 seconds as in example 1 of movable pattern suggestive effect, the jackpot opening effect is in the middle of the movable cycle, that is, in the middle of the movable pattern A. Therefore, in movable pattern suggestive effect example 3, an adjustment effect is displayed prior to the start of the music, similarly to movable pattern suggestive effect example 1.

Specifically, the adjustment time s (9 seconds), which is the total time r (9 seconds) of the delay time p (4 seconds) and the opening effect time q (5 seconds), is subtracted from the time 15 seconds corresponding to the half cycle of the movable cycle. 6 seconds), after performing the adjustment effect, the music B is started in accordance with the start timing of the movable pattern B.

The movable pattern suggestive effect executed in the music B is an operation effect in which the player hits the second frame button 21 in time with the rhythm of the music B in the middle of the music B. Therefore, the movable pattern of the sorting movable valve 409 is set so that at least a part of it matches a part of any rhythm of the music B. Specifically, five movable timings from t8 to t12 in the movable pattern B match a part of the rhythm of the music piece B. As shown in FIG. That is, in the jackpot effect by the music piece B, suggested timings st6 to st10 associated with movable timings t8 to t12 are set in advance.

By starting the movable pattern suggestive effect 90 seconds after the start of the music piece B, the movable timings t7 to t11 and the suggested timings st6 to st10 forming the movable pattern B match. Suggestion timings st6 to st10 and their setting method are the same as in example 1 of movable pattern suggestion rendering.

(Movable pattern suggestion production example 4 in jackpot state)
Next, as shown in FIG. 32, the variable display of the symbols based on the lottery result is started at the same timing as the movable timing t6, as in the example 1 of the movable pattern suggestive effect. Assume that it is 55 seconds, which is 5 seconds shorter than 1 (60 seconds). That is, the variable display of the pattern ends at the same timing as the movable timing t4. Since the jackpot opening effect is assumed to last for 5 seconds as in example 1 of movable pattern suggestive effect, the end time of the jackpot opening effect coincides with the end timing of the movable pattern A. - 特許庁

In this case, if the music piece B is started in accordance with the start of the big winning state, the movement pattern suggestion performance is started 90 seconds after the start of the music piece B without performing the adjustment performance for delaying the start timing of the music piece B. , the movable timings t7 to t11 constituting the movable pattern B coincide with the suggested timings st6 to st10.

Next, suggestion timings st1 to st5 in the movable pattern suggestion effect example will be described with reference to FIGS. 33 to 35. FIG. FIG. 33 is a timing chart showing an example of suggested timings st1 to st5 and operation timings of the second frame button 21. As shown in FIG. FIG. 34 is a timing chart following FIG. FIG. 35 is a timing chart following FIG. Suggestion images (a) to (p) in FIGS. 32(a) to 35 correspond to images displayed during the movable pattern suggestion performance of (a) to (p) in FIGS. 36 to 39, which will be described later. is doing.

36 to 39, the moving pattern suggestive effect displayed on the third symbol display device 42 during the jackpot state will be described. FIGS. 36(a) and (b) are diagrams showing movable pattern suggestive effects displayed on the third symbol display device 42 during the big win state. FIGS. 37(c) and (d) are diagrams showing the movable pattern suggestive effect following FIG. FIGS. 38(e)-(j) are diagrams showing the movable pattern suggestive effects following FIG. FIGS. 39(k)-(p) are diagrams showing the movable pattern suggestive effects following FIG.

In addition, in the movable pattern suggestion renderings in the movable pattern suggestion rendering examples 1 and 2, the movable timing t1 is not suggested, and the movable timings t2 to t6 are suggested. This is because, as shown in FIG. 33, an image for explaining the rhythm game in the movable pattern suggestive effect is displayed during the period up to the suggestive timing corresponding to the movable timing t2.

As shown in FIG. 33, the third pattern display device 42 is displayed for 2.0 seconds from 0.0 seconds after the start of the movable pattern A to 2.0 seconds after the start of the movable pattern A. An image (a) explaining the rhythm game is displayed so as to be superimposed on the image of the song A or song B being played. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 36(a), a character image reading "Rhythm game, hit the drum button in time with the rhythm" is displayed. Further, the third symbol display device 42 displays a round number image 421 indicating that the game is in the jackpot state. Here, an image (9R) showing the ninth round is displayed. In the following description, although not specifically described, it is assumed that the image of the song A or song B being displayed at that time is displayed behind each image that constitutes the movable pattern suggestive effect.

Next, for 1.0 seconds from 2.0 seconds after the start of movable pattern A to 3.0 seconds after the start of movable pattern A, an image (b) is displayed to inform the start of the rhythm game. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 36B, an operation explanation image 423 for explaining an operation and an operation timing image 425 imitating the shape (drum shape) of the second frame button 21 for notifying the operation timing are displayed. be done. The operation explanation image 423 displays an explanation that reads, "When the Hit! mark overlaps the drum, hit the drum button."

The rhythm game in the movable pattern suggestion production example 1 is executed for 11.0 seconds from 3.0 seconds after the start of the movable pattern A to 14.0 seconds after the start of the movable pattern A. For 0.85 seconds from 3.00 seconds after the start of the movable pattern A to 3.85 seconds after the start of the movable pattern A, the first operation request image 431 displaying the characters “Hit!” is the operation timing image. A moving image (c) approaching 425 is displayed (see FIG. 37(c)). For 0.50 seconds from 3.85 seconds after the start of movable pattern A to 4.35 seconds after the start of movable pattern A, an image (d) in which the first operation request image 431 completely overlaps the operation timing image 425 (hereinafter referred to as , called an overlapping image) is displayed (see FIG. 37(d)). Thereafter, an image (e) is displayed in which the first operation request image 431 moves away from the operation timing image 425 and disappears from the display screen (see FIG. 38(e)). The time during which this overlapping image is displayed corresponds to the suggestion timing st1.

As shown in FIG. 34, the second operation in which the character "Hit!" A moving image (f) in which the request image 432 approaches the operation timing image 425 is displayed (see FIG. 38(f)). An image (g) in which the second operation request image 432 completely overlaps the operation timing image 425 is displayed for 0.4 seconds from 6.95 seconds after the start of the movable pattern A to 7.35 seconds after the start of the movable pattern A. (See FIG. 38(g)). After that, the second operation request image 432 moves away from the operation timing image 425, and an image (h) that disappears from the display screen is displayed (see FIG. 38(h)). The time during which this overlapping image is displayed corresponds to the suggestion timing st2.

During 0.95 seconds from 9.00 seconds after the start of the movable pattern A to 9.95 seconds after the start of the movable pattern A, the third operation request image 433 displaying the characters “Hit!” is the operation timing image. A moving image (i) approaching 425 is displayed (see FIG. 38(i)). For 0.4 seconds from 9.95 seconds after the start of movable pattern A to 10.35 seconds after the start of movable pattern A, an image in which the third operation request image 433 completely overlaps with the operation timing image 425 and "Hit! , in which the fourth operation request image 434 approaches the operation timing image 425 (see FIG. 38(j)). The time during which this overlapping image is displayed corresponds to the suggestion timing st3.

In addition, in FIG. 38(j) and FIG. 39(k) described later, since the ninth round has ended, the round number image 421 indicating the ninth land is erased, and an interval time of 1.0 seconds is interposed. . From FIG. 39(l) to be described later, the tenth land is started, so the round number image 421 is changed to "10R".

During 0.6 seconds from 10.35 seconds after the start of movable pattern A to 10.95 seconds after the start of movable pattern A, the third operation request image 433 moves away from the operation timing image 425 and disappears from the display screen. A moving image (k) in which the fourth operation request image 434 further approaches the operation timing image 425 is displayed (see FIG. 39(k)). As shown in FIGS. 34 and 35, the fourth operation request image 434 changes to the operation timing image 425 for 0.4 seconds from 10.95 seconds after the start of the movable pattern A to 11.35 seconds after the start of the movable pattern A. is displayed (see FIG. 39(l)). After that, the fourth operation request image 434 moves away from the operation timing image 425, and an image (m) that disappears from the display screen is displayed (see FIG. 29(m)). The time during which this overlapping image is displayed corresponds to the suggestion timing st4.

During 0.95 seconds from 12.00 seconds after the start of the movable pattern A to 12.95 seconds after the start of the movable pattern A, the fifth operation request image 435 displaying the characters "Hit!" A moving image (n) approaching 425 is displayed (see FIG. 39(n)). An image (o) in which the fifth operation request image 435 completely overlaps the operation timing image 425 is displayed for 0.5 seconds from 12.95 seconds after the start of the movable pattern A to 13.45 seconds after the start of the movable pattern A. (See FIG. 39(o)). After that, the fifth operation request image 435 moves away from the operation timing image 425, and an image (p) that disappears from the display screen is displayed (see FIG. 39(p)). The time during which this overlapping image is displayed corresponds to the suggestion timing st5.

14.0 seconds after the start of movable pattern A, both the fifth operation request image 435 and the operation timing image 425 disappear, and the image of music A is displayed again. The rhythm game described above may be displayed superimposed on the image of the song A, or the image of the song A may be reduced and displayed in the corner of the display screen and the rhythm game image may be displayed in the center of the display screen. good.

Note that the image displayed during the movable pattern suggestion effect is not limited to the image described above. For example, an image showing the number of game balls held in the holding device 400 may be displayed. In that case, the game board 30 or the main body component 401 of the holding device 400 is attached with a sensor for counting the number of game balls held in the holding device 400, and the main control device 261 or the sub-control device 262 is equipped with a holding device A function of counting and displaying the number of game balls held in 400 is provided. Further, for example, the sub-control device 262 is configured to receive a depression signal of the second frame button 21, so that when the second frame button 21 is operated during the display time of the overlapping image, the timing is correct. When the second frame button 21 is operated at a timing outside the display time of the overlapping image, an image (for example, an image of a musical note indicating the correct sound) is displayed, the correct sound is output, or the overlapping image is displayed. It is also possible to display an image indicating that the values do not match (for example, an image in which the note indicating the incorrect sound is marked with an X) or output the incorrect sound.

Next, referring to FIGS. 33 to 35 again, a method of setting the suggested timings st1 to st5 (that is, the display time of the overlapping image) will be described.

The display time of the overlapping image is set in consideration of the response time of the second frame button 21, the operation time of the discharge check valve 406, the falling time of the game ball, the position of the sorting movable valve 409, and the like. For example, the distribution movable valve 409 performs the projecting operation and the retracting operation described above from 0.0 seconds after the start of each movable timing to 0.9 seconds after the start of each movable timing. At each movable timing, the time that the sorting movable valve 409 can place the dropped game ball and guide it to the general winning opening 31b is from the timing when the tip of the sorting movable valve 409 protrudes to the position P2. The time until the timing when the tip returns to the position P2, that is, 0.50 seconds from 0.20 seconds after the start of each movable timing to 0.70 seconds after the start of each movable timing.

The time from the timing (for example, tm1A) when the player presses the second frame button 21 to the timing (for example, tm1B) at which the ejection prevention valve 406 starts driving to the ejection position is set to 0.10 seconds, and the ejection prevention valve 406 is If the time from the timing (for example, tm1B) at which the movement is started to the timing (for example, tm1C) at which the game ball discharged from the holding section 403 lands on the sorting movable valve 409 is 0.25 seconds, the sorting movable valve 409 If the display of the overlapping image (d) is started at least 0.35 seconds before the timing of projecting to the position P2 (that is, 0.15 seconds before the start of the movable timing), the player can display the overlapping image (d). Even if the second frame button 21 is pressed at the start timing tm1A, the game ball discharged from the holding portion 403 can be placed on the sorting movable valve 409 and guided to the general winning opening 31b. Therefore, the display start timing of the overlapping image at the suggestion timings st2 to st6 is 0.35 seconds before the timing at which the sorting movable valve 409 protrudes to the position P2 at the movable timings t2 to t6 (that is, the start of each movable timing 0.15 seconds before).

In addition, the display end timing of the overlapping image in the suggestion timings st2 to st6 is the time from when the player presses the second frame button 21 to when the discharge prevention valve 406 starts driving to the discharge position (0.10 ), and the time (0.25 seconds) from when the discharge prevention valve 406 starts operating until the game ball discharged from the holding unit 403 lands on the distribution movable valve 409, It is set 0.35 seconds before the timing at which the valve 409 returns to the position P2 (that is, 0.35 seconds after the start of each movable timing in the movable timings t2 to t6). That is, the display time of the superimposed image is set to 0.50 seconds in accordance with the time during which the game ball dropped by the sorting movable valve 409 can be guided to the general winning opening 31b.

In this way, by considering the response time of the second frame button 21, the operation time of the discharge check valve 406, the game ball drop time, the position of the sorting movable valve 409, etc., the suggested timings st1 to st5 in the movable pattern suggestion presentation can be set at a predetermined time.

Next, when the second frame button 21 is operated at an arbitrary timing (for example, timings tm1A to tm5A shown in FIGS. 33 to 35) during the movable pattern suggestive effect, the game ball ejected from the holding device 400 will ride on the sorting movable valve 409 (that is, whether it will be guided to the general winning opening 31b).

When the second frame button 21 is pressed at the timing tm1A at which the display of the overlapping image starts, the game ball ejected from the holding device 400 is distributed at the same timing tm1C as the timing at which the distribution movable valve 409 protrudes to the position P2. It reaches the surface of the movable valve 409, is guided to the general prize winning port 31b, and enters the general prize winning port 31b (see also FIGS. 42 and 43, which will be described later).

When the second frame button 21 is pressed at the timing tm2A after 0.25 seconds from the start of display of the overlapping image, the game ball discharged from the holding device 400, the distribution movable valve 409 maintains the maximum projecting position P3. It reaches the surface of the sorting movable valve 409 at the timing tm2B during the time, is guided to the general winning opening 31b, and wins the general winning opening 31b. Further, even when the second frame button 21 is pressed at the timing tm3A after 0.35 seconds from the start of display of the overlapping image, the game ball ejected from the holding device 400 is the timing later than the above timing tm2B. reaches the surface of the movable dividing valve 409 at timing tm3B while the movable dividing valve 409 maintains the maximum protruding position P3, is guided to the general winning opening 31b, and enters the general winning opening 31b. .

Further, when the second frame button 21 is pressed at the timing tm4A when the display of the overlapping image ends, the game ball ejected from the holding device 400 is returned to the position P2 from P3 at the same timing. At tm4C, it reaches the surface of the sorting movable valve 409, is guided to the general prize winning port 31b, and enters the general prize winning port 31b. On the other hand, when the second frame button 21 is pressed at timing tm5A after 0.55 seconds from the start of display of the overlapping image (timing after the display of the overlapping image ends), the game ball ejected from the holding device 400 Since the movable sorting valve 409 drops to the same height as the surface of the movable sorting valve 409 at the timing when the movable sorting valve 409 is shifting from the position P2 to the position P1, it is guided to the general winning opening 31b without riding on the movable sorting valve 409. (See also FIGS. 46 and 47, which will be described later).

It is conceivable that the player repeatedly hits the second frame button 21 aiming at the time when the overlapping image is displayed. In this case, only when the second frame button 21 can be repeatedly hit within the time when the overlapping image is displayed, the game ball that has fallen from the holding part 403 is put on the sorting movable valve 409 and entered into the general winning opening 31b. You may enable it to guide|induce. Further, pressing of the second frame button 21 may be valid only once during the time when one overlapping image is displayed.

Next, the lower right game area 30a3 of the game board during execution of the movable pattern suggestive effect in the jackpot state will be described with reference to FIGS. 40 to 47. FIG. FIG. 40 is a diagram showing the lower right game area 30a3 of the game board during execution of the movable pattern suggestive effect in the big hit state. FIG. 41 shows how a game ball ejected from the holding device 400 shown in FIG. 40 enters the general winning hole 31b. FIG. 42 is a cross-sectional view showing a state in which the decoration plate 413 is removed from the retaining device 400 of FIG. FIG. 43 is a cross-sectional view showing a state in which the decoration plate 413 is removed from the retaining device 400 of FIG. FIG. 44 is a diagram showing the lower right game area 30a2 similar to FIG. FIG. 45 is a diagram showing how the game ball ejected from the holding device 400 shown in FIG. 44 is not entered into the general winning opening 31b. FIG. 46 is a cross-sectional view showing a state in which the decorative plate 413 is removed from the holding device 400 of FIG. FIG. 47 is a cross-sectional view showing a state in which the decorative plate 413 is removed from the retaining device 400 of FIG.

If the player successfully hits the second frame button 21 at the suggested timing st1 to the suggested timing st5, the game ball ejected from the holding device 400 is at the projecting position as shown in FIGS. 41 and 43. It can be placed on the sorting movable valve 409 and can be made to win from the sorting movable valve 409 to the general prize winning port 30b.

On the other hand, when the player hits the second frame button 42 at a timing outside the suggested timing st1 to suggested timing st5, the timing at which the sorting movable valve 409 is in the projecting position and the game ball are released. timing does not match. Further, even when the second frame button 21 is operated while looking at the movable sorting valve 409 regardless of the movable pattern suggesting effect, the movable sorting valve 409 operates at high speed and the visibility of the movable sorting valve 409 is improved. Due to the low height, etc., it is difficult to release the holding of the game ball at the timing when the diverting movable valve 409 changes from the retracted position to the projecting position. Therefore, most of the game balls discharged from the sorting device 400 do not ride on the sorting movable valve 409 as shown in FIGS. flow down towards

In this way, even if the game ball is normally held in the holding device 400, it is difficult for the player to let the game ball held in the holding device 400 enter the general prize winning opening 31b. If the game ball is reserved in 400, the game ball reserved in the reservation device 400 can be released to the general prize winning opening 31b by operating the second frame button 21 in accordance with the suggestion timings st1 to st5 in the movable pattern suggestion performance. can be made to enter the ball.

As a result, the maximum reserved number of game balls are reserved in the holding device 400 during the jackpot state, so that the general prize winning port 31b, which cannot normally win a prize, can obtain a prize winning opportunity for the reserved number of game balls. , the player feels the merit that the maximum number of game balls are held in the holding device 400. - 特許庁Also, even if the game ball is held in the holding device 400, it is usually difficult for the game ball discharged from the holding device 400 to enter the general prize winning opening 31b. If it is operated at an appropriate timing, the game balls discharged from the holding device 400 are likely to enter the general prize winning opening 31b, so the player feels merit in participating in the movable pattern suggestive presentation. In addition, since winning balls from the general winning hole 31b differ depending on how well or badly the second frame button 42 is operated, the winning to the general winning hole 31b in the big win state can be provided with technical intervention. As a result, it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 10 having the interesting holding device 400.例文帳に追加

The first start ports 33a and 33b correspond to the starting ball entry means of the present invention, the variable prize winning device 32 corresponds to the variable ball entry means of the present invention, and the entry detection switches 31c and 31d correspond to the entry ball entry means of the present invention. It corresponds to a sphere detection means. The aforementioned lottery section (the function of executing step S704 of the CPU 501 of the main controller 261) corresponds to the lottery means of the present invention. The holding device 400 described above corresponds to the holding device of the present invention, the general winning opening 31b described above corresponds to the winning opening of the present invention, and the second frame button 21 described above corresponds to the operating means of the present invention. The retracted position and the protruding position described above correspond to the first position and the second position of the present invention, and the movable sorting valve 409 described above corresponds to the sorting member of the present invention. The above-described distribution operation control section (the function of executing steps S112 and S118 of the CPU 501 of the main controller 261) corresponds to distribution operation control means of the present invention. The first to fifth operation request images 431 to 435 described above correspond to operation requests of the present invention, and the third pattern display device 42 described above corresponds to display means of the present invention. The above-described movable pattern suggestion effect corresponds to the operation effect of the present invention, and the above-described operation effect control section (the function of executing steps S1701 to S1713 of the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262) serves as the operation effect control means of the present invention. Equivalent to.

Further, the above-described display effect control section (the function of executing the process of step S1604 that the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 has) corresponds to the display effect control means of the present invention. The decorative plate 413 described above corresponds to a member that reduces the visibility of the distribution member of the present invention. The above-described movable decorative piece 415 corresponds to a member that operates as a member that reduces visibility of the sorting member of the present invention. The holding area light emitting unit 417 described above corresponds to the light emitting means of the present invention.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the game board 30 having the game area 30a in which the game ball can flow down, and the first start-up mechanism in which the game ball flowing down the game area 30a can enter. The openings 33a and 33b are provided at positions where game balls flowing down the game area 30a can enter when a right-handed game is performed, and there is a closed state in which game balls are difficult to enter, and a game ball is more likely to enter than in the closed state. A variable winning device 32 that changes to an open state for easy ball entry, ball entry detection switches 31c and 31d that detect game balls entering the first start ports 33a and 33b, and ball entry detection switches 31c and 31d. A lottery unit (function for executing step S704 of the CPU 501 of the main control unit 261) that can determine whether or not to generate a special game state based on the detection of the game ball is provided, and the result of the lottery is a jackpot result. In this case, as a jackpot state, a jackpot round game in which the variable winning device 32 changes between an open state and a closed state is executed a plurality of times. A holding device 400 that changes between a holding state in which some of the game balls shot toward the variable winning device 32 can be held and a release state in which the holding of the game balls is released, and a game area 30a. Among them, a general winning hole 31b provided at a position where it is difficult to enter a game ball unless the game ball has been released from the holding device 400, and a predetermined game value can be obtained based on the entry of the game ball, and the holding device 400 A second frame button 21 for receiving a player's operation including an operation to change from a hold state to a release state, a first position that makes it difficult for a game ball whose hold has been released to enter a general winning hole 31b, and a hold release. A distribution movable valve 409 that performs a distribution operation that changes to a second position that makes it easier for the game balls that have been hit to win a prize in the general winning hole 31b, and a distribution operation control that controls the distribution operation of the distribution movable valve 409 (function for executing steps S112 and S118 of the CPU 501 of the main control device 261) and the display of the first to fifth operation request images 431 to 435 requesting the operation of the second frame button 21. Suggested timings st1 to st5 and stst6 to st10 at which the first to fifth operation request images 431 to 435 are displayed are adjusted to movable timings t2 to t6 and t8 to t12 at which the sorting movable valve 409 reaches the projecting position. An operation effect control section (a function of executing steps S1701 to S1713 of the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262) that controls to display the movable pattern suggestion effect on the third symbol display device 42 during the jackpot state.

As a result, the player can see timings st1 to st5 and stst6 to st10 at which the first to fifth operation request images 431 to 435 are displayed in the movable pattern suggestion effect displayed on the third symbol display device 42 during the jackpot state. By operating the second frame button 21 in accordance with , the holding device 400 can be changed from the holding state to the release state in accordance with the timings t2 to t6 and tst8 to t12 when the sorting movable valve 409 reaches the projecting position. can. As a result, the game ball ejected from the holding device 400 at the timing when the first to fifth operation request images 431 to 435 are displayed enters the general prize winning opening 31b through the diverting movable valve 409 which comes to the projecting position. becomes easier. On the other hand, even if the second frame button 21 is operated by the player at times other than this timing, the timing at which the holding device 400 changes from the holding state to the release state does not match the timing at which the sorting movable valve 409 comes to the projecting position. Therefore, it becomes difficult for the game ball discharged from the holding device 400 at this timing to enter the general winning hole 31b. Therefore, the player actively shoots the game ball during the big win state, actively participates in the movable pattern suggestive performance displayed on the third symbol display device 42 during the big win state, and is in the movable pattern suggestive performance. If the second frame button 21 can be successfully operated in time with the timing at which the operation request image is displayed, the game value that the player can enjoy based on the ball entering the variable prize winning device 32 during the jackpot state, as well as the reserved value. The number of game balls reserved in the device 400 is entered into the general prize winning opening 31b, and a predetermined game value corresponding to the number can be obtained during the jackpot state. As a result, it is possible to increase the merit of holding the game ball in the holding device 400 and improve the interest of the game using the holding device 400. - 特許庁

In addition, the holding device 400 can hold some of the game balls launched toward the variable winning device 32 in the jackpot state. As a result, the player can cause the retaining device 400 to retain some of the game balls that have been shot by continuing to shoot the game balls toward the big winning opening 32a during the jackpot state. In order to make the game ball held in the holding device 400 win a prize in a prize-winning hole other than the big prize-winning hole 32a, the second frame button is properly pressed in time with the operation request image being displayed during the movable pattern suggestive effect. Since it is necessary to operate 21, it is possible to make the winning to the general winning opening 31b other than the variable winning device 32 during the jackpot state have technical intervention.

Note that the right-handed game is an operation of shooting a game ball so that the game ball flows down the upper right narrow area 30a2 and the lower right game machine area 302c on the right side of the game area 30a when viewed from the front of the game machine. That is.

In addition, the movable pattern suggestion effect is displayed on the third pattern display device 42 as a part of a predetermined jackpot effect selected from a plurality of patterns of jackpot effects displayed on the third pattern display device 42 during the jackpot state. be. As a result, the player has a chance to obtain a predetermined game value during the big win performance displayed on the third pattern display device 42 during the big win state (as the movable pattern suggestive performance), so that the big win performance is achieved. It is possible to improve the interest in

In addition, the operation effect control unit displays the movable pattern suggestion effect on the third symbol display device 42 based on the fact that 90 seconds have passed since the start of the jackpot state, so that the game balls are sufficiently held in the holding device 400 (5 The player can participate in the movable pattern suggesting effect while the ball is held, and the interest of the game using the holding device 400 can be improved.

In addition, the timing at which the sorting movable valve 409 comes to the projecting position occurs multiple times during one movable pattern suggestive effect, and the first to fifth operations are performed in accordance with the timing at which the sorting movable valve 409 comes to the projecting position a plurality of times. Since the movable pattern suggestion effect in which the request images 431 to 435 are displayed a plurality of times is displayed on the third symbol display device 42, the player can match the timing when the first to fifth operation request images 431 to 435 are displayed. It is necessary to operate the second frame button 21 . This allows the player to actively participate in the operation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 42 .

In addition, the big win effect and the movable pattern suggestion effect are effects accompanied by the reproduction of the music piece A or the music piece B, and timings t2 to t6, which are part of the timings t1 to t12 when the sorting movable valve 409 reaches the protruded position. tst8 to t12 match the rhythm of predetermined portions (timings st1 to st5, stst6 to st10) of music A or music B. 5 Operation request images 431 to 435 are displayed. As a result, the player enjoys the act of operating the second frame button 21 in accordance with the first to fifth operation request images 431 to 435 displayed in accordance with the rhythm of the music A or B, while the third symbol is displayed. A player can be made to actively participate in the movable pattern suggestion performance displayed on the display device 42.例文帳に追加

In addition, although the sorting movable valve 409 repeats the sorting operation at a constant movable cycle, the second frame button 21 is operated by the player at the timing when the first to fifth operation request images 431 to 435 are displayed. In order to match the timing when the game ball, which is released from the holding of the holding device 400 when receiving, reaches the distribution movable valve 409 and the timing when the distribution movable valve 409 comes to the projecting position, the movable pattern suggestion effect is the first Since it is displayed on the 3-symbol display device 42, if the player operates the second frame button 21 at the timings (timings st1-st5, stst6-st10) at which the first to fifth operation request images 431-435 are displayed, It is possible to realize a movable pattern suggestive performance in which the timing at which the game ball released from the holding of the holding device 400 reaches the sorting movable valve 409 matches the timing at which the sorting movable valve 409 comes to the projecting position.

A game ball discharged from the holding device 400 due to the release of the holding from the timing when the holding of the holding device 400 is released for a predetermined time (from the timing when the holding of the holding device 400 is released) reaches the dividing movable valve 409 The first to fifth operation request images 431 to 435 are displayed 0.35 seconds before the time to the timing of the display of the first to fifth operation request images 431 to 435. In spite of the operation of the second frame button 21, the timing at which the game ball released from the holding of the holding device 400 reaches the sorting movable valve 409 and the timing at which the sorting movable valve 409 comes to the projecting position do not match. This inconvenience can be avoided.

In addition, the operation effect control section adjusts the start timing of the big win effect in the big win state. That is, the start timing of the jackpot effect is determined according to the timing of establishment of the starting condition based on the detection of the entering ball at the first starting ports 33a and 33b, but Although it is determined by taking into consideration the time until the end of the variable display, the distribution movable valve 409 repeats the distribution operation at a fixed movable period, so the jackpot effect is simply performed according to the timing when the starting condition is satisfied. is started, when the second frame button 21 is operated by the player at the timing when the first to fifth operation request images 431 to 435 are displayed, the game ball that is released from the holding of the holding device 400 swings. The timing of reaching the dividing movable valve 409 and the timing of the dividing movable valve 409 reaching the projecting position may not match. Therefore, by adjusting the start timing of the big win performance in the big win state so that both timings match, the inconvenience that both timings do not match can be avoided.

In addition, since the movable sorting valve 409 performs the sorting operation in a manner that is difficult for the player to visually recognize, even if the second frame button 21 is operated while the movable sorting valve 409 is visually observed, the movable sorting valve 409 It becomes difficult to release the holding of the game ball at the timing when changes from the retracted position to the projecting position.

In addition, when the sorting operation is difficult for the player to visually recognize, the sorting movable valve 409 operates at a high speed (for example, it takes about 0.5 seconds from the retracted position to the retracted position through the projecting position). Because of this mode, even a player accustomed to the operating speeds of other operating members will find it difficult to release the holding of the game ball at the timing when the diverting movable valve 409 changes from the retracted position to the projecting position.

In addition, the mode in which the sorting operation is difficult for the player to visually recognize means that the sorting movable valve 409 is visible from the front side of the game machine when viewed from the front side of the game machine with respect to the holding device 400. It is a mode in which the decorative plate 413 is arranged to reduce the ease. As a result, it becomes difficult to visually recognize whether the movable distribution valve 409 located behind the decorative plate 413 is at the retracted position or the projecting position, so the timing when the movable dividing valve 409 is at the projecting position and the holding of the game ball are released. It becomes difficult to match the timing to do it.

In addition, since the aspect in which the sorting operation is difficult for the player to visually recognize is the aspect in which the movable decorative piece 415 impairs the ease of visual recognition, the sorting movable valve 409 positioned behind the movable decorative piece 415 operates. Since it becomes difficult to visually recognize whether the is at the retracted position or the projecting position, it becomes difficult to match the timing when the distribution movable valve 409 is at the projecting position and the timing when the game ball is released from the holding position.

In addition, the mode in which the sorting operation is difficult for the player to visually recognize is that the holding area light emitting unit 417 that emits light from the back side of the sorting movable valve 409 is provided on the back side of the holding device 400 when viewed from the front of the game machine, This is a mode in which the reservation area light emitting unit 417 emits light. As a result, it becomes difficult to visually recognize whether the position of the movable sorting valve 409 is at the retracted position or the projecting position by the light emitted from the reservation area light emitting unit 417 from the back side of the movable sorting valve 409, so that the movable sorting valve 409 protrudes. It becomes difficult to match the timing of the position and the timing of releasing the holding of the game ball.

In the first embodiment, an effect suggesting the movement timing of the sorting movable valve 409 was performed during the jackpot state. , may be performed during a game state other than during the jackpot state.

Although all the game balls held in the holding device 400 can be discharged by the movable pattern suggestive effect during the big winning state described in the first embodiment, the game balls are again placed in the holding device 400 during the big winning state after the movable pattern suggestive effect is completed. Ball may be held. In addition, in the first embodiment, the movable pattern suggestive effect is not executed in the jackpot state other than the 16th round, but the game ball can be held in the holding device 400 even in the jackpot state of the number of rounds in which the movable pattern suggestive effect is not executed. be. In addition, when the time saving jackpot or the probability variable jackpot is won, the right-handed game is performed even during the time saving state or the probability changing state, so the holding device 400 may hold the game.

That is, in the holding device 400, not only during the jackpot state, but also during the jackpot state after the end of the movable pattern suggestive effect, during the jackpot state other than 16 rounds, during the variable probability state, during the time saving state, etc. The game ball may be reserved during the state (right-handed game state). Therefore, in this embodiment, when the right-handed game state is switched to a state in which a left-handed game such as a normal game state is performed (left-handed game state), a movable pattern suggestion effect is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition.

Differences between the holding device 400 of the present embodiment and the holding device 400 of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 56 and 57 described later.

The holding device 400 of this embodiment is provided with a microswitch 418 for detecting whether or not the game ball is held in the holding portion 403, as shown in FIG. Specifically, the main body of the microswitch 418 is located on the back side of the game board 30 and is arranged at the downstream position of the holding part 403 . It protrudes from the side to the front side. The retained ball contact portion 418a has its convex piece located at a position where it contacts the game ball that is first retained in the retaining portion 403 in which the game ball is not retained. In the state shown in FIG. 56 , the retained ball contact portion 418 a is pushed by the game ball that is retained first, and it is detected that the game ball is retained in the retaining portion 403 . In the state shown in FIG. 57, since the reserved ball contact portion 418a is not pushed by the game ball, it is detected that the game ball is not reserved in the reserve portion 403. FIG. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce discomfort given to the player by displaying the movable pattern suggestion effect in a state where the game ball is not held in the holding portion 403 .

It should be noted that the means for detecting whether or not the game ball in the holding portion 403 is held is not limited to the microswitch 418, and the holding portion 403 may be sandwiched between a pair of photosensors having a light emitter and a light receiver. do not have.

The timing of switching from the right-handed game state to the left-handed game state will be described. It should be noted that the present embodiment differs from the first embodiment only in the execution conditions of the movable pattern suggestive effect, and the external and internal configurations of the gaming machine are the same as those of the first embodiment. Therefore, the following description appropriately refers to FIGS. 56 and 57 described above.

(Switching timing example 1)
An example of the switching timing is the point in time when the normal game state is started after the end of the jackpot state in the case of winning the normal jackpot. That is, during the jackpot state, a right-handed game is played aiming at the variable winning device 32 , so the game ball may be held in the holding device 400 . Therefore, after the end of the jackpot state, in the normal game state in which the left-handed game is performed, the movable pattern suggestion performance is displayed based on the establishment of the predetermined condition. As a result, the player can obtain a predetermined game value corresponding to the number of game balls reserved during the big win state during the normal game state after the big win state ends.

In addition, when the normal game state is started after the end of the jackpot state, the player may want to secure the game value acquired during the jackpot state or because the possibility of winning the jackpot state again is not high. It is easy to lose the motivation to continue the game. However, the movable pattern suggestive performance is displayed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition in the normal game state after the end of the big win state, and the number of game balls reserved in the reserve device 400 by the movable pattern suggestive performance is displayed. If the player knows that there is a chance to acquire a predetermined game value, it is possible to motivate the game continuation to continue the game until a predetermined condition is established even in the normal game state after the end of the jackpot state. .

(Switching timing example 2)
Another example of switching timing is if you win a variable probability jackpot or a short time jackpot, the next game state (for example, normal game state) starts after the variable probability state or time saving state after the end of the jackpot state. It is the time when That is, the right-handed game is performed during the big win state, but the right-handed game is performed aiming at the first start port 33b even during the variable probability state or the time saving state after the end of the big win state. may be withheld. For example, when winning a 2R jackpot with a variable probability, it is difficult to hold the game balls up to the upper limit number in the holding device 400 during the second round of the jackpot state, but if the variable state after that is for example 100 times of variable display, the probability variable Game balls can be reserved up to the upper limit number in the holding device 400 during the state. Therefore, after the variable probability state or the time saving state ends, in the normal game state in which the left-handed game is performed, the movable pattern suggestion effect is displayed based on the establishment of the predetermined condition. As a result, the player can obtain a predetermined game value according to the number of game balls held during the variable probability state or the time saving state, not only during the jackpot state, but also in the normal game state after the end of the variable probability state or the time saving state. You can get inside. In addition, even in the normal game state after the variable probability state or the time saving state is ended, the game continuation motivation to continue the game can be induced until the predetermined condition is satisfied.

(Switching timing example 3)
The above-mentioned example (example 2) is not limited to the time of switching from the variable probability state or the time saving state to the normal game state, but it is switched from the high probability variable state or the time saving state that is advantageous for the player to the low probability variable state or the time saving state. It can be a point in time. For example, during the variable probability state or the time saving state, the winning probability of the second symbol lottery based on the detection of the ball entering the first starting port 33b is set to a high probability (as a result, the opening time of the first starting port 33b becomes longer and the frequency of opening increases) If there is a period with support and a period without support, it is the time when it switches from the variable state or short-time state during the period with support to the variable state or short-time state during the period without support. . A right-handed game is performed during the probability change state and the time saving state during the period with support. When the variable probability state and the time saving state of the period without support are started, it is difficult to expect the ball to enter the first start port 33b, so the left-handed game is aimed at the first start port 33a during the variable probability state. done. In this way, after the end of the variable probability state or the time-saving state during the period with the support, during the variable probability state or the time-saving state during the period without the support, based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, the movable pattern suggestion effect may be displayed. . In addition, even when the period without support comes after the end of the variable probability state or the time-saving state in the period with support, the desire to continue the game can be induced until a predetermined condition is established.

Next, the predetermined conditions for executing the movable pattern suggestive effect in the left-handed game state switched from the right-handed game state will be described.

The CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 has a function (variation display effect selection unit). The variable display effect selection unit executes the movable pattern suggestion effect during the variable display effect based on establishment of a predetermined condition regarding during the variable display effect in the left-handed game state after the right-handed game state is finished.

(Condition example 1 for execution of movable pattern suggestion effect)
An example of a predetermined ready-to-win effect in which the movable pattern suggestive effect is executed is that the variable display effect includes a predetermined ready-to-win effect and the display time of the ready-to-win effect is at least longer than the display time of the movable pattern suggestive effect. As a result, it is possible to secure the time for executing the movable pattern suggestion effect.

(Condition example 2 for execution of movable pattern suggestion effect)
Another example of the predetermined ready-to-win effect in which the movable pattern suggestive effect is executed is a super ready-to-win effect with a higher expectation that suggests a big win state than the normal ready-to-win effect. In the super ready-to-win effect, the display time of the ready-to-win effect is set to a longer time (60 seconds) than the time (15 seconds) during which the movable pattern suggestion effect is executed. In addition, when the display time of the ready-to-win effect is long, the player tends to feel bored during the ready-to-win effect. can entertain.

(Condition example 3 for execution of movable pattern suggestion effect)
Another example of the predetermined ready-to-win effect in which the movable pattern suggestion effect is executed is that in the left-handed game state after the right-handed game state is completed, the lottery result of the first symbol in the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 is the right-handed game. This is a case in which the result is an out-of-state result, and the variable display effect selected based on the lottery result of the first symbol performed after the out-of-state result includes a super ready-to-win effect. In this case, the right-handed game state is not set by giving the opportunity to enter the game ball reserved during the previous right-handed game state into the general winning hole 31b during the super ready-to-win performance performed after the result of the loss. It is possible to reduce the disappointment of being an out-of-result.

(Condition example 4 for execution of movable pattern suggestion effect)
In Example 4 described above, the variable display effect based on the lottery result (loss result) of the first symbol may include a ready-to-win effect such as a super ready-to-win effect in which the degree of expectation for a big hit is higher than that of a normal ready-to-win. As a result, it is possible to reduce the disappointment that the game state is not set to the right-handed game state even though the variable display effect including the super ready-to-win effect is executed.

Next, when the movable pattern suggestion effect is displayed as a part of the variable display effect (for example, a part of the ready-to-win effect), the suggestion timing in the movable pattern suggestion effect and the distribution movable valve 409 are the same as in the first embodiment. may not match the movable timing of Therefore, below, the means for setting the variable display effect including the movable pattern suggestive effect in this embodiment will be described. A means for synchronizing with the movable timing will be explained.

The movable pattern suggestion effect executed during the ready-to-win effect performed by the sub-control device 262 will be described with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49. FIG. FIG. 48 is a flow chart showing the variable display mode setting process by the sub-controller 262. As shown in FIG. FIG. 49 is a flow chart showing the music start timing adjustment process during the ready-to-win effect by the sub-control device 262 . FIG. 50 is a flow chart showing processing during reach effect by the sub control device 262 .

(Variable display mode setting process)

As shown in FIG. 48, in step S1801, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 proceeds to step S1802 if the variation pattern designation command is received, and proceeds to step S1804 if not received.

In step S1802, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 performs music start timing adjustment processing, and proceeds to step S1803. In step S1803, a display command for displaying the ready-to-win effect image at the start timing adjusted in step S1802 is set, and this processing ends. If the variable display effect does not include the ready-to-win effect or if there is no adjustment in step S1802, a display command for executing the corresponding variable display effect is set.

In step S1804, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 proceeds to step S1805 if the decorative design designation command is received, and proceeds to step S1806 if not received. In step S1805, a stop display command based on a stop symbol is set, and this process is terminated. In step S1806, processing during a reach effect, which will be described later, is performed.

(Music start timing adjustment processing during reach effect)
In this embodiment, during the first super reach effect after switching from the right-handed game state to the left-handed game state, the reach first half effect displayed in the first half of the reach effect period and the movable reach displayed in the middle of the reach effect period A pattern suggesting effect and a ready-to-win latter half effect displayed in the latter half of the ready-to-win effect period are continuously displayed. When it is necessary to match the timing of suggesting the movable pattern suggesting effect with the timing of the movement of the sorting movable valve 409, the adjustment effect described below is displayed before displaying the first half reach effect.

As shown in FIG. 49, in step S1900A, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not the right-handed game state has been switched to the left-handed game state. Specifically, in the switching timing example 1 described above, when the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 receives an ending command indicating the end of the jackpot state, it determines that the right-handed game state has been switched to the left-handed game state. In the switching timing example 2 described above, after the end of the variable probability state, the table for determining the jackpot returns from the jackpot determination table for the variable probability state to the jackpot determination table for the normal state, or after the end of the time saving state, the stop design time is determined. It is determined that the game state is switched from the right-handed game state to the left-handed game state when the table for 2 returns from the stop symbol time determination table for the time saving state to the stop symbol time determination table for the non-time saving state. In the switching timing example 3 described above, when the hit determination table for the second symbol lottery returns from the high-probability state to the normal-probability state, it is determined that the right-handed game state has been switched to the left-handed game state.

In step S1900B, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the game ball is reserved in the reserve section 403 of the reserve device 400. Specifically, if the microswitch 418 detects that the game ball is on hold, the process proceeds to step S1901, and if the microswitch 418 detects that the game ball is not on hold, this process ends. child

In step S1901, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 analyzes the content of the variation pattern designation command, and determines whether or not the ready-to-win effect is the super ready-to-win effect when the variable display effect includes the ready-to-win effect. . If the ready-to-win effect is super ready-to-win, the process proceeds to step S1902, and if the ready-to-win effect is not to super ready-to-win, this process ends without performing the music start timing adjustment process.

The reason why the music start timing adjustment processing is not performed in the case of not super reach is that in the case of normal reach, it may not be possible to secure sufficient time for executing the movement pattern suggestion effect start. Note that the ready-to-win effect other than the super ready-to-win effect may be used as long as the ready-to-win effect can ensure sufficient time for executing the start of the movable pattern suggesting effect.

In step S1902, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 acquires the time (delay time) from the start time of one movable cycle of the distribution movable valve 409 to the reception time of the variation pattern designation command, and stores it in the RAM 553. Store in area v. This is because the time when the sub-control device 262 receives the variation pattern specification command can be regarded as the time when the variation display effect is started. In step S1903, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 analyzes the received variation pattern designation command, and stores the time from the start of variation to the start of reach effect in the storage area w of the RAM 553.

In step S1904, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 stores the total time obtained by adding the delay time stored in the storage area v and the time from the fluctuation start to the ready-to-win effect start stored in the storage area w, in the RAM 553. Store in area x. The total time stored in the storage area x corresponds to the time from the start time of one cycle of the movable cycle of the sorting movable valve 409 to the start of the ready-to-win effect.

In step S1905, the CPU 551 of the sub-controller 262 determines whether or not the total time stored in the storage area x is longer than 15 seconds, which corresponds to the half cycle of the operation cycle of the distribution movable valve 409. If the total time is less than 15 seconds, the process proceeds to step S1914.

In step S<b>1906 , it is determined whether or not the total time stored in the storage area x matches 30 seconds, which corresponds to one operation cycle of the sorting movable valve 409 . If the total time is equal to 30 seconds, proceed to step S1907; otherwise, proceed to step S1908.

In step S1907, the ready-to-win first half effect planned from the beginning is displayed without performing the adjustment effect. Then, as originally planned, after 30 seconds have passed since the start of the ready-to-win effect, the chorus of the song A starts. Simultaneously with the start of the chorus part of the music piece A, the movable pattern suggestive effect is started. In the motion pattern suggesting effect performed during the ready-to-win effect, only the portion of the song A or the song B used in the first embodiment that includes the suggesting timing corresponding to the movable pattern is played. For example, the portion of song A or song B that includes suggestive timing is assigned to the chorus of song A or the chorus of song B.

In step S1908, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 proceeds to step S1909 if the total time stored in the storage area x is greater than 15 seconds and less than 30 seconds, otherwise proceeds to step S1911.

In step S1909, the time obtained by subtracting the total time stored in the storage area x from 30 seconds, which corresponds to one period of movement of the diverting movable valve 409, is stored in the storage area y. In step S1910, the ready-to-win first half effect is displayed after performing the adjustment effect for the time stored in the storage area y from the start of the ready-to-win effect. Then, after the total time of the time stored in the storage area y from the start of the ready-to-win performance and 30 seconds from the start of the first half of the ready-to-win performance has passed, the chorus part of the music A is started. Simultaneously with the start of the chorus part of the music piece A, the movable pattern suggestive effect is started.

In step S1911, if the total time stored in the storage area x is greater than 30 seconds, which corresponds to one cycle of the movable distribution valve 409, the process proceeds to step S1912. In step S1912, the following calculation is performed and stored in storage area y.
y = 15 seconds - (total time stored in storage area x - 30 seconds)
It should be noted that 15 seconds is a time corresponding to a half cycle of the movable cycle, and 30 seconds is a time corresponding to one cycle of the movable cycle.

In step S1913, after performing the adjustment performance for the time stored in the storage area y from the start of the ready-to-win performance, the first half of the ready-to-win performance is displayed. Then, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 starts the image and sound of the chorus of the song B after the time stored in the storage area y from the start of the ready-to-win effect and 30 seconds from the start of the first half of the ready-to-win effect. Simultaneously with the start of the chorus part of the music piece B, the movable pattern suggestive effect is started.

In step S1914, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not the total time stored in the storage area x is equal to 15 seconds, which corresponds to the half period of the movable period of the diverting movable valve 409. If the total time is equal to 15 seconds, go to step S1915; if the total time is less than 15 seconds, go to step S1916.

In step S1915, the ready-to-win effect image planned from the beginning is displayed without performing the adjustment effect. That is, as initially planned, the chorus of the song B is started after 30 seconds have passed since the start of the ready-to-win effect. In step S1916, the time obtained by subtracting the total time stored in the storage area x from 15 seconds corresponding to the half period of the movable period of the diverting movable valve 409 is stored in the storage area y. In step S1917, after performing the adjustment performance for the time stored in the storage area y from the start of the ready-to-win performance, the first half of the ready-to-win performance is displayed. After the time stored in the storage area y from the start of the ready-to-win performance and 30 seconds from the start of the first half of the ready-to-win performance, the chorus part of the music B is started. Simultaneously with the start of the chorus part of the music piece B, the movable pattern suggestive effect is started.

The CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 selects the ready-to-win second half performance to be executed after the end of the moving pattern suggestion performance and sets it to be displayed on the third pattern display device 42 when the time required for the adjustment performance is determined. It is set so that the longer the time of the adjustment effect, the shorter reach latter half effect is selected.

(Processing during reach production)
Next, the process during the ready-to-win effect will be described. The CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 executes the movable pattern suggestion effect according to the present invention in the process during the ready-to-win effect shown in FIG.

In step S1951, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 displays the reach symbol on the third symbol display device . When the adjustment performance is not performed, the ready-to-win pattern is displayed from the first half of the ready-to-win performance. When the adjustment performance is performed, the ready-to-win pattern is displayed from the adjustment performance.

In step S1952, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 performs a process during the movable pattern suggestion effect which is executed during the movable pattern suggestion effect. In the movable pattern suggesting rendering process, for example, when the second frame button 21 is operated in time with the suggesting timing during the movable pattern suggesting rendering, if the timing is correct, an image indicating that the timing is correct is displayed. display or output the correct sound. Also, if the timing is not correct, an image indicating that the timing is not correct is displayed or an erroneous sound is output.

In this way, if the variable display effect cannot be started at the start timing of the movable cycle (r=30 seconds) or the timing of the half cycle of the movable cycle of the sorting movable valve 409 (r=15 seconds), the original song A or By starting the chorus part of the music A or the music B after the time stored in the storage area y has elapsed from the start time of the chorus part of the music B, the start timing of the chorus part of the music A or the music B can be sorted. It is possible to match the start timing of the movable cycle of the valve 409 or the timing of the half cycle. As a result, it is possible to execute a movable pattern suggestive effect in which the rhythm of the chorus portion of the song A or the song B is matched with the movable timing of the sorting movable valve 409 . Four examples of this movable pattern suggestive effect will be described below.

Next, the relationship between the movement timing of the distribution movable valve 409 during the reach performance and the suggestion timing of the movable pattern suggestion performance will be described with reference to FIGS. 51 to 54. FIG. FIG. 51 is a timing chart of example 1 of movable pattern suggestive effect showing the relationship between the movable timing of the distribution movable valve 409 during the reach effect and the suggestive timing of the movable pattern suggestive effect. FIG. 52 is a timing chart of example 2 of movable pattern suggestive effect during ready-to-win effect. FIG. 53 is a timing chart of example 3 of movable pattern suggestive effect during ready-to-win effect. FIG. 54 is a timing chart of example 4 of movable pattern suggestion effect during ready-to-win effect.

(Movable pattern suggestion production example 1 performed during reach production)
As shown in FIG. 51, the sorting movable valve 409 is driven at a constant cycle with the same constant movable pattern as in the first embodiment. Here, it is assumed that the jackpot state ends with three game balls left in the holding device 400, and then the normal game state is resumed. During the jackpot state, since the game ball is likely to enter the first starting hole 33b, it is assumed that the number of suspensions of the variable display is four at the end of the jackpot. It is assumed that after the end of the big win, the next variable display is started and the result of the lottery is the result of being out of the super reach.

After the display of the result, the variation display based on the next hold is started, this variation pattern command is a super reach effect (the lottery result may be a win or a loss), and the variation time from the start to the end of the variation is 65 seconds. The ready-to-win performance is started 5 seconds after the start of the fluctuation, and the ready-to-win performance ends (the variable display ends) after 60 seconds from the start of the ready-to-win performance.

At this time, the variable display based on the next hold is started at the same timing as movable timing t10, and five seconds later, the ready-to-win effect is started with a slight delay from movable timing t11. The movable pattern suggestive effect is scheduled to start 30 seconds after the start of the ready-to-win effect, but the timing after 30 seconds from the start of the ready-to-win effect is a timing slightly later than the movable timing t11, which is the timing of the movable pattern B. It is the timing on the way. In this case, if the chorus of the song B starts at the same timing as the movable timing t10, the suggestion timing included in the chorus of the song B does not match the movable timing in each movable pattern. An adjustment performance for delaying the start timing of the chorus part of the music A or the music B is displayed so that the start timing of the chorus part of the music A or the music B coincides with the start timing of the movable pattern.

Adjustment of the start timing of the chorus part of song A or song B is from the time of 30 seconds of the movable cycle, the time taken from the start time of one cycle of the movable cycle to the reception time of the variation pattern designation command (hereinafter referred to as delay time) ) v and the time required from the start of fluctuation to the start of reach effect (hereinafter referred to as pre-reach time) w minus the total time x (hereinafter referred to as adjustment time y), song A or song B It is to delay the start timing of the chorus part of. Specifically, after performing the adjustment performance for 3 seconds (y time), which is 27 seconds (total time x) subtracted from the movable cycle time of 30 seconds, the chorus of song A is synchronized with the start timing of movable pattern A. to start.

The adjustment effect may be a part of the ready-to-win effect, and may be a series of ready-to-win effects after the adjustment time y.

In this way, when the ready-to-win effect is at the timing in the middle of the movable cycle, that is, the timing in the middle of the movable pattern B, the start timing of the chorus part of the song A is delayed by the adjustment time y. The timing at which the chorus of the song A starts coincides with the timing at which the movable pattern A starts. As a result, in the movable pattern suggesting effect, the movable timing constituting the movable pattern A and the suggested timing at which the operation request image suggesting the movable timing is displayed match.

When the chorus portion of the music piece A starts, the movable pattern suggestive effect is started. This is a state in which three game balls are held in the holding device 400 . The movable timings t2 to t6 forming the movable pattern A match the suggested timings st1 to st5 at which the operation request image is displayed. As a result, the player successfully operates the second frame button 21 at least three times out of the suggestion timings st1 to st5 in accordance with the suggestion timings, thereby allowing the three game balls left in the holding device 400 to win the general prize. A ball can be entered into the mouth 31b. As a result, a maximum of 45 prize balls can be obtained during the ready-to-win performance after the end of the big win state.

Twelve seconds remain from the end timing of movable pattern suggestive effect example 1 to the end timing of ready-to-win effect (variable display effect). In the ready-to-win second half production, an image for 12 seconds is selected and the image is displayed on the second symbol display device 42 .

(Movable pattern suggestion production example 2 performed during reach production)
Next, as shown in FIG. 52, it is assumed that the variable display starts 3 seconds after the timing t10, ie, 25 seconds after the start of the movable period, and the ready-to-win effect starts 5 seconds after the variable display starts. Then, in this case, if the chorus portion of the song A (movable pattern suggestive effect) is started 30 seconds after the start of the ready-to-win effect, the movable pattern A can be performed without performing the adjustment effect for delaying the start timing of the chorus portion of the song A. The movable timings of t2 to t6 and the suggested timings of st2 to st6, which constitute .

15 seconds remain from the end timing of movable pattern suggestive effect example 2 to the end timing of ready-to-win effect (variable display effect). In the late reach effect, an image for 15 seconds is selected and the image is displayed on the second symbol display device 42. - 特許庁

(Movable pattern suggestion production example 3 performed during reach production)
Next, as shown in FIG. 53, it is assumed that the variable display starts at movable timing t2, that is, 4 seconds after the start of the movable period, and the ready-to-win effect starts 5 seconds after the variable display starts. Then, if the chorus part (movable pattern suggestive effect) of music A is started 30 seconds after the start of the ready-to-win effect, the movable timings t2 to t6 and the suggestive timings st2 to st6 that constitute the movable pattern A match. do not do.

Therefore, the adjustment time y (6 seconds) is obtained by subtracting the total time x (9 seconds) of the delay time v (4 seconds) and the pre-reach time w (5 seconds) from the time 15 seconds corresponding to the half cycle of the movable cycle. , an adjustment performance for delaying the start timing of the chorus part of the music B is displayed. In this way, by performing the adjustment effect for 6 seconds, the timing at which the chorus of the song B actually starts is 36 seconds after the start of the ready-to-win effect, which is a half cycle of the movable cycle, that is, the start timing of the movable pattern B. match. As a result, the movable timings t8 to t12 constituting the movable pattern B and the suggested timings st6 to st10 coincide with each other at the start of the movable pattern suggestive effect.

Nine seconds remain from the end timing of the example 3 of movable pattern suggestive effect to the end timing of the ready-to-win effect (variable display effect). As for the ready-to-win second half production, an image for 9 seconds is selected and the image is displayed on the second symbol display device 42 .

(Movable pattern suggestion production example 4 performed during reach production)
Next, as shown in FIG. 54, it is assumed that the figure fluctuation display starts at movable timing t4, that is, 10 seconds after the start of the movable period, and the ready-to-win effect starts 5 seconds after the start of the fluctuation display. Then, in this case, if the chorus part (movable pattern suggestive effect) of the song B is started 30 seconds after the start of the ready-to-win effect, the movable pattern B can be performed without performing the adjustment effect for delaying the start timing of the chorus part of the song B. The movable timings t8 to t12 and the suggested timings st6 to st10 that constitute .

15 seconds remain from the end timing of movable pattern suggestive effect example 4 to the end timing of ready-to-win effect (variable display effect). In the late reach effect, an image for 15 seconds is selected and the image is displayed on the second symbol display device 42. - 特許庁

Next, referring to FIG. 55, the movable pattern suggestion effect displayed on the third symbol display device 42 during the ready-to-win effect will be described. FIGS. 55(a) and 55(b) are diagrams showing the movable pattern suggestive effect displayed on the third symbol display device 42 during the ready-to-win effect. FIGS. 55(a) and 55(b) correspond to FIGS. 37(c) and 37(d) of the movable pattern suggestion effect of the first embodiment.

Except for the fact that a ready-to-win pattern image 427 indicating that the ready-to-win effect is being displayed is displayed on the third pattern display device 42, it is the same as the movable pattern suggestion effect of the first embodiment (Fig. 36(a) to Fig. 36). 39(p)). The ready-to-win pattern image 427 is, for example, an image showing a ready-to-win with two patterns of "7" and "7". As in the first embodiment, the third pattern display device 42 displays an operation explanation image 423, an operation timing image 425, and a first operation request image 431. FIG. As in the first embodiment, when the player presses the second frame button 42 at the timing when the operation timing image 425 and the first operation request image 431 completely overlap, the timing of pressing the second frame button 42 and The movable timing of the distribution movable valve 409 matches. Similarly, the second frame button 42 is operated at the timing when the operation timing image 425 completely overlaps the operation request image for the second operation request image 432 to the fifth operation request image (not shown).

Next, the lower right game area 302c of the game board 30 during execution of the movable pattern suggestion effect during the reach effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 56 and 57. FIG. FIG. 56 is a diagram showing the lower right game area 302c of the game board 30 in which game balls are reserved. FIG. 57 is a diagram showing the lower right game area 302c of the game board 30 in which no game ball is reserved.

As shown in FIG. 57, a plurality of game balls may remain in the holding device 400 after the right-handed game state is finished. In the movable pattern suggestive effect performed during the ready-to-win effect in the left-handed game state after the end of the right-handed game state, the player presses the second frame button 21 in accordance with the suggested timing displayed together with the chorus of the song A or the song B. If you can hit well, as shown in FIGS. 40 to 43 referred to in Embodiment 1, the game ball discharged from the holding device 400 is put on the distribution movable valve 409 and won in the general winning opening 30b. can be done. That is, if the game ball remains in the holding device 400 after the end of the right-handed game state, the player actively performs the movable pattern suggestion performance in the predetermined ready-to-win performance in the left-handed game state after the end of the right-handed game state. By participating, it is possible to obtain a prize ball acquisition opportunity according to the number of game balls left in the holding device 400.例文帳に追加

Therefore, it is possible to obtain a predetermined game value corresponding to the number of game balls reserved during the right-handed game state during the left-handed game state after the right-handed game state ends. As a result, it is possible to increase the merit of holding the game ball in the holding device 400 during the right-handed game state, and to improve the interest of the game using the holding device 400. - 特許庁Further, when a predetermined ready-to-win effect is displayed in the left-handed game state after the end of the right-handed game state, the movable pattern suggestive effect is executed, and the number of game balls reserved in the reserve device 400 by the movable pattern suggestive effect. For a player who knows that there is a chance to acquire a predetermined game value according to the game state, the game is continued until a predetermined ready-to-win effect is established in the left-handed game state after the end of the right-handed game state. It is possible to motivate the player to continue playing the game.

Further, as shown in FIG. 57, when the game ball is not held in the holding device 400 after the end of the right-handed game state, a predetermined ready-to-win effect is displayed in the left-handed game state after the end of the right-handed game state. The movable pattern suggestion effect is not executed even when the As a result, it is possible to reduce discomfort given to the player by displaying the movable pattern suggestive effect in a state where the game ball is not held in the holding portion 403 .

When it is detected by the microswitch 418 that the game ball is held in the holding device 400, the third symbol display device 42 displays a display suggesting that the movable pattern suggestive effect may be executed. It is also possible to motivate the player to continue the game until a predetermined ready-to-win effect is established.

Note that the above-described variable display effect selection section (the function of executing the process of step S503 of the CPU 501 of the main control device 261) corresponds to the variable display effect selection means of the present invention. The first starting port 33b corresponds to the second starting ball entering means of the present invention, and the entering ball detection switch 31d corresponds to the second entering ball detection means. The function of the CPU 501 of the main control unit 261, which performs a lottery to determine whether or not to generate a big win state based on the detection of the ball entering the first starting port 33b, corresponds to the second lottery means of the present invention. The passage detection switch 34a corresponds to game ball passage detection means of the present invention. The function of the CPU 501 of the main control unit 261, which performs the lottery for the second symbol based on the detection of passing through the second starting port 34, corresponds to the third lottery means of the present invention. The microswitch 418 corresponds to the held ball detection means of the present invention.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, a lottery capable of determining whether or not to generate the right-handed advantage game state is performed based on the detection of game balls by the entering ball detection units 31a and 31b. A lottery part is provided, symbols are variably displayed in a mode according to the result of the lottery by the lottery part, and when the result of the lottery is a specific result, a right-handed game is performed as a right-handed advantageous game state. A game state more advantageous to the player than the normal game state occurs, and after the right-handed advantageous game state ends, the game state is switched to a left-handed game. The operation effect control unit controls to display the movable pattern suggestion effect on the third symbol display device 42 based on the establishment of a predetermined condition in the game state in which the left-handed game is performed after the end of the right-handed advantageous game state. do. Therefore, if the player performs a right-handed game during the right-handed advantageous game state, the game balls retained in the retaining device 400 remain after the game state is switched from the right-handed advantageous game state to the left-handed game. also actively participates in the moving pattern suggesting performance displayed on the third symbol display device 42 based on the establishment of a predetermined condition in the left-handed game state, and the first to fifth movable pattern suggesting performances are performed. If the second frame button 21 can be successfully operated in accordance with the timing at which the operation request images 431 to 435 are displayed, in addition to the benefits that the player can enjoy during the right-handed advantageous game state, the remaining in the holding device 400 A predetermined game value corresponding to the number of game balls can be obtained in a game state in which a left-handed game is performed after switching. As a result, it is possible to increase the merit of holding the game ball in the holding device 400 and improve the interest of the game using the holding device 400. - 特許庁

In addition, the jackpot game in which the jackpot game in which the variable winning device 32 changes between the open state and the closed state is executed a plurality of times is the right-handed advantageous state in which the game ball launched with the right hand hits the variable prize winning device 32. be. When a right-handed game is played aiming at the variable winning device 32, the game ball may be held in the holding device 400.例文帳に追加If the movable pattern suggestion effect is displayed in the game state of performing the left-handed game after the end of the jackpot game, the player may obtain a predetermined game value according to the number of reserved game balls. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the player's advantage by holding the game ball in the holding device 400 during the jackpot state.

In addition, after the end of the jackpot game in which the variable winning device 32 changes between the open state and the closed state, the high-probability game state in which the probability that the result of the lottery by the lottery unit will be the jackpot result is increased is the right-handed game. When the ball enters the first starting hole 33b, it is a right-handed advantageous state in which a lottery based on the detection of the entered ball by the entered ball detection unit 31b is performed with a high probability. When a right-handed game is performed aiming at the first starting port 31b, the game ball may be held in the holding device 400, and a movable pattern is suggested in a game state in which a left-handed game is performed after the end of the high probability game state. If the effect is displayed, the player may obtain a predetermined game value according to the number of reserved game balls. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the player's advantage by holding the game ball in the holding device 400 during the high-probability game state.

After the end of the jackpot game in which the variable prize winning device 32 changes between the open state and the closed state, the time-saving state in which the time for variable display of symbols is shortened is such that the game ball fired with the right hand hits the first start port 33b. This is an advantageous state for right-handed hitting, in which symbols are varied and displayed in accordance with the result of the lottery based on the detection of the entering ball by the entering ball detecting section 31b in a shortened time by entering the ball. When a right-handed game is played aiming at the first starting port 31b, the game ball may be held in the holding device 400, and a movable pattern suggestion effect is performed in a game state in which a left-handed game is performed after the time-saving state is finished. If displayed, the player may obtain a predetermined playing value depending on the number of game balls held. Therefore, it is possible to increase the merits of the player by holding the game balls in the holding device 400 during the time saving state.

In addition, it is provided at a position where a game ball fired during a right-handed game can enter, and changes between a closed state in which game balls are difficult to enter and an open state in which game balls are easier to enter than in the closed state. 1st starting port 33b, entering ball detection switch 31b for detecting a game ball entering the first starting port 33b, right-handed advantage game described above based on detection of game ball by entering ball detection switch 31b A second lottery part for performing a second lottery capable of determining whether to generate a state, a passage detection switch 34a for detecting the passage of a game ball launched during a right-handed game, and a game ball by the passage detection switch 34a. a third lottery unit that performs a third lottery to determine whether or not the first starting port 33b is to be opened based on the detection of . After the end of the jackpot game, when the result of the third lottery is the result of opening the first starting port 33b, the time is longer than the time during which the first starting port 33b is open in other game states. , The support game state in which the first starting port 33b is open is a game state in which the left-handed player cannot obtain the advantage, so the right-handed player is in an advantageous game state. When a right-handed game is played aiming at the passage detection switch 34a, the game ball may be held in the holding device 400. - 特許庁If the movable pattern suggestion effect is displayed in the left-handed game state after the end of the support game state, the player may obtain a predetermined game value according to the number of reserved game balls. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the player's advantage by holding the game ball in the holding device 400 during the support game state.

A variable display performance selecting part for selecting a predetermined variable display performance from among a plurality of patterns of variable display performances in which symbols are varied based on the lottery result in the lottery part is provided, and a left-handed shot after a right-handed advantageous game state is completed. In a game state in which a game is played, the variable display effect includes a predetermined ready-to-win effect performed by displaying symbols forming a part of a specific combination representing a specific result as a result of a lottery, and the display time of the ready-to-win effect is at least operated. When the display time of the performance is longer than the display time of the performance, execution of the movable pattern suggestion performance is displayed on the third symbol display device 42, so display of the ready-to-win performance in the game state in which the left-handed game is performed after the end of the right-handed advantageous game state. Time can be entertained by players.

Further, the predetermined ready-to-win effect included in the variable display effect selected in the game state in which the left-handed game is performed after the end of the right-handed advantageous game state has a predetermined degree of expectation indicating that the right-handed advantageous game state will be entered. In the case of a pattern that includes a high super reach effect as a constituent element rather than a normal reach effect that is height, since the movable pattern suggestion effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 42, the left after the end of the right-handed advantageous game state The player can be entertained by the display time of the ready-to-win performance including the specific expected performance in the game state of performing the beating game.

In addition, in the game state in which the left-handed game is performed after the end of the right-handed advantageous game state, the lottery result in the lottery part is the result of not being in the right-handed advantageous game state, and the variation display selected after the second specified result. When the performance includes the above-mentioned predetermined ready-to-win performance, the movable pattern suggestion performance is displayed on the third symbol display device 42, so the lottery is performed in the game state in which the left-handed game is performed after the end of the right-handed advantageous game state. If the lottery result in the part is a loss result that does not make it a right-handed advantageous game state, the opportunity to enter the game ball that was reserved during the previous advantageous game state into the winning opening is given after the loss result. By giving it during the ready-to-win performance, it is possible to reduce the disappointment that the outcome is not an advantageous game state.

The ready-to-win effect includes, as constituent elements, an expected effect in which the degree of expectation that suggests the advantageous gaming state is at a predetermined level, and the expectation degree that suggests the advantageous gaming state is the expected effect. At least including a pattern that includes a specific expected performance higher than
The predetermined condition is a second specified result in which the lottery result of the lottery means is not the advantageous game state in the game state in which the left-handed game is performed after the advantageous game state ends, and the second specified condition. A gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined ready-to-win effect leading to a result is a pattern including the specific expected effect.

The ready-to-win effect is composed of a pattern that includes a ready-to-win effect with a predetermined level of expectation that suggests a right-handed advantageous gaming state, and an expectation that suggests a right-handed advantageous gaming state, as described above. At least a pattern including a super ready-to-win performance higher than the ready-to-win performance as a constituent element, and in a game state in which a left-handed game is performed after the end of the right-handed advantageous game state, the lottery result in the lottery part is a right-handed advantageous game state. In the case where the result is a failure result and the predetermined ready-to-win effect leading to the failure result is a pattern including a super ready-to-win effect, the third symbol display device 42 displays a moving pattern suggestion effect. As a result, even though the lottery result in the lottery section performed after the end of the right-handed advantageous game state includes the highly anticipated super ready-to-win effect, if the result is not the right-handed advantageous game state. gives an opportunity during a predetermined ready-to-win effect to make a game ball reserved during a right-handed advantageous game state win a prize in a general prize-winning hole 31b, even though a variable display effect including a super ready-to-win effect is executed. It is possible to reduce the disappointment of having a specific result that is not an advantageous game state.

In addition, the variable display effect includes a pattern including a normal reach effect in which the expectation level that suggests a special game state is a predetermined height as a component, and an expectation level that suggests a special game state is higher than the expected effect. At least a pattern including a high super reach performance as a component, and the movable pattern suggestive performance is that the lottery result in the lottery part is a display result of being out of super reach, and the variable display performance leading to the display result is super. In the case of the pattern including the ready-to-win effect, it is executed during the super ready-to-win effect performed after the display result. As a result, when the result of the lottery performed by the lottery section performed after the end of the big win state is a super ready-to-win display result that does not result in a big win state even though the highly anticipated super ready-to-win effect is included, By giving an opportunity during the variable display presentation to make the game ball reserved during the previous jackpot state win a prize in the general prize winning port 31b, the super ready-to-win state is not set to a special game state even though the super ready-to-win presentation is executed. It is possible to reduce the disappointment of the display result.

In addition, a reserved ball detection unit 418 for detecting a game ball reserved in the reserve device 400 is provided, and the operation effect control unit detects a game that is reserved in the reserve device 400 by the reserve ball detection unit 418 when a predetermined condition is established. Based on the fact that it is determined that there is a ball, a movable pattern suggestion performance is displayed on the third pattern display device 42.例文帳に追加As a result, even though there are no game balls held in the holding device 400, it is possible to reduce the player's discomfort caused by the execution of the movable pattern suggestion effect.

In the first and second embodiments, the game ball is held in the holding device 400 during the right-handed game state such as during the big win state or during the variable probability state after the end of the big win state, and the movable pattern suggestion effect is executed during the right-handed game state. However, in this embodiment, the game ball may be held in the holding device 400 during the normal game state, and the movable pattern suggestive effect may be executed during the specific variable display of the normal game state. A configuration for facilitating the holding of game balls in the holding device 400 during the normal game state will be described with reference to FIG. Note that FIG. 58 is a front view showing the configuration of the game board attached to the inner frame in the third embodiment.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 58, the game board 30 is configured such that the game balls flowing down the lower right game area 30a3 are easily held by the holding device 400. FIG. Specifically, a plurality of guide nails 39 are provided so as to facilitate guiding the game balls flowing down the left side of the first starting port 33b in the front view of the game board 30 toward the retaining portion 403 of the retaining device 400. are arranged. Therefore, in Examples 1 and 2, 5 game balls were held when the game balls were continuously shot for 75 seconds in the right-handed game, but in this embodiment, the game balls were shot for 60 seconds in the right-handed game. If it continues, 5 game balls are reserved.

The sorting movable valve 409 performs the sorting operation using the movable pattern A and the movable pattern B as in the first and second embodiments. Also, the movable pattern suggestive effect is performed using the chorus of the song A or the song B, as in the first and second embodiments. However, in this embodiment, the song A or song B is started from the start of the ready-to-win effect. Also, song A or song B is 60 seconds after the start of the song, that is, 60 seconds after the start of the ready-to-win effect (this timing is also the timing at which the five game balls described above are expected to be suspended). shall be reached. Therefore, in this embodiment, by aligning the start timing of the music A or the music B with the start timing of the movable pattern A or the movable pattern B, the suggested timing in the movable pattern suggestion rendering can be changed to the movable timing of the movable pattern A or the movable pattern B. can be adjusted to

The movable pattern suggestion effect executed by the operation effect control section of the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 of the present embodiment during a specific variable display in the normal game state will be described with reference to FIGS. 59 and 60. FIG. FIG. 59 is a flow chart showing the music start timing adjustment process during the ready-to-win effect in the normal game state by the sub-control device 262 . FIG. 60 is a table for determining the start timing of the music used for the ready-to-win effect and the music used for the ready-to-win effect. Other processing by the sub-controller 262 is the same as in the second embodiment.

(Music start timing adjustment process during ready-to-win effect in normal game state)
As shown in FIG. 59 , in step S 2001 , the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not the game ball is held in the holding section 403 of the holding device 400 . Specifically, if the game ball is detected to be on hold by the microswitch 418 (see FIG. 57), the process proceeds to step S2002. finish.

In step S2002, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 analyzes the content of the variation pattern designation command, and determines whether or not the ready-to-win effect is the super ready-to-win effect when the variable display effect includes the ready-to-win effect. . If the ready-to-win effect is super ready-to-win, the process proceeds to step S2003; As in the second embodiment, the ready-to-win effect other than the super ready-to-win effect is sufficient as long as the ready-to-reach effect can ensure sufficient time for executing the start of the movable pattern suggesting effect.

In step S2003, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 acquires the time (delay time) from the start time of one movable cycle of the distribution movable valve 409 to the reception time of the variation pattern designation command, and stores it in the RAM 553. Store in area v. This is because the time when the sub-control device 262 receives the variation pattern specification command can be regarded as the time when the variation display effect is started. In step S2004, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 analyzes the received variation pattern designation command and stores the time from the start of variation to the start of reach effect in the storage area w of the RAM 553.

In step S2005, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 stores the total time obtained by adding the delay time stored in the storage area v and the time from the start of variation to the start of the ready-to-win effect stored in the storage area w, in the RAM 553. Store in area x. The total time stored in the storage area x corresponds to the time from the start time of one cycle of the movable cycle of the sorting movable valve 409 to the start of the ready-to-win effect.

In step S2006, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not the total time stored in the storage area x is longer than 15 seconds, which corresponds to half the period of movement of the distribution movable valve 409. If the total time is less than 15 seconds, the process proceeds to step S2016.

In step S<b>2007 , it is determined whether or not the total time stored in the storage area x matches 30 seconds, which corresponds to one operation cycle of the sorting movable valve 409 . If the total time is equal to 30 seconds, proceed to step S2008; otherwise, proceed to step S2010.

In step S2008, 15 seconds corresponding to a half period of the movable period of the sorting movable valve 409 is stored in the storage area y as an adjustment time for performing an adjustment effect for adjusting the start timing of the music in the ready-to-win effect. In step S2009, after performing the adjustment effect for 15 seconds stored in the storage area y from the start of the ready-to-win effect, music B in the super ready-to-win effect is started. The adjustment effect is a right-handed notification effect that notifies the player that a right-handed game will be played during the ready-to-win effect. The right hitting notification effect is, for example, an effect of displaying an image such as "Please aim right" on the display screen of the third symbol display device 42. FIG. Incidentally, 60 seconds after the start of the music piece B, the movable pattern suggestive effect is started.

In step S2010, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 proceeds to step S2011 if the total time stored in the storage area x is greater than 15 seconds and less than 30 seconds, otherwise proceeds to step S2013.

In step S2011, the time obtained by subtracting the total time stored in the storage area x from 30 seconds, which corresponds to one period of movement of the diverting movable valve 409, is stored in the storage area y. In step S2012, after the time stored in the storage area y from the start of the ready-to-win effect, the right-handed informing effect as the adjustment effect is performed, and then the song A in the super ready-to-win effect is started. Incidentally, 60 seconds after the start of the music piece A, the movable pattern suggestive effect is started.

In step S2013, if the total time stored in the storage area x is greater than 30 seconds, which corresponds to one cycle of the movement of the sorting movable valve 409, the process proceeds to step S2014. In step S2014, the following calculation is performed and stored in storage area y.
y = 15 seconds - (total time stored in storage area x - 30 seconds)
It should be noted that 15 seconds is a time corresponding to a half cycle of the movable cycle, and 30 seconds is a time corresponding to one cycle of the movable cycle.

In step S2015, after the time stored in the storage area y from the start of the ready-to-win effect, the right-handed informing effect as the adjustment effect is performed, and then the song B in the super ready-to-win effect is started. Incidentally, 60 seconds after the start of the music piece B, the movable pattern suggestive effect is started.

In step S2016, the CPU 551 of the sub-controller 262 determines whether or not the total time stored in the storage area x is equal to 15 seconds, which corresponds to half the period of movement of the diverting movable valve 409. If the total time is equal to 15 seconds, go to step S2017; if the total time is less than 15 seconds, go to step S2019.

In step S2017, 15 seconds corresponding to the half period of the movable period of the distribution movable valve 409 is stored in the storage area y as the adjustment time for performing the right-handed informing effect as the adjustment effect. In step S2018, after performing the adjustment effect for 15 seconds stored in the storage area y from the start of the ready-to-win effect, music A in the super ready-to-win effect is started.

In step S2019, the time obtained by subtracting the total time stored in the storage area x from 15 seconds, which corresponds to the half period of the movable period of the diverting movable valve 409, is stored in the storage area y. In step S2020, after the time stored in the storage area y from the start of the ready-to-win effect, the right-handed informing effect is performed as the adjustment effect, and then the song B in the super ready-to-win effect is started. Incidentally, 60 seconds after the start of the music piece B, the movable pattern suggestive effect is started.

The process of adjusting the start timing of song A or song B used in the ready-to-win effect as described above may be performed using a table stored in the ROM 551 of the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 as shown in FIG. .

Thus, even if the ready-to-win effect cannot be started in accordance with the start timing of the movable patterns A and B, the start timing of the song A or the song B can be delayed by a predetermined adjustment time. The start timing can be matched with the start timing of the movable pattern A or the movable pattern B, and the suggested timing in the movable pattern suggestion performance can be matched with the movable timing of the movable pattern A or the movable pattern B. As a result, it is possible to execute a movable pattern suggestive effect in which the rhythm of the chorus portion of the song A or the song B is matched with the movable timing of the sorting movable valve 409 . In the following, an example of this movable pattern suggestion effect will be described.

Next, the relationship between the movable timing of the distribution movable valve 409 during the ready-to-win effect in the normal game state and the suggestive timing of the movable pattern suggestive effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 61 is a timing chart of an example of movable pattern suggestive effect showing the relationship between the movable timing of the distribution movable valve 409 during the reach effect in the normal game state and the suggestive timing of the movable pattern suggestive effect.

(Example of movable pattern suggestion effect performed during reach effect in normal game state)
As shown in FIG. 61, the sorting movable valve 409 is driven at a constant cycle with the same constant movable pattern as in the first and second embodiments. Here, in the normal game state, variable display is started, this variable pattern command is a super ready-to-win effect (lottery results may be win or lose), and the ready-to-win effect time is 120 seconds.

At this time, the variable display is started at the same timing as the movable timing t10 (22 seconds after the start of the movable cycle), and after the variable display is performed for 5 seconds from the start of the fluctuation to the start of the ready-to-win effect, a little longer than the movable timing t11. The ready-to-win effect is started at a delayed timing (27 seconds after the start of the movable cycle). That is, the delay time v of the start of the fluctuation is 22 seconds, the time w from the start of the fluctuation to the start of the ready-to-win production is 5 seconds, and the time x obtained by adding the time v and the time w is 27 seconds, so the adjustment production The time y for performing is 3 seconds, and the music in the reach effect and the movable pattern suggestion effect is music A (see also FIG. 60).

Therefore, for three seconds from the start of the ready-to-win effect, a right-handed informing effect is performed as an adjustment effect. The right-handed informing effect is displayed as a still image or a moving image, but in order to reduce the amount of memory used in the adjustment effect, it is displayed as an image with less information than the movable pattern suggesting effect. Music A in the ready-to-win effect is started simultaneously with the end timing of the right-handed informing effect. Since the end timing of the right-handed informing effect coincides with the start timing of the movable pattern A, the song A in the ready-to-win effect is started simultaneously with the start of the movable pattern A. As a result, the rhythm of the chorus of the song A 60 seconds after the start of the song A can be matched with the movable timings t2 to t6 of the movable pattern A. FIG. As a result, in the movable pattern suggestive effect, the movable timings t2 to t6 constituting the movable pattern A and the timings for displaying the operation request image in accordance with the rhythm of the chorus of the music A, that is, the suggestive timings st1 to st5 are matched. can be done.

As a result, the player can place the five game balls held in the holding device 400 on the sorting movable valve 409 by operating the second frame button 21 in accordance with the suggested timings st1 to st5. , making it easier to enter the ball into the general winning hole 31b. As a result, a maximum of 75 prize balls can be obtained during the ready-to-win effect.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, the holding device 400 holds a game ball launched in a right-handed game at least in a non-special game state (normal game state) which is not a special game state. It changes to a possible holding state and a release state in which the holding of the game ball is released. The operation effect control unit of the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 displays the movable pattern suggestion effect as the third symbol during the normal game state and during the specific variable display (for example, super ready-to-win effect) according to the result of the lottery. It controls to display on the device 42 . Therefore, if the player shoots the game balls with a right-hand hit during the super ready-to-win effect in the normal game state, some of the game balls that have been shot are held in the holding device 400. An opportunity to reserve the game ball in the reserve device 400 can be ensured during the ready-to-win performance. The player operates the second frame button 21 at the timing when the operation request is displayed in the movable pattern suggestive effect displayed on the third pattern display device 42 during the super ready-to-win effect, thereby distributing the movable valve. The holding device 400 can be changed from the holding state to the released state in accordance with the timing at which the holding device 409 comes to the second position (protruding position). As a result, game balls ejected from the holding device 400 at the timing when the operation request is displayed easily enter the general winning opening 31b via the sorting movable valve 409 which comes to the second position. On the other hand, even if the second frame button 21 is operated by the player at a timing other than the timing at which the operation request is displayed, the timing at which the suspension device 400 changes from the suspension state to the release state is the second timing. Since it does not match the timing to come to the position, it becomes difficult to win a prize in the general prize winning opening 31b. Therefore, if the player performs a right-handed game during the super ready-to-win performance, the player actively participates in the movable pattern suggestive performance displayed on the third symbol display device 42 during the super ready-to-win performance, and the movable pattern suggestive performance is in progress. If the second frame button 21 can be successfully operated in accordance with the timing at which the operation request is displayed, a predetermined game value corresponding to the number of game balls held in the holding device 400 can be obtained during the normal game state. can be done. As a result, it is possible to increase the merit of holding the game ball in the holding device 400 and improve the interest of the game using the holding device 400. - 特許庁

By having the player participate in the game using the holding device 400 performed during the super ready-to-win performance, it is possible to reduce the player's boredom with the ready-to-win performance with a long fluctuation time such as the super ready-to-win performance.

In addition, the operation effect control section of the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 notifies the player that a right-handed game will be performed during the super reach effect, and suggests a movable pattern during the super reach effect after the right hit notification. The effect is displayed on the third pattern display device 42. - 特許庁As a result, the movable pattern suggestion effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 42 after the operation effect control section performs right-handed hitting notification during the super ready-win effect, so that the player can hold the device during the super ready-win effect. It is possible to reduce the missed opportunity to reserve the game ball at 400.例文帳に追加

In this embodiment, instead of eliminating the game part having the opening and closing door 32b used as the variable winning device 32 in Examples 1 to 3 and the game part used as the second start port 34, The game part used as the first starting port 33b is used as the variable winning device 32. FIG. The configuration of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 62 is a front view showing the configuration of the game board 30 of Example 4 attached to the inner frame 12. FIG.

In this embodiment, the lottery for determining whether or not to generate the big win state is performed based on the detection of the ball entering the first starting port 33a. When the result of the lottery based on the detection of the ball entering the first starting port 33a is the result of generating a big win state, the opening and closing member 33c that opens and closes the first starting port 33b in Examples 1 to 3 is It functions as a door member 32b (called an opening/closing member 33d in this embodiment) that opens and closes the big winning opening 32a of the variable winning device 32 in the first to third embodiments.

Since the opening/closing member 33d of the variable winning device 32 is closed during the normal game state, the game ball fired in the right-handed game rolls on the opening/closing member 33d and is downstream of the opening/closing member 33d (game Left end of the board 30 in front view). The ejected game ball may be guided to the retaining device 400 side while being rolled by a nail or the like disposed between the variable winning device 32 and the retaining device 400, or may be guided to the retaining device 400 side. sometimes not. The rate at which game balls rolled by nails or the like are guided to the retaining device 400 is assumed to be about the same as in the first to third embodiments.

During the jackpot state, the opening/closing member 33d of the variable prize winning device 32 changes between the open state and the closed state, so during the opening of the opening/closing member 33d, even a game ball shot in a right-handed game is held by the holding device 400. Although not guided, while the opening/closing member 33d is closed, a game ball shot in a right-handed game may roll on the opening/closing member 33d and be guided to the holding device 400. However, since the time in the closed state during the jackpot state is sufficiently shorter than the time in the open state, the game balls shot in the right-handed game during the jackpot state are more likely to be shot in the holding device 400 than during the normal game state. It is difficult to be induced to

In this way, the game board 30 is configured such that the game ball launched in the right-handed game is more likely to be held by the holding device 400 in the normal game state than in the jackpot state. As a result, when the right-handed notification effect as described in the third embodiment is executed during the super ready-to-win performance as a specific variable display in the normal game state, the player is more likely to play the right-handed game than in the jackpot state. Aiming at the holding device 400 where the shot game ball is likely to be held, the right-handed game is positively played. As a result, the intention of the player to participate in the game using the holding device 400 can be enhanced.

In addition, since the game ball shot in the right-handed game in the normal game state rolls on the opening and closing member 33d which is always closed in the normal game state and is surely guided to the holding device 400 side, the nail adjustment is performed. A game ball shot in a right-handed game in a normal game state can be guided to the holding device 400 side more reliably than the case of guiding to the holding device 400 side only by the ball.

The opening/closing member 33d described above corresponds to the guiding member of the present invention.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, the game board 30 is more likely to hold the game ball fired in the right-handed game in the holding device 400 in the normal game state than in the jackpot state. It is configured. As a result, the game ball shot in the right-handed game is more likely to be held in the holding device 400 in the normal game state than in the jackpot state due to the configuration of the game board 30, so that in the normal game state, the game ball is displayed as a specific variation display. A player can be made to actively play a right-handed game during the super reach performance.

In addition, the game board 30 is provided with, for example, the opening/closing member 33d of the variable winning device 32 as a guide member for guiding the game ball launched in the right-handed game to the holding device 400 in the normal game state. As a result, the game ball launched in the right-handed game in the normal game state is guided to the holding device 400 side by the opening/closing member 33d of the variable prize winning device 32 provided on the game board 30, so that the holding device 400 can be secured only by adjusting the nail. The game ball fired in the right-handed game in the normal game state can be guided to the holding device 400 side more reliably than the case of guiding to the side.

In this embodiment, instead of eliminating the game parts used as the first starting port 33b and the game parts used as the second starting port 34 in Examples 1 to 3, the first Only the game part (called an opening/closing member 33e in this embodiment) used as an opening/closing member 33c for opening/closing the starting port 33b is left. The configuration of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 63 is a front view showing the configuration of the game board 30 of Example 5 attached to the inner frame 12. FIG.

In this embodiment, the lottery for determining whether or not to generate the big win state is performed based on the detection of the ball entering the first starting port 33a. When the variation display based on the lottery result based on the detection of the entering ball at the first starting port 33a includes a specific variation display, the opening/closing member 33e is moved to the front side of the lower right game area 30a3 during the specific variation display. The action of projecting to the right side and the action of retreating to the back side of the lower right game area 30a3 are repeated. A specific variable display is, for example, a super reach performance as described in the third embodiment. Further, the opening/closing member 33e is configured so as not to perform the projecting and retracting operations when the variation display based on the result of the lottery based on the detection of the incoming ball at the first starting port 33a does not include a specific variation display. ing. Note that the opening/closing member 33e may be configured to continue to protrude while a specific variable display is displayed.

During the super reach performance as a specific variable display, the opening and closing member 33e repeats the projection and retraction actions, so the game ball fired in the right-handed game is the opening and closing member that projects to the front side of the lower right game area 30a3. 33e and is discharged from the downstream side of the opening/closing member 33e. The ejected game ball may be guided to the retaining device 400 side while being rolled by a nail or the like disposed between the opening/closing member 33e and the retaining device 400, or may not be guided to the retaining device 400 side. In some cases. The rate at which game balls rolled by nails or the like are guided to the retaining device 400 is assumed to be about the same as in the first to third embodiments.

During the ready-to-win effect different from the super ready-to-win effect or during the variable display of the non-reach, the opening/closing member 33e does not perform the projecting action and remains retracted on the back side of the lower right game area 30a3, so that the right-hand hitting game is performed. Even the shot game ball is not guided to the holding device 400.例文帳に追加

In this way, the game board 30 keeps the game ball fired in the right-handed game in the holding device 400 during the super reach effect rather than during the reach effect different from the super reach effect or during the variable display of the non-reach effect. It is configured to be easily retained on the side. As a result, during the super ready-to-win effect, when the right hitting notification effect as described in the third embodiment is executed, the player can make a right hit effect during the ready-to-win effect different from the super ready-to-win effect or during the non-reach variable display. A game ball shot in a hitting game is aimed at a holding device 400 that is likely to be held, and a right-handed game is positively played. As a result, it is possible to increase the intention of the player to participate in the game using the holding device 400 during the super ready-to-win effect.

In addition, the game ball launched in the right-handed game during the super reach production rolls on the opening and closing member 33e while the opening and closing member 33e protrudes to the front side of the lower right game area 30a3, and the holding device 400 Since it is surely guided to the side, it is possible to guide the game ball fired in the right-handed game to the holding device 400 side more surely than the case where it is guided to the holding device 400 side only by nail adjustment. can.

The opening/closing member 33e described above corresponds to the guiding member of the present invention.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, the game board 30 is more suitable during the super reach effect than during the reach effect different from the super reach effect or during the non-reach variable display. A game ball shot in a hitting game is easily held on the holding device 400 side. As a result, the game ball shot in the right-handed game is more likely to be held on the holding device 400 side during the super ready-to-win performance than during the ready-to-win performance, which is different from the super ready-to-win performance, due to the configuration of the game board 30. Although it is the original game that the player performs the right-handed game during the super reach performance in the normal game state, the original game that the player performs the right-handed game during the other reach performance in the normal game state It is possible to reduce the occurrence of a game outside the game.

In addition, the game board 30 is provided with an opening/closing member 33e as a guiding member for guiding the game ball launched in the right-handed game to the holding device during the super reach performance. As a result, the game ball shot in the right-handed game during the super reach performance is guided to the holding device 400 side by the opening/closing member 33e provided on the game board 30, and is guided to the holding device 400 side by nail adjustment. A game ball shot in a right-handed game can be guided to the holding device 400 side more reliably than in the case of a super ready-to-win performance.

In Embodiments 1 to 5 described above, the timing at which the display of the movable pattern suggestive effect is started is after a predetermined time has elapsed from a certain timing, but the movable pattern suggestive effect can be any time from a certain timing. It does not matter if it has passed. For example, when the number of game balls held in the holding device 400 reaches a predetermined number, the movable pattern suggesting effect may be executed.

Below, a configuration necessary for a gaming machine that executes a movable pattern suggestion effect based on detection of a full tank of game balls held in the holding device 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 and 65. FIG. 64 is a front view showing the configuration of the game board 30 of Example 6 attached to the inner frame 12. FIG. FIG. 65 is an enlarged view of the lower right game area 30a3 on the game board 30 of Example 6. FIG. Note that FIG. 65 shows a state in which the decorative plate 413 is removed from the holding device 400, as in FIG. 4 of the first embodiment.

As shown in FIGS. 64 and 65, the holding device 400 is provided with a holding ball detection switch 437 as game ball detection means on the upstream side of the holding portion 403, and a game ball detection switch 437 as game ball detection means on the downstream side. A held ball detection switch 438 is provided. As a result, the game balls guided to the holding device 400 enter the holding device 400 through the through hole of the holding ball detection switch 437 and are stored in the holding portion 403 up to five balls at maximum. , the ball is discharged from the holding portion 403 and discharged out of the holding device 400 through the through-hole of the holding ball detection switch 437 . When the game ball discharged out of the holding device 400 rides on the sorting movable valve 409 projecting from the lower part of the holding device 400, it is guided to the general winning opening 31b and enters the general winning opening 31b.

A decorative plate 413 covering the front surface of the retaining device 400 is provided with two movable decorative pieces 415 . One movable decorative piece 415 is arranged in front of the discharge check valve 405 , and the other movable decorative piece 415 is arranged in front of the sorting movable valve 409 . The two movable decorative pieces 415 operate at timings that are not triggered by the distribution operations of the movable decorative piece 415 and the distribution movable valve 409, respectively. This makes it difficult to press the second frame button 21 in time with the timing of the sorting operation of the sorting movable valve 409 .

The CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 adds 1 to the number of game balls stored in the storage area of the RAM 553 based on the detection of the game ball passing by the held ball detection switch 437, and the game ball passing by the held ball detection switch 438 1 is subtracted from the number of game balls stored in the storage area of the RAM 553 based on the detection of . Thus, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 has a counting function of counting the number of game balls held in the holding device 400 .

The CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 compares the number of game balls stored in the storage area of the RAM 553 with the number of game balls (for example, 5 balls when the tank is full) stored in advance in the storage area of the ROM 552. It also has a function of determining whether or not the number of game balls held in the holding device 400 has reached a predetermined number (for example, 5 balls when the tank is full). That is, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 has a full-tank determination unit that determines whether or not the number of game balls held in the holding device 400 has reached the full tank.

In this embodiment, during a specific variable display in the normal game state (for example, during the super reach effect), the game balls held in the holding device 400 are full (5 balls held) Based on that, the movable pattern Execute the suggestive action.

There are various timings when the game balls held in the holding device 400 become full. Therefore, in this embodiment, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 waits until the game balls held in the holding device 400 are full, and the image of a song different from the song A or the song B (hereinafter referred to as song C) is displayed. Then, music is played, and in accordance with the timing when the game balls held in the holding device 400 are full, the image and music of the chorus part of the music A or the music B constituting the moving pattern suggestive performance are switched.

The movable pattern suggestion effect executed during the ready-to-win effect in the normal game state performed by the sub-control device 262 will be described with reference to FIGS. 66 to 73. FIG. FIG. 66 is a flow chart showing the variable display mode setting process by the sub-controller 262. As shown in FIG. FIG. 67 is a flow chart showing the lower limit start time setting process during the ready-to-win effect by the sub control device 262 . FIG. 68 is a flow chart showing a movable pattern suggestive rendering process based on full tank detection performed by the sub-controller 262 . FIG. 69 is a flow chart showing the movable pattern suggestion effect processing by the lower limit start time, which is performed by the sub-controller 262 . FIG. 70 is a flow chart showing music switching timing adjustment processing based on full tank detection performed by the sub-controller 262 . FIG. 71 is a flow chart showing music switching timing adjustment processing based on the lower limit start time performed by the sub-controller 262 . FIG. 72 is a table for determining the adjustment effect time and the music during the movable pattern suggestion effect process. FIG. 73 is a table for determining the lower limit start time and the music during the movable pattern suggestive rendering process.

(Variable display mode setting process)
The variable display mode setting process of this embodiment differs from the variable display mode setting process described in the second embodiment with reference to FIG. explain.

As shown in FIG. 66, in step S2102, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 performs start music determination processing for determining the music played first in the ready-to-win effect, and proceeds to step S2103. When the variation pattern specifying command indicates the super ready-to-win effect, the music C is determined as the music at the start of the super ready-to-win effect. For other ready-to-win effects, music is determined according to the type of ready-to-win effect.

In step S2103, a lower limit start time setting process for setting the lower limit start time of the movable pattern suggestion effect in the ready-to-win effect is performed. The lower limit start time setting process during the ready-to-win effect will be described below.

(Lower limit start time setting process during reach production)
As shown in FIG. 67, in step S2301, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines the time (delay time) from the start time of one movable cycle of the distribution movable valve 409 to the reception time of the variation pattern designation command. is acquired and stored in the storage area v of the RAM 553 . In step S2302, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 analyzes the received variation pattern designation command and stores the time from the start of variation to the start of reach effect in the storage area w of the RAM 553.

In step S2302A, the received variation pattern specification command is analyzed, and the ready-to-win effect time from the start to the end of the ready-to-win effect is stored in the storage area z of the RAM553. In step S2303, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 stores the total time obtained by adding the delay time stored in the storage area v and the time from the fluctuation start to the ready-to-win effect start stored in the storage area w, in the RAM 553. Store in area x.

In step S2304, the CPU 551 of the sub-controller 262 determines whether or not the total time stored in the storage area x is longer than 15 seconds, which corresponds to the half period of the operation period of the distribution movable valve 409. If the total time is greater than 15 seconds, go to step S2305; if the total time is less than 15 seconds, go to step S2314.

In step S 2305 , it is determined whether or not the total time stored in the storage area x matches 30 seconds, which corresponds to one period of movement of the sorting movable valve 409 . If the total time is equal to 30 seconds, proceed to step S2306; otherwise, proceed to step S2308.

In step S2306, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 subtracts 15 seconds for executing the movable pattern suggestive effect from the ready-to-win effect time stored in the storage area z, and sets the time to the latest start of the movable pattern suggestive effect. It is stored in the storage area y of the RAM 553 as the time (lower limit start time). In step S2307, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets the lower limit start time flag 1 indicating the lower limit start time.

In step S2308, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not the time stored in the storage area x is within a range of greater than 15 seconds and less than 30 seconds. If the determination result is within the range, the process proceeds to step S2309, and if the determination result is not within the range, the process proceeds to step S2311.

In step S2309, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets the time obtained by subtracting the time stored in the storage area x from the ready-to-win effect time stored in the storage area z as the lower limit start time of the movable pattern suggestive effect in the storage area of the RAM 5543. Store in y. At step S2310, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets the lower limit start time flag 2 indicating the lower limit start time.

In step S2311, the CPU 551 of the sub-controller 262 determines whether or not the time stored in the storage area x is longer than 30 seconds. If the determination result is longer than 30 seconds, the process proceeds to step S2312.

In step S2312, from the ready-to-win effect time stored in the storage area z, the time (x-30) exceeding 30 seconds out of the time stored in the storage area x and 15 seconds for executing the movable pattern suggestion effect. is stored in the storage area y of the RAM 553 as the lower limit start time of the movable pattern suggestion effect. In step S2313, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets the lower limit start time flag 3 indicating the lower limit start time.

In step S2314, the CPU 551 of the sub-controller 262 determines whether the time stored in the storage area x is equal to 15 seconds. If the determination result is equal to 15 seconds, the process proceeds to step S2315, and if the determination result is not equal to 15 seconds, the process proceeds to step S2317.

In step S2315, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 subtracts 15 seconds for executing the movable pattern suggestive effect from the ready-to-win effect time stored in the storage area z as the lower limit start time of the movable pattern suggestive effect. It is stored in storage area y of RAM 553 . At step S2316, a lower limit start time flag 4 indicating the lower limit start time is set.

In step S2317, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 subtracts the time stored in the storage area x and 15 seconds from the ready-to-win effect time stored in the storage area z, and subtracts 15 seconds from the time stored in the storage area x. It is stored in storage area y of RAM 553 as time. In step S2318, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets the lower limit start time flag 5 indicating the lower limit start time.

Returning to the description of FIG. After the lower limit start time setting process ends in step S2103, in step S2104, a display command for displaying the ready-to-win effect image accompanying the music determined in step S2102 is set, and this process ends.

In step S2105, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not the game balls held in the holding device 400 are full (full tank detection). If the determination result is full, the process proceeds to step S2106, and if the determination result is not full, the process proceeds to step S2108. In step S2106, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 performs a movable pattern suggestive rendering process based on full tank detection.

(Movable pattern suggestion effect processing by full tank detection)
Here, the movable pattern suggestive effect processing based on full tank detection will be described with reference to FIG. In step S2107A, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 performs music switching timing adjustment processing based on full tank detection, which will be described later, and proceeds to step S2107B. In step S2107B, a display command is set to display the moving pattern suggestive effect accompanying the music switched in step S2107A, and the process proceeds to step S2107C.

In step S2107C, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not the movable pattern suggestion rendering has ended. Such a determination is made by the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 by turning on the moving pattern suggestive effect execution flag at the start of the movable pattern suggestive effect, and turning off the flag at the end of the movable pattern suggestive effect. It is realized by being If the movable pattern suggestive effect is completed, the process proceeds to step S2107D, and if the movable pattern suggestive effect is not completed, this processing ends. In step S2107D, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 returns the music used in the movable pattern suggestion effect to the music C at the start of the super ready-to-win effect, and ends this processing.

Returning the description to FIG. In step S2108, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the elapsed time of the ready-to-win effect has reached the lower limit start time. If the determination result is the lower limit start time, the process proceeds to step S2109, and if the determination result is not the lower limit start time, the process proceeds to step S2111. That is, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 has a lower limit start time determination unit that determines whether or not the elapsed time of the ready-to-win effect has reached the lower limit start time.

In step S2109, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 performs a movable pattern suggestion effect process based on the lower limit start time for performing the movable pattern suggestion effect when the lower limit start time is reached.

(Movable Pattern Suggestion Production Processing Based on Lower Limit Start Time)
Here, the movable pattern suggestion rendering process based on the lower limit start time will be described with reference to FIG. In step S2110A, music switching processing is performed based on the lower limit start time, which will be described later, and the process proceeds to step S2110B. In step S2110B, a display command is set for displaying the movable pattern suggestive effect accompanying the music switched in step S2110A, and the process proceeds to step S2110C.

In step S2110C, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not the movable pattern suggestion rendering has ended. Such determination is as described above with reference to step S2107C shown in FIG. If the movable pattern suggestive effect is completed, the process proceeds to step S2110D, and if the movable pattern suggestive effect is not completed, this processing ends. In step S2110D, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 returns the music used in the movable pattern suggestion effect by the lower limit start time to the music C at the start of the super ready-to-win effect, and ends this process.

(Music switching timing adjustment processing based on full tank detection)
The song switching timing adjustment processing based on the full tank detection in step S2107A will be described.

As shown in FIG. 70, in step S2401, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines that the number of game balls held in the holding device 400 has reached the full tank from the start time of one cycle of the movable cycle of the sorting movable valve 409. The time (delay time) at which it is detected is acquired and stored in the storage area a of the RAM 553 . In step S2402, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 stores the time (number of seconds) of one cycle of the movable cycle in the storage area b of the RAM 553. FIG. In step S2403, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 causes the storage area c of the RAM 553 to store the time obtained by subtracting the delay time stored in the storage area a from the movable period time stored in the storage area b.

In step S2404, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not the time stored in the storage area c is 0 seconds. If the determination result is 0 seconds, the process proceeds to step S2405, and if the determination result is not 0, the process proceeds to step S2407. Here, in the third pattern display device 42, an adjustment effect congratulating the filling of the holding device 400 (hereinafter referred to as "congratulations on full tank") is displayed between the time when the full tank is detected and the time when the movable pattern suggestive effect is started. performance) is displayed. There are 15 types of full-tank congratulations effects from 1 second to 15 seconds, and the length of the effect is determined according to the timing of full-tank detection. The congratulations on filling the tank effect is displayed as a still image or a moving image, but in order to reduce the amount of memory used in the adjustment effect, it is displayed as an image with a smaller amount of information than the movable pattern suggestion effect.

In step S2405, 15 seconds is stored in the storage area d of the RAM 553 as an adjustment time for executing the 15-second full-tank congratulations effect. In step S2406, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 executes the full-tank congratulations effect for the adjustment time (15 seconds) stored in the storage area d, then switches the song C to the chorus of the song B, and suggests a movement pattern. start the performance.

In step S2407, the CPU 551 of the sub-controller 262 determines whether the time stored in the storage area c is shorter than 15 seconds. If the determination result is less than 15 seconds, the process proceeds to step S2408, and if the determination result is greater than 15 seconds, the process proceeds to step S2410. In step S2408, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 stores the time stored in the storage area c in the storage area d of the RAM 553 as an adjustment time for executing the congratulations on filling up the tank effect. In step S2409, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 executes the full tank congratulations effect for the time stored in the storage area d, then switches the song C to the chorus of the song A, and starts the moving pattern suggesting effect.

In step S2410, the CPU 551 of the sub-controller 262 determines whether the time stored in the storage area c is equal to 15 seconds. If the result of determination is equal to 15 seconds, the process proceeds to step S2411, and if the result of determination is not equal to 15 seconds, the process proceeds to step S2413. In step S2411, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 stores 15 seconds in the storage area d of the RAM 553 as the adjustment time for executing the full tank congratulations effect. In step S2412, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 executes the full tank congratulations effect for 15 seconds stored in the storage area d, then switches the song C to the chorus of the song A, and starts the moving pattern suggestion effect. .

In step S2413, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the time stored in the storage area c is longer than 15 seconds. If the result of determination is greater than 15 seconds, the process proceeds to step S2414. In step S2414, the time obtained by subtracting 15 seconds from the time stored in the storage area c is stored in the storage area d of the RAM 553 as the adjustment time for executing the full tank congratulations effect. In step S2415, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 executes the full tank congratulations effect for the time stored in the storage area d, then switches the song C to the chorus of the song B, and starts the moving pattern suggesting effect.

The adjustment time for executing the congratulations on filling up the tank effect and the process of determining the music to be played during the movable pattern suggestive effect process as described above are stored in the ROM 552 of the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 as shown in FIG. You can also use a table with In such a table, a full tank detection delay time a corresponding to the time stored in the storage area a, a movement cycle time b corresponding to the time stored in the storage area b, and a time stored in the storage area c. The time c of (b−a) corresponding to the time to be completed, the time d of congratulations on filling up the tank corresponding to the time stored in the storage area d, and the movement pattern suggestive effect processing determined according to each time. Music is stored in advance. As a result, the processing speed of the steps described above can be improved.

Thus, at the time when the music C is switched to the music A or the music B, the rhythm of the music A or the music B after switching matches the suggestion timing of the movable pattern suggestion effect. As a result, the rhythm of the music piece A or the music piece B can be matched with the suggestion timing of the movable pattern suggestion effect.

(Music switching process based on lower limit start time)
Next, referring to FIG. 71, the song switching process based on the lower limit start time described above will be described with reference to step S2110A shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 71, in step S2501, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not at least one game ball is held in the holding section 403 of the holding device 400 or not. Specifically, determination is made based on detection of an incoming ball by the held ball detection switch 437 and discharge detection by the held ball detection switch 438 . If the determination result is that at least one game ball is reserved, the process proceeds to step S2502, and if the determination result is that the game ball is not reserved, this processing ends. That is, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 is provided with a lower limit number determining section as a function of determining whether or not at least one game ball is retained in the retaining section 403 of the retaining device 400 .

In step S2502, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not the type of the lower limit start time flag set in the lower limit start time setting process described above is 1 or not. If the result of determination is the lower limit start time flag 1, the process advances to step S2503 to switch the song that has been playing until then to the chorus of song B, and start the motion pattern suggestive effect. If the result of determination is not the lower limit start time flag 1, the process proceeds to step S2504.

In step S2504, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the type of the lower limit start time flag set in the lower limit start time setting process described above is 2 or not. If the determination result is the lower limit start time flag 2, the process advances to step S2505 to switch the song that has been played until then to the chorus of song A and start the movable pattern suggestive effect. If the result of determination is not the lower limit start time flag 2, the process proceeds to step S2506.

In step S2506, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not the type of the lower limit start time flag set in the lower limit start time setting process described above is 3 or not. If the result of the determination is the lower limit start time flag 3, the flow advances to step S2507 to switch the song that has been playing until then to the chorus of song B, and start the movable pattern suggestive effect. If the result of determination is not the lower limit start time flag 3, the process proceeds to step S2508.

In step S2508, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the type of the lower limit start time flag set in the lower limit start time setting process described above is 4 or not. If the determination result is the lower limit start time flag 4, the process advances to step S2509 to switch the song that has been played until then to the chorus of song A and start the movable pattern suggestive effect. If the result of determination is not the lower limit start time flag 4, the process proceeds to step S2510.

In step S2510, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the type of the lower limit start time flag set in the lower limit start time setting process described above is 5 or not. If the result of the determination is the lower limit start time flag 5, the process advances to step S2511 to switch the song that has been played until then to the chorus of song B, and start the motion pattern suggestive effect.

The above-described processing for determining the lower limit start time and the processing for determining the music to be played during the movement pattern suggestion effect processing based on the lower limit start time are performed in a table stored in the ROM 552 of the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 as shown in FIG. may be used. In such a table, the delay time v of the fluctuation start corresponding to the time stored in the storage area v, the fluctuation time w before the ready-to-win effect start corresponding to the time stored in the storage area w, and the storage area x (v + w) time x corresponding to the time stored in, the reach effect time z, the lower limit start time y corresponding to the time stored in the storage area y, the type of the lower limit start time flag, and the lower limit start A musical piece during the time-based movement pattern suggestion rendering process is stored in advance. As a result, the processing speed of the steps described above can be improved.

In this way, when at least one game ball is reserved at the timing when the ready-to-win performance time reaches the lower limit start time, the music C is switched to the music B, and the movable pattern suggestion performance is started. When the music C is switched to the music A or the music B, the rhythm of the music A or the music B after switching matches the suggestion timing of the movable pattern suggestion performance. As a result, the rhythm of the music piece A or the music piece B can be matched with the suggestion timing of the movable pattern suggestion effect. An example of this movable pattern suggestion effect will be described below.

Next, the relationship between the movable timing of the distribution movable valve 409 during the reach effect in the normal game state and the suggestive timing of the movable pattern suggestive effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 and 75. FIG. FIG. 74 is a timing chart of an example of a movable pattern suggestive presentation by full tank detection during a ready-to-win presentation in a normal game state. FIG. 75 is a timing chart of an example of a movable pattern suggestive effect based on the lower limit start time during the ready-to-win effect in the normal game state.

(Example 1 of movable pattern suggestion effect performed during ready-to-win effect in normal game state)
As shown in FIG. 74, the sorting movable valve 409 is driven in a constant period with the same constant movable pattern as in the first to third embodiments. Here, in the normal game state, variable display is started, this variable pattern command is a super ready-to-win effect (lottery results may be win or lose), and the ready-to-win effect time is 120 seconds.

At this time, the variable display is started at the same timing as the movable timing t10 (22 seconds after the start of the movable cycle), and after the variable display is performed for 5 seconds from the start of the fluctuation to the start of the ready-to-win effect, a little longer than the movable timing t11. The ready-to-win effect is started at a delayed timing (27 seconds after the start of the movable cycle). For example, for 15 seconds from the start of the ready-to-win production, a right-handed informing production is performed to make the player play a right-handed game. The music C is started simultaneously with the start timing of the ready-to-win effect.

If the player shoots a game ball in a right-handed game immediately after the start of the ready-to-win performance, the full tank of the holding device 400 is detected 60 seconds after the start of the music C. The timing at which the holding device 400 is detected to be full is slightly later than the start timing of movable pattern A (27 seconds after the start of the movable cycle).

That is, the full tank detection delay time a is 27 seconds, the movable period time b is 30 seconds, and the time c obtained by subtracting the time a from the time b is 3 seconds. The time is 3 seconds, and the music during the movable pattern suggestion rendering is music A (see also FIG. 72).

Therefore, after performing a full tank congratulations effect for three seconds from the timing of detecting the full tank of the holding device 400 to the start timing of the movable pattern A, the music C is switched to the chorus part of the music A, and the movable pattern suggesting effect is started. do. The music A is returned to the music C in accordance with the end of the movable pattern suggestion performance. After that, when the ready-to-win effect ends, the song C also ends.

In this way, in the movable pattern suggestive effect, the movable timings t2 to t6 forming the movable pattern A are matched with the timings for displaying the operation request image in accordance with the rhythm of the chorus of the music A, that is, the suggested timings st1 to st5. be able to. As a result, the player, by skillfully operating the second frame button 21 in accordance with the suggested timings st1 to st5, distributes the game balls for the full tank (five balls) held in the holding device 400 to the movable valve 409. , and the ball can be easily entered into the general winning hole 31b. As a result, a maximum of 75 prize balls can be obtained during the ready-to-win effect.

(Movable pattern suggestion effect example 2 performed during reach effect in normal game state)
As shown in FIG. 75, movable pattern suggestion rendering example 2 is a case where the holding device 400 does not become full in the same variable display as movable pattern suggestion rendering example 1 described above.

In this example, the player shoots game balls in a right-handed game for about 40 seconds from the start of the ready-to-win effect, and three game balls are held in the holding device 400, but after that, the shooting of the game balls is stopped. do. In this case, the full tank of the holding device 400 is not detected. Therefore, since at least one game ball is reserved, the ready-to-win performance is terminated after the movable pattern suggestion performance is performed at the timing when the ready-to-win performance reaches the lower limit start time.

That is, the delay time v of the start of the fluctuation is 22 seconds, the time w from the start of the fluctuation to the start of the ready-to-win production is 5 seconds, and the time x obtained by adding the time v and the time w is 27 seconds. Since the time z is 120 seconds, the lower limit start time y is 93 seconds, the type of the lower limit start time flag is 2, and the music for which the motion pattern suggestion effect is being performed is music A (see also FIG. 73).

Therefore, at the timing when 93 seconds have elapsed from the start of the ready-to-win effect, the song C is switched to the chorus of the song A, and the movable pattern suggestion effect is started. The musical piece A is returned to the musical piece C in accordance with the end of the movable pattern suggestion performance. After that, when the ready-to-win effect ends, the song C also ends.

In this way, in the movable pattern suggestive effect, the movable timings t2 to t6 forming the movable pattern A are matched with the timings for displaying the operation request image in accordance with the rhythm of the chorus of the music A, that is, the suggested timings st1 to st5. be able to. As a result, when at least one game ball is reserved at the time when the lower limit start time is reached, it is possible to reduce the waste of the reserved game ball.

It should be noted that the above-described full-tank determining section of the CPU 551 of the sub-controller 262 corresponds to the upper limit number determining means of the present invention. The lower limit start time determination unit of the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 corresponds to the lower limit timing determination unit of the present invention. The lower limit number determining section of the CPU 551 of the sub-controller 262 corresponds to the lower limit number determining means of the present invention.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, the movable pattern suggestion effect is performed when the upper limit number of game balls are held in the holding device 400 by the full tank determination section of the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262. When it is determined that there is, by the operation effect control unit of the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262, the suggested timing for displaying the operation request image is displayed as an effect that matches the timing when the sorting movable valve 409 comes to the projecting position. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the complexity of the player due to the display of the operation effect even when only the game balls less than the upper limit number of the reserved game balls are reserved.

Also, until the lower limit start time determination unit of the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines that the execution time of the display effect reaches the lower limit start time, the lower limit number determination unit of the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 at least holds the lower limit number ( When it is determined that one game ball is reserved, the timing at which the operation request image is displayed is set by the effect control unit of the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 so that the distribution movable valve 409 comes to the projecting position. An operation performance matching the timing is displayed on the third pattern display device 42.例文帳に追加As a result, even if it is determined by the full-tank determining unit that the upper limit number of game balls are not retained in the retaining device 400, at least one ball is required before the execution time of the ready-to-win effect reaches the lower limit start time. When it is determined that the game ball is reserved, the timing at which the operation request image is displayed is matched with the timing at which the sorting movable valve 409 comes to the projecting position, and the movable pattern suggesting effect is performed by the third symbol display device. 42, even though the game balls are held in the holding device 400, it reduces the decrease in the desire to play due to the fact that the movable pattern suggestive performance is not displayed only because the holding upper limit number is not reached. can.

In the sixth embodiment described above, when the game balls held in the holding device 400 are full during the ready-to-win production in the normal game state, or when the ready-to-win production time reaches the lower limit start time, at least one ball Although the movable pattern suggestion performance is executed based on the holding of the game balls, the game balls held in the holding device 400 become full not only during the ready-to-win performance in the normal game state but also during the jackpot state. The moving pattern suggesting effect may be executed based on that the latest round (lower limit start round) for executing the movable pattern suggesting effect is reached. Note that the movable pattern suggestive effect based on the detection of the full tank of the holding device 400 is the same as that described in the sixth embodiment, so the sixth embodiment will be referred to for details.

The movable pattern suggestive effect based on the lower limit start round performed by the sub-controller 262 during the jackpot state will be described with reference to FIGS. 76 to 79. FIG. FIG. 76 is a flow chart showing the opening/closing mode (jackpot) display setting process by the sub-controller 262. As shown in FIG. FIG. 77 is a flow chart showing the movable pattern suggestion effect processing by the lower limit start round performed by the sub-controller 262 . FIG. 78 is a flow chart showing music switching timing adjustment processing in the lower limit start round by the sub-controller 262 . FIG. 79 is a table for determining the adjustment effect time and the music during the movable pattern suggestion effect process.

(Open/close mode (jackpot) display setting processing)
The opening/closing mode (jackpot) display setting process of this embodiment differs from the opening/closing mode (jackpot) display setting process described in the first embodiment with reference to FIG. Therefore, this point will be mainly described.

As shown in FIG. 76, in step S2603, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 performs start music determination processing for determining the music played first in the jackpot effect. In the case of a jackpot presentation with a maximum number of rounds of 16 rounds, it is determined that the song D is to be the starting song. In the case of a jackpot effect with other maximum number of rounds, it is decided to use another song as the starting song.

In step S2606, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not the game balls held in the holding device 400 are full (full tank detection). If the determination result is full, the process proceeds to step S2607, and if the determination result is not full, the process proceeds to step S2609. In step S2607, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 performs a movable pattern suggesting rendering process based on full tank detection.

The movable pattern suggestive rendering process of this embodiment is the same as the movable pattern suggestive rendering process based on full tank detection described with reference to FIG. 68 in the sixth embodiment. Therefore, in the present embodiment as well, the movable pattern suggestion effect is executed based on the full tank detection. Also, the music switching timing adjustment process executed in the movable pattern suggestion rendering process of this embodiment is the same as the music switching timing adjustment process based on the full tank detection described with reference to FIG. 70 in the sixth embodiment. Therefore, in this embodiment as well, the timing of switching from the song D during the jackpot effect to the song during the movable pattern suggestion effect process is adjusted in the same way based on the detection of the full tank.

In step S2609, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not the jackpot round has reached the lower limit start round. If the determination result is the lower limit start round, the process proceeds to step S2610, and if the determination result is not the lower limit start round, the process proceeds to step S2112. That is, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 has a lower limit start round determination section as a function of determining whether or not the jackpot round has reached the lower limit start round.

In step S2610, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 performs the movable pattern suggestion effect process by the lower limit start round for performing the movable pattern suggestion effect when the lower limit start round is reached.

(Movable Pattern Suggestion Effect Processing by Lower Limit Start Round)
Here, the movable pattern suggestion effect processing by the lower limit start round will be described with reference to FIG. In step S2610A, music switching timing adjustment processing is performed by a lower limit start round, which will be described later, and the process proceeds to step S2610B. In step S2610B, a display command is set for displaying a moving pattern suggestive effect accompanying the music switched in step S2610A, and the process proceeds to step S2610C.

In step S2610C, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not the movable pattern suggestion rendering has ended. As a result of the determination, if the movable pattern suggestion rendering has ended, the process proceeds to step S26110D, and if not ended, this processing ends. In step S2610D, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 returns the music used in the movable pattern suggestion effect to the music D at the start of the jackpot effect.

(Music switching timing adjustment processing in the lower limit start round)
The song switching process in the lower limit start round described above in step S2610A will be described.

As shown in FIG. 78, in step S2901, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not at least one game ball is held in the holding section 403 of the holding device 400 or not. If the determination result is that at least one game ball is reserved, the process proceeds to step S2902, and if the determination result is that no game ball is reserved, this processing ends.

In step S2902, the CPU 551 of the sub-controller 262 waits from the start time of one movable cycle of the sorting movable valve 409 to the reception time of the 14th round designation command indicating the start of the 14th round, which is the lower limit round. The time (delay time) is acquired and stored in the storage area e of the RAM 553 . In step S2903, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 stores the time (15 seconds) of the movable period in the storage area f of the RAM 553. FIG.

In step S2904, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 causes the storage area g of the RAM 553 to store the time obtained by subtracting the delay time stored in the storage area e from the movable cycle time stored in the storage area f.

In step S2905, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not the time stored in the storage area g is 0 seconds. If the time stored in the storage area g is 0 seconds, the process proceeds to step S2906; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S2908. In step S2906, 15 seconds are stored in the storage area h of the RAM 553 as adjustment time for executing the adjustment effect. The process advances to step S2907. In step S2907, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 starts the movable pattern suggestive effect by the chorus of the song B after performing the adjustment effect for 15 seconds stored in the storage area h.

In step S2908, it is determined whether or not the time stored in storage area g is shorter than 15 seconds. If the time stored in the storage area g is less than 15 seconds, the process proceeds to step S2909, and if not less than 15 seconds, the process proceeds to step S2911. In step S2909, the time stored in the storage area g as the adjustment time for executing the adjustment effect is stored in the storage area h of the RAM553. In step S2910, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 starts the movable pattern suggestion effect by the chorus of the music A after performing the adjustment effect for the time stored in the storage area h.

In step S2911, it is determined whether the time stored in storage area g is equal to 15 seconds. If the time stored in storage area g is equal to 15 seconds, proceed to step S2912; otherwise, proceed to step S2914. In step S2912, 15 seconds are stored in the storage area h of the RAM 553 as adjustment time for executing the adjustment effect. In step S2913, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 starts the movable pattern suggestion effect by the chorus of the music A after performing the adjustment effect for 15 seconds stored in the storage area h.

In step S2914, it is determined whether or not the time stored in storage area g is longer than 15 seconds. If the time stored in storage area g is less than 15 seconds, the process proceeds to step S2915. In step S2915, the time obtained by subtracting 15 seconds from the time stored in the storage area g is stored in the storage area h of the RAM 553 as the adjustment time for executing the adjustment effect. In step S2916, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 starts the movable pattern suggestion effect by the chorus of the music B after performing the adjustment effect for the time stored in the storage area h.

The processing for determining the adjustment time for executing the above-described adjustment effect and the music to be played during the movable pattern suggestion effect process is stored in a table stored in the ROM 552 of the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 as shown in FIG. may be used. In such a table, the delay time e of the lower limit start round (14R) specification command corresponding to the time stored in the storage area e, the movable cycle time f corresponding to the time stored in the storage area f, The time g of (fe) corresponding to the time stored in the storage area g, the time h of the adjustment effect corresponding to the time stored in the storage area h, and the movable pattern suggestive effect determined according to each time. The song being processed is stored in advance. As a result, the processing speed of the steps described above can be improved.

In this way, when at least one game ball is reserved at the timing of the lower limit start round (14 rounds) after the movable pattern suggestive effect based on full tank detection is executed during the jackpot state, After performing the adjustment performance for a predetermined time, the music D is switched to the chorus part of the music A or the music B, and the movable pattern suggestion performance is started. When the music D is switched to the chorus part of the music A or B, the rhythm of the chorus part of the music A or B after the switching matches the suggestion timing of the movable pattern suggestion performance. As a result, the rhythm of the chorus of the song A or the song B can be matched with the suggestion timing of the movable pattern suggestion effect. In the following, an example of this movable pattern suggestion effect will be described.

Next, the relation between the movement timing of the distribution movable valve 409 based on the detection of the full tank during the jackpot effect and the suggesting timing of the movable pattern suggesting effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 80 and 81. FIG. FIG. 80 is a timing chart of an example of a movable pattern suggestive effect showing the relationship between the movable timing of the diverting movable valve 409 based on the full tank detection during the big win effect and the suggestive timing of the movable pattern suggestive effect. FIG. 81 is a timing chart following FIG.

(Example of moving pattern suggestion effect based on full tank detection during jackpot effect)
As shown in FIGS. 80 and 81, the sorting movable valve 409 is driven at a constant cycle with the same constant movable pattern as in the first to fifth embodiments. Here, it is assumed that the jackpot state has a maximum number of rounds of 16 rounds and a minimum number of rounds of 14 rounds. The jackpot state starts 20 seconds after the start of the run cycle. At this timing, the jackpot effect accompanied by the music D is started.

When the player shoots a game ball in a right-handed game immediately after the start of the big win performance, the full state of the holding device 400 is detected about 75 seconds after the start of the big win performance. The timing at which the holding device 400 is detected to be full is slightly later than the start timing of movable pattern A (five seconds after the start of the movable cycle).

That is, the full tank detection delay time a is 5 seconds, the movable period time b is 30 seconds, and the time c obtained by subtracting the time a from the time b is 25 seconds. , and 10 seconds, and the music during the movable pattern suggestion rendering is music B (see also FIG. 72).

Therefore, for 10 seconds from the timing of detection of the full tank of the holding device 400 to the start timing of the movable pattern B, after performing a full tank congratulations effect, the music D is switched to the chorus part of the music B, and the movable pattern accompanied by the music B is performed. Start suggestive production.

As a result, in the movable pattern suggestive effect, the movable timings t8 to t12 forming the movable pattern B and the timings for displaying the operation request image in accordance with the rhythm of the chorus of the music B, that is, the suggestive timings st6 to st10 are matched. can be done. As a result, the player successfully operates the second frame button 21 in accordance with the suggested timings st6 to st10, and distributes the game balls for the full tank (five balls) held in the holding device 400 to the movable valve 409. , and the ball can be easily entered into the general winning hole 31b. It should be noted that after the moving pattern suggestive effect is finished, the music B is switched to the music D, and the big win effect by the music D is continued again.

It is assumed that the game balls continue to be shot even after the full tank is detected, and three game balls are held in the holding device 400 when the 14th round is reached. At this time, at the start of the 14th round, the movable pattern suggestion effect is executed based on the condition that at least one or more game balls are reserved. It should be noted that the start timing of the 14th round coincides with the start timing of the movable pattern A.

That is, the delay time e of the 14R designation command is 0 seconds, the movable period time f is 30 seconds, and the time g obtained by subtracting the time e from the time f is 30 seconds, so the adjustment effect time h is 15 seconds. The second is the second, and the music during the movable pattern suggestion effect is music B (see also FIG. 79).

Therefore, after the adjustment performance for 15 seconds from the start of the lower limit start round is performed, the music D is switched to the chorus part of the music B in accordance with the start timing of the movable pattern B, and the movable pattern suggestion performance accompanied by the music B is performed. is started. As a result, the movable timings t8 to t12 forming the movable pattern B and the suggesting timings st5 to st10 for displaying the operation request image in accordance with the rhythm of the music piece B can be matched in the movable pattern suggestive effect. As a result, if the second frame button 21 is successfully operated in accordance with the suggested timings st5 to st10, the three game balls left in the holding device 400 can be put on the sorting movable valve 409, and the general winning opening It becomes easier to enter the ball into 31b. In addition, since the end timing of the movable pattern suggestive effect coincides with the end timing of the big win state, the big win state ends with the song B remaining.

The lower limit start round determination section of the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 described above corresponds to the lower limit timing determination section of the present invention.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment, the operation effect is the effect control unit , the timing at which the operation request image is displayed is displayed in accordance with the timing at which the sorting movable valve 409 comes to the protruding position, so that the movable pattern suggestive effect is displayed. It is possible to reduce the complexity of the player due to the operation effect being displayed up to .

In addition, when the lower limit number determination unit determines that at least the number of pending lower limits (for example, 1 ball) of game balls is suspended before the lower limit start round determination unit determines that the jackpot round reaches the lower limit start round Then, the third pattern display device 42 displays a movable pattern suggestion effect by matching the timing of displaying the operation request image to the timing when the sorting movable valve 409 comes to the projecting position by the effect control unit. As a result, even if it is determined by the full-tank determining unit that the full-filled game balls are not retained in the retaining device 400, at least the retention lower limit number When it is determined that the game ball is reserved, the third symbol display device 42 displays an operation performance that matches the timing at which the operation request image is displayed with the timing at which the sorting movable valve 409 comes to the second position. Since it is displayed, it is possible to reduce the decrease in motivation to play due to the fact that the movable pattern suggestive performance is not displayed only because the number of reserved upper limit is not reached in spite of the game balls being reserved in the reserve device 400. - 特許庁

In the above-described Examples 1 to 7, the moving pattern suggestive effects include those accompanied by the music A and those accompanied by the music B. There was no clear difference in the difficulty or ease of operation (hereinafter referred to as the difficulty level) of the motion pattern suggestive effect. Therefore, in the movable pattern suggestion effect of the present embodiment, it is assumed that the player can select the difficulty level, and that the difficulty level has a clear difference.

The moving pattern suggestive effect, in which the difficulty level is selectable by the player, performed by the sub-control device 262 will be described with reference to FIGS. 82 and 83. FIG. FIG. 82 is a flow chart showing the opening/closing mode (jackpot) display setting process by the sub-controller 262 . FIG. 83 is a flow chart showing difficulty level selection processing of the movable pattern suggestive effect by the sub-controller 262 .

(Open/close mode (jackpot) display setting processing)
As shown in FIG. 82, the opening/closing mode (jackpot) display setting process of the present embodiment includes the opening/closing mode (jackpot) display setting process described with reference to FIG. ) is the same as the display setting process. Therefore, the difficulty level selection process of the movable pattern suggestive effect will be described below, and the description of the seventh embodiment will be referred to for other processes.

In step S2603A, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 performs a moving pattern suggestion rendering difficulty level selection process for enabling the player to select the difficulty level of operating the second frame button 21 in the moving pattern suggesting representation. That is, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 has a difficulty level selection display section as a function of displaying a selection image for enabling selection of the difficulty level of the operation of the second frame button 21 in the movable pattern suggestive effect.

(Difficulty level selection process for motion pattern suggestion effect)
As shown in FIG. 83, in step S3001, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 analyzes the content of the opening command and determines whether or not the maximum number of rounds in the jackpot state is 16 rounds. When the maximum number of rounds in the jackpot state is 16 rounds, the movable pattern suggestive effect is executed, so the process proceeds to step S3002 to perform difficulty level selection processing. If the number of rounds in the jackpot state is not 16 rounds, this processing is terminated.

In step S3002, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets the difficulty level selection image to the third symbol for allowing the player to select either "normal" or "easy" as the difficulty level of the operation of the movable pattern suggestion effect. Displayed on the display device 42 . The difficulty level selection image is displayed during the opening effect period.

In step S3003, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether the player has selected "normal" or "easy" as the difficulty level of the operation of the movable pattern suggestion effect. If it is determined that the player has selected "normal" (step S3003: YES), the process proceeds to step S3004, and if it is determined that the player has selected "easy" (step S3003: NO), step Proceed to S3005.

In step S3004, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines that the display command is the normal mode display command when the movable pattern suggestion effect is executed. In step S3005, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines to set the display command to the easy mode display command when the movable pattern suggestion effect is executed.

In step S3004, when it is determined to set the display command of the movable pattern suggestion effect command to the normal mode, the movable pattern suggestion effect is executed in the normal mode. In step S3005, when it is decided to set the display command of the movable pattern suggestion effect command to the easy mode, the movable pattern suggestion effect is executed in the easy mode.

The timing of the movable pattern A and the movable pattern B of the sorting movable valve 409 and the display of the suggestive image in the example of the movable pattern suggestive effect in the easy mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 84 to 87. FIG. 84(a) to (c) are a series of timing charts showing the timing of the movable pattern A of the diverting movable valve 409 and the suggestive image display. 85(a) to (c) are a series of timing charts showing the timing of the movable pattern B different from that of FIG. FIGS. 86(a) and 86(b) are diagrams showing the movable pattern suggestive effect displayed on the third symbol display device 42 during the jackpot state. FIGS. 87(a) and (b) are diagrams showing the movable pattern suggesting effect following FIG.

The timing of the movable pattern A of the sorting movable valve 409 and the display of the suggestive image in the example of the movable pattern suggestive effect in the easy mode will be described with reference to FIG. An image (A) explaining the rhythm game is displayed on the third symbol display device 42 for 1.0 second from 0.0 second after the start of the movable cycle to 1.0 second after the start of the movable cycle. Image (a), as shown in FIG. 86(a), is displayed as "rhythm game easy mode" indicating that the movable pattern suggestion effect is the easy mode selected by the player.

From 1.0 seconds after the start of the movable cycle to 9.0 seconds after the start of the movable cycle, an image (A) indicating the start of the rhythm game is displayed. Image (a), as shown in FIG. 86(b), illustrates how to operate the second frame button 21 in the movable pattern suggestive effect in the easy mode. Please,” is displayed on the operation explanation image 423 . During this period, movable timings t1 to t3 of the movable pattern A arrive, but the operation request image indicating the suggested timing is not displayed.

For 0.85 seconds from 9.00 seconds after the start of the movable cycle to 9.85 seconds after the start of the movable cycle, an image (c) is displayed to notify that the operation timing of the second frame button 21 is approaching. . The image (c) is displayed as an image in which the repeated hit request image 436 representing the characters "Continuous hit!" approaches the operation timing image 425, as shown in FIG.

For 1.5 seconds from 9.85 seconds after the start of the movable cycle to 11.35 seconds after the start of the movable cycle, an image (d) is displayed to notify that it is time to operate the second frame button 21 . The image (d) is displayed as an image (d) in which the repeated hit request image 436 completely overlaps the operation timing image 425, as shown in FIG. 87(b). During the 1.5 seconds during which the overlapping image (d) is displayed, movable timing t4 and movable timing t5 arrive. The 1.5 seconds during which the overlapping image (d) is displayed is referred to as suggestion timing st11.

During the period in which the superimposed image (d) is displayed, 9.85 seconds after the start of the movable period (that is, the symbol "d1" in the figure), shown hatched in FIGS. 84(b) and (c) 0.5 seconds from 10.35 seconds after the start of the movable cycle (timing “E2”), and 10.85 seconds after the start of the movable cycle 0.5 seconds from (timing "d3") to 11.35 seconds after the start of the movable cycle (timing "d4"), whichever timing the player hits the second frame button 21 repeatedly. If they overlap, the game ball discharged from the holding device 400 rides on the sorting movable valve 409 shown at either the movable timing t4 or the movable timing t5, is guided to the general prize winning port 31b, and wins the general prize winning port 31b. do. In order to obtain such a result, the time from pressing of the second frame button 21 to the start of driving of the discharge prevention valve 406 and the time during which the discharge prevention valve 406 is displaced between the holding position and the discharge position are appropriately adjusted. .

After 11.35 seconds from the start of the movable cycle, an image (o) is displayed to notify that the operation timing of the second frame button 21 has ended. The image (E) is displayed as an image in which the repeated hit request image 439 moves away from the operation timing image 425 or disappears from the display screen. 15.0 seconds after the start of the movable cycle, the movable pattern suggestive effect accompanying the music A ends.

The timing of the movable pattern B of the sorting movable valve 409 and the display of the suggestive image in the example of the movable pattern suggestive effect in the easy mode will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, below, it demonstrates centering on the period when the overlapping image (d) mentioned above is displayed.

Overlapping image (d) is displayed for 2.5 seconds from 19.85 seconds after the start of the movable cycle to 22.35 seconds after the start of the movable cycle. During the 2.5 seconds during which the overlapping image (d) is displayed, movable timing t8 to movable timing t10 arrive. The 2.5 seconds during which the overlapping image (d) is displayed is called suggestion timing st12.

During the period in which the superimposed image (d) is displayed, the movable period starts 19.85 seconds after the start of the movable period (timing "d5"), which is hatched in FIGS. 0.5 seconds until 20.35 seconds after the start (timing "E6"), and 20.85 seconds after the start of the movable cycle (timing "E7") and 21.35 seconds after the start of the movable cycle (timing "E7") 0.5 seconds from 21.85 seconds after the start of the movable cycle (timing 9) to 22.35 seconds after the start of the movable cycle (timing 10). If any of the timings at which the player repeatedly hits the second frame button 21 overlaps with any of the above, the game balls discharged from the holding device 400 are distributed and movable at any of the movable timings t8 to t10. It rides on the valve 409, is guided to the general prize winning port 31b, and wins the general prize winning port 31b.

Therefore, even a player who is unfamiliar with the operation of pressing the second frame button 21 in time with the rhythm of music A or music B, such as the operation in the movable pattern suggestive effect in the normal mode, can perform the movable pattern in the easy mode. In the suggestive effect, if the second frame button 21 is repeatedly hit while the overlapping image (d) is displayed, at least one of the full game balls held in the holding device 400 is surely sorted. It becomes easy to place the ball on the movable valve 409 and guide it to the general prize winning port 31b to win the general prize winning port 31b.

It should be noted that the operation mode of the second frame button 21 in the movable pattern suggestion effect in the normal mode described above corresponds to the first operation mode of the present invention, and the movable pattern suggestion effect in the normal mode corresponds to the first operation effect of the present invention. Equivalent to. The operation mode of the second frame button 21 in the above-described movable pattern suggestion effect in the easy mode corresponds to the second operation mode of the present invention, and the movable pattern suggestion effect in the easy mode corresponds to the second operation effect of the present invention. . The difficulty level selection display section of the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 described above corresponds to the difficulty level selection display means of the present invention.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment, the movable pattern suggestive effect includes at least the movable pattern suggestive effect in the normal mode and the movable pattern suggestive effect in the easy mode. The difficulty level selection display unit of the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 provides a selection image that can select which of the movable pattern suggestive effects to be displayed at least in the normal mode and the movable pattern suggestive effects in the easy mode. is displayed on the third symbol display device 42 . The operation effect control section of the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 displays on the third symbol display device 42 the movable pattern suggestion effect selected during the display of the selection image. As a result, a player who does not like difficult operations can select the moving pattern suggesting effect in the easy mode, and a player who does not can select the moving pattern suggesting effect in the normal mode. In this way, it is possible to provide a movable pattern suggestive presentation that matches the player's taste.

In Examples 1 to 8 described above, the length of one period of the movable pattern suggestive effect is 30, with the period from the start of movable pattern A to the end of movable pattern B being defined as one period (hereinafter also referred to as the movable period). Although the apportionment operation is periodically repeated every second, it is also possible to execute a plurality of types of movable pattern suggestive effects according to a plurality of types of movable periods with different lengths. In this embodiment, a game machine having a plurality of types of movable periods with different lengths and changing the movable period at a predetermined timing after turning on the power to the main body of the game machine to execute a movable pattern suggestive effect will be described.

In the present embodiment, as the predetermined timing for changing the movable period after turning on the power of the gaming machine main body, for example, the start of a jackpot state in which the maximum number of rounds is 8 rounds will be described as an example.

In Embodiments 1 and 6, when the maximum number of rounds in the jackpot state is 16 rounds, the movable pattern suggestion effect is executed, so in the right-handed game, the game balls are placed in the holding device 400 at a rate of 1 ball out of 15 balls. It takes 75 seconds until the game ball is suspended and the full tank (5 balls) is suspended, and even if the distribution movable valve 409 executes the movable pattern suggestion performance with a movable cycle of 30 seconds per cycle, the movable pattern suggestion performance is performed. was sufficiently feasible. However, as the maximum number of rounds in the jackpot state becomes less than 16 rounds, it is expected that the movable pattern suggestion effect cannot be executed in the above-described movable period.

Therefore, in this embodiment, multiple types of movable cycles and movable pattern suggestive effects are prepared, and even in a jackpot state where the maximum number of rounds is less than 16 rounds, allocation operations and movable pattern suggestive effects are executed in accordance with the movable cycle. to enable.

Specifically, this embodiment has 8 rounds in addition to 2 rounds and 16 rounds as the maximum number of rounds in the jackpot state. When a jackpot state with a maximum number of rounds of 8 occurs, a moving pattern suggesting effect is executed for 10 seconds based on detection that three game balls are held by the holding device 400.例文帳に追加In response to the 10-second movable pattern suggesting effect, the sorting movable valve 409 repeats the 10-second movable pattern C and the 10-second movable pattern D at a movable cycle of 20 seconds per cycle. A configuration necessary for such a game machine will be described below with reference to FIGS. 88 to 92. FIG.

Note that FIG. 88 is a flow chart showing normal processing by the main controller 261 of the ninth embodiment. FIG. 89 is a flow chart showing the operation cycle change process of the distribution movable valve 409 in the normal process of FIG. FIG. 90 is a flow chart showing opening/closing mode (jackpot) display setting processing by the sub-controller 262 of the ninth embodiment. FIG. 91 is a table for determining the adjustment time and the music during the movable pattern suggestion rendering process. FIG. 92 is a timing chart of an example of movable pattern suggestive effect showing the relationship between the movable timing of the distribution movable valve 409 and the suggestive timing of the movable pattern suggestive effect in the 8-round jackpot state.

In the following explanation, it is assumed that the time required from the start to the end of one round is 10 seconds when the right-handed game is continued during the jackpot state, and the time required for the jackpot state of 8 rounds is 80 seconds. Also, it is assumed that 60 game balls are shot in 60 seconds in a right-handed game.

In Examples 1 to 8, as shown in step S112 in FIG. 11, the sorting movable valve 409 was repeatedly driven at the same time as the power was turned on at the above-described movable cycle of 30 seconds per cycle. In addition to this, when a jackpot state with a maximum number of rounds of 8 occurs, the movable cycle of the distribution movable valve 409 is changed. That is, the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 has a movable cycle changer as a function of changing the movable cycle of the distribution movable valve 409 in normal processing, as shown in step S207A of FIG. 88 . The operation period changing process for changing the operation period of the distribution movable valve 409 will be described below.

(Movement period change processing of the sorting movable valve)
As shown in FIG. 89, in step S3101, the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 determines whether or not the jackpot state with the maximum number of rounds of 8 rounds has been won. If the maximum number of rounds is 8 rounds, the process proceeds to step S3102, and if the maximum number of rounds is not 8 rounds, the process ends. In step S3102, the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 determines whether or not it is time to end the opening effect. If it is the end timing of the opening effect, the process proceeds to step S3103; otherwise, the process ends.

In step S3103, the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 determines whether or not it is time to end the movable cycle of 30 seconds per cycle. If it is the end timing of the movable cycle of 30 seconds per cycle, the process proceeds to step S3104; otherwise, the process ends. In step S3104, the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 changes the movable cycle of the sorting movable valve 409 from a movable cycle of 30 seconds per cycle to a movable cycle of 20 seconds per cycle. As a result, the movable cycle of the sorting movable valve 409 is continuously changed from the movable cycle of 30 seconds per cycle to the movable cycle of 20 seconds per cycle, so that the player is made aware of the change in the movable cycle. can be made difficult.

In step S3105, the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 determines whether or not it is time to end the ending effect that informs the end of the jackpot state. If it is the end timing of the ending effect, the process proceeds to step S3106; otherwise, the process ends. In step S3106, the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 determines whether or not it is time to end the movable cycle of 20 seconds per cycle. If it is the end timing of the movable cycle of 20 seconds per cycle, the process proceeds to step S3107; otherwise, the process ends.

In step S3107, the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 changes the movable cycle of the sorting movable valve 409 from a movable cycle of 20 seconds per cycle to a movable cycle of 30 seconds per cycle. As a result, the movable cycle of the distribution movable valve 409 is continuously returned from the movable cycle of 20 seconds per cycle to the movable cycle of 30 seconds per cycle, so that the player is made aware of the change in the movable cycle. can be made difficult.

(Open/close mode (jackpot) display setting processing)
Of the opening/closing mode (jackpot) display setting processing of this embodiment, the processing when the opening command is received and the processing when the full tank is detected are the same as the processing described with reference to FIG. 66 etc. in the sixth embodiment. Therefore, processing different from the processing of the sixth embodiment will be described below.

As shown in FIG. 90, in step S2606A, when the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 receives a signal other than the opening command (step S2601: NO), it determines the maximum number of rounds in the jackpot state. If it is not the jackpot state of 16 rounds, the process proceeds to step S2620.

In step S2620, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not the type of the jackpot state is the jackpot state of 8 rounds. If the jackpot state of 8 rounds, the process proceeds to step S2621. In step S2621, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the number of game balls held in the holding device 400 has reached 3 balls. When game balls continue to be shot in a right-handed game from the start of the big win state, the number of game balls held in the holding device 400 reaches three balls 45 seconds after the start of the big win state. If the determination result is that three balls have been reached, the process proceeds to step S2622.

In step S2622, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 performs a moving pattern suggestive rendering process based on three-ball detection. It should be noted that the moving pattern suggesting effect processing by detecting three balls includes the music switching timing adjustment processing by detecting three balls, but except for the fact that the movable cycle time is 20 seconds, the sixth embodiment is similar to that shown in FIG. Since this is the same as the music switching timing adjustment processing based on the full tank detection described with reference, the description of the sixth embodiment and FIG. 70 will be referred to as appropriate.

The processing for determining the adjustment time for executing the adjustment effect and the music to be played during the movable pattern suggestion effect processing is performed using a table stored in the ROM 552 of the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 as shown in FIG. may In such a table, the three-ball detection delay time a, the movable cycle time b, the time c of (ba), and the adjustment performance time d corresponding to the time stored in the storage area d , music during the motion pattern suggestive effect determined according to each time are stored in advance. Since the movable cycle time has been shortened from 30 seconds to 20 seconds, the music during the movable pattern suggestion production is the 10-second chorus of music A, which is further shortened from the 15-second chorus of music A (hereinafter referred to as music A1 ), or a 10-second chorus of song B (hereinafter referred to as song B1) obtained by further shortening the 15-second chorus of song B.

(Example of moving pattern suggestion effect based on 3 ball detection during 8 rounds jackpot effect)
As shown in FIG. 92, the movable cycle of 1 cycle of 30 seconds is changed to the movable cycle of 1 cycle of 20 seconds after the end timing of the opening effect and at the change timing of the movable cycle. The change timing of the movable period is the end timing of the even-numbered period of the movable period of one period of 30 seconds counted from the start of the distribution operation accompanying power-on. A movable cycle of 20 seconds per cycle is started in accordance with the end timing of the even-numbered cycle of the movable cycle of 1 cycle of 30 seconds. Therefore, although it seems to the player that the sorting operation of the sorting movable valve 409 continues continuously, it is possible to make it difficult to detect the change timing of the movable cycle.

A movable pattern of the sorting movable valve 409 with one period of 20 seconds will be described. As shown in FIG. 92, the movable pattern of the sorting movable valve 409 with one period of 20 seconds is started from the start of the jackpot state, and the movable pattern A1, which will be described later, is executed for 10 seconds, and then executed for 10 seconds. This pattern is continuous with the movable pattern B1 described later. Specifically, the movable pattern A1 is a pattern in which the movable timings are 2 seconds (t1), 4 seconds (t2), 7 seconds (t3), and 10 seconds (t4) after the start of the movable cycle. , is a pattern obtained by shortening the movable pattern A (omitting the latter half). The movable pattern B1 is a pattern in which the movable timings are 11 seconds (t7), 15 seconds (t8), 16 seconds (t9), and 17 seconds (t10) after the start of the movable period. This is a shortened pattern (omitting the latter half).

When the player shoots the game ball in the right-handed game immediately after the start of the big win performance, the three-ball hold of the holding device 400 is detected about 45 seconds after the start of the big win performance with the music D. The timing at which this holding device 400 holds three balls is detected slightly later than the start timing of the movable pattern A1 (15 seconds after the start of the movable cycle of 20 seconds per cycle).

That is, the delay time a for detecting 3 balls is 15 seconds, the time b of the movable period is 20 seconds, and the time c obtained by subtracting the time a from the time b is 5 seconds, so the time for the adjustment performance is 5 seconds. , and the music during the movable pattern suggestion rendering is music A1 (see also FIG. 91).

Therefore, after performing the adjustment performance for 5 seconds from the timing of detecting three balls of the holding device 400 to the timing of starting the movable pattern A1, the music D is switched to the music A1, and the movable pattern suggestion performance accompanied by the music A1 is started. .

As a result, in the movable pattern suggestive effect, the movable timings t2 to t4 forming the movable pattern A1 can be matched with the timings for displaying the operation request image in accordance with the rhythm of the music piece A1, that is, the suggested timings st1 to st3. It should be noted that after the moving pattern suggestive effect is finished, the music A1 is switched to the music D, and the big win effect by the music D is continued again.

It should be noted that the movable period changing section of the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 described above corresponds to the movable period changing means of the present invention.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment, the sorting operation of the sorting movable valve 409 has a first movable cycle (for example, a movable cycle of 30 seconds per cycle) and a second movable cycle with different cycles. (for example, a movable period of 20 seconds per period), and by the movable period changing unit of the CPU 501 of the main controller 261, the first movable period is changed to the second movable period, or the second movable period is changed. Even when the movable cycle is changed from the cycle to the first movable cycle, the timing at which the operation request image is displayed can be adjusted to match the movable timing of the sorting movable valve 409 according to the type of the changed movable cycle. A pattern suggestion effect is displayed by the operation effect control section of the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 . As a result, it is possible to make it more difficult to detect the operation timing of the sorting movable valve 409 than in the case where the sorting operation is performed in the same movable period.

In Examples 1 to 8, the movable pattern of the sorting movable valve 409 was a movable pattern in which the movable pattern A of 15 seconds and the movable pattern B of 15 seconds were repeated in one cycle of 30 seconds. Even if the period of movement is the same, it does not matter if there are a plurality of types of movement patterns with different movement timings. In this embodiment, there are a plurality of types of movable patterns with different movable timings, and the movable pattern suggestive effect is executed by changing the movable pattern at a predetermined timing after power is turned on to the main body of the gaming machine.

In this embodiment, as the predetermined timing for changing the movable pattern after the main body of the gaming machine is turned on, the start of the jackpot state in the variable probability state will be described as an example.

If the music used for the movable pattern suggestive performance during the jackpot performance in the normal game state is separated from the music used for the movable pattern suggestive performance during the jackpot performance in the variable probability state, the variations of the movable pattern suggestive performance are increased. However, when the music used for the movable pattern suggestive effect during the jackpot effect is different between the normal game state and the probability variable state, and if the movable pattern of the sorting movable valve 409 is single, in each movable pattern suggestive effect , there are cases where the movement timing of the sorting movable valve 409 and the suggested timing for displaying the operation request image do not match.

Therefore, as described above, if the movable pattern of the distribution movable valve 409 during the jackpot state in the normal game state and the movable pattern during the jackpot state in the variable probability state are made different, the movable pattern during the jackpot production is changed between the normal game state and the variable probability state. Even if the music used for the pattern suggestive effect is divided, the movement timing of the sorting movable valve 409 in the movable pattern suggestive effect and the suggestive timing of displaying the operation request image can be matched. The configuration required for such a game machine will be described below with reference to FIGS. 93 to 96. FIG.

FIG. 93 is a flow chart showing normal processing by the main controller 261 of the tenth embodiment. FIG. 94 is a flow chart showing the movement pattern change processing of the distribution movable valve 409 in the normal processing of FIG. FIG. 95 is a timing chart of an example of a movable pattern suggestive effect showing the relationship between the movable timing of the distribution movable valve 409 and the suggestive timing of the movable pattern suggestive effect in the jackpot state in the variable probability state. FIG. 96 is a timing chart of an example of the movable pattern suggestive presentation following FIG. FIG. 97 is a table for determining the time of the adjustment effect and the music during the movable pattern suggestion effect. FIG. 98 is a table following FIG.

In the following description, the movable pattern suggestion effect is executed based on detection of a full tank of game balls held in the holding device 400 during the jackpot effect with the maximum number of rounds being 16 rounds.

(Normal processing)
The CPU 501 of the main controller 261 performs the movement pattern change process of the distribution movable valve 409 in the normal process, as shown in step S207B of FIG. 93 . The movement pattern change processing of this distribution movable valve 409 will be described below.

(Movable pattern change processing of the sorting movable valve)
As shown in FIG. 94, in step S3201, the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 determines whether or not the current probability of winning the jackpot lottery is high. Since there is no need to change the movable pattern unless the probability is high (that is, if the probability is low), this processing ends. When the probability is high (that is, during the probability variation state), the process proceeds to step S3203.

In the movable pattern change process of the present embodiment, the initial movable pattern of the sorting movable valve 409 is changed according to the values of the first jackpot random number counter C1a and the second jackpot random number counter C1b when the jackpot lottery is won in the variable probability state. , change to different movable patterns. In step S3203, the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 selects "50, 101, 160, 209, 257" (hereinafter referred to as group random number of 1), the process proceeds to step S3204; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S3210.

In step S3204, the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 determines whether or not it is time to end the opening effect. If it is the end timing of the opening effect, the process proceeds to step S3205; otherwise, the process ends. In step S3205, the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 determines whether or not it is time to change the movement cycle of the movement patterns A and B. If it is time to change the movable pattern, the process advances to step S3206 to change the current movable patterns A and B to movable patterns A2 and B2, which will be described later. Otherwise, this process is terminated. As will be described later, the change timing of the movable pattern is set to the end timing of the even-numbered movable cycle counted from the start of the movable cycle upon power-on.

In step S3207, the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 determines whether or not it is the end timing of the ending effect that informs the end of the jackpot state. If it is the end timing of the ending effect, the process proceeds to step S3208; otherwise, the process ends. In step S3208, the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 determines whether or not it is time to change the movable pattern. If it is time to change the movable pattern, the process advances to step S3209 to return the movable patterns A2 and B2 to the movable patterns A and B. FIG. Otherwise, this process is terminated.

In step S3210, the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 determines that the values of the first jackpot random number counter C1a and the second jackpot random number counter C1b are "310, 361, 418, 480, 517" (hereinafter referred to as group 2 random numbers). If the values of the first jackpot random number counter C1a and the second jackpot random number counter C1b correspond to these values, the process proceeds to step S3211, otherwise the process proceeds to step S3217.

In steps S3211 to S3213, the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 determines that the timing for ending the opening effect has arrived and the timing for changing the movable pattern has arrived, as in steps S3204 to S3206 described above. Patterns A and B are changed to movable patterns A3 and B3, which will be described later. Further, in steps S3214 to S3216, the CPU 501 of the main controller 261, similarly to steps S3207 to S3209 described above, if the end timing of the ending effect has arrived and the return timing of the movable pattern has arrived, , the movable patterns A3 and B3 are returned to the movable patterns A and B, respectively.

In step S3217, the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 determines that the values of the first jackpot random number counter C1a and the second jackpot random number counter C1b are the remaining "578, 635, 677, 730" (hereinafter referred to as group 3 random numbers). If the values of the first jackpot random number counter C1a and the second jackpot random number counter C1b correspond to these values, the process proceeds to step S3218.

In steps S3218 to S3220, the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 determines that the timing for ending the opening effect has arrived and the timing for changing the movable pattern has arrived, as in steps S3204 to S3206 described above. Patterns A and B are changed to movable patterns A4 and B4, which will be described later. Further, in steps S3221 to S3223, the CPU 501 of the main controller 261, similarly to steps S3207 to S3209 described above, if the timing for ending the ending effect has arrived and the timing for changing the movable pattern has arrived, , the movable patterns A4 and B4 are returned to the movable patterns A and B, respectively.

(Example of a moving pattern suggestion effect during a jackpot effect when the moving pattern changes)
Here, in step S3106 described above, when one of the random numbers of group 1 at the time of high probability is won, an example of changing from movable patterns A and B to movable patterns A2 and B2, and a movable pattern suggestive effect in that case An example will be described.

As shown in FIGS. 95 and 96, 10 seconds after the end timing of the opening effect (20 seconds after the start of the movable cycle), the end timing of the even-numbered movable cycle counted from the start of the movable cycle accompanying power-on ( It is assumed that the timing for changing the movable pattern comes. The original movable patterns A and B are changed to different movable patterns A2 and B2 at the end timing of this even-numbered movable cycle. Since it seems to the player that the sorting movable valve 409 is continuously moving in the same movable pattern, it becomes difficult for the player to notice that the movable patterns A and B are changed to the movable patterns A2 and B2. This makes it difficult to decipher the movable pattern of the sorting movable valve 409 .

Specifically, the movable pattern A2 has an interval of 2 seconds from the start of the movable cycle, that is, after 2 seconds (t1), after 4 seconds (t2), after 6 seconds (t3), after 8 seconds (t4), and after 10 seconds. Seconds later (t5) and 12 seconds later (t6) have movable timings. The movable pattern B2 starts 1 second after the start of the movable cycle and is performed at intervals of 2 seconds, that is, after 16 seconds (t7), after 18 seconds (t8), after 20 seconds (t9), after 22 seconds (t10), and after 24 seconds. (t11), and after 26 seconds (t12), there is a movable timing. The movable timings of the movable patterns A1 and B1 are designed in accordance with the rhythms of songs R1 and S1, which will be described later. As described above, the movable patterns A2 and B2 have a monotonous rhythm compared to the movable patterns A and B in which the sorting movable valve 409 is randomly displaced to the protruded position, and the player feels that the music R1, There is a feature that the second frame button 21 can be easily operated in accordance with S1.

Note that the movable patterns A3 and B3 and the movable patterns A4 and B4 may have movable timings that make it easier (or harder) to operate the second frame button 21 in accordance with the rhythm of the music than the movable patterns A2 and B2. The movable timings of the movable patterns A3 and B3 are designed in accordance with the rhythms of songs R2 and S2, which will be described later. The movable timings of the movable patterns A4 and B4 are designed in accordance with the rhythms of songs R3 and S3, which will be described later.

If the player shoots a game ball in a right-handed game immediately after the start of the big win performance, the full tank of the holding device 400 is detected about 75 seconds after the start of the music D. The timing at which the holding device 400 is detected to be full is a timing (five seconds after the start of the movable cycle) that is slightly delayed from the start timing of the movable pattern B2.

That is, the full tank detection delay time a is 5 seconds, the movable period time b is 30 seconds, and the time c obtained by subtracting the time a from the time b is 25 seconds. 10 seconds. Also, since the jackpot random number at the time of high probability is group 1, the music during the movable pattern suggestive effect is music S1 (see also FIGS. 97 and 98).

Therefore, after performing a full tank congratulations performance for 10 seconds from the timing of detecting the full tank of the holding device 400 to the start timing of the moving pattern B2, the music D is switched to the music S1, and the moving pattern suggestion performance accompanied by the music S1 is performed. is started. As a result, in the movable pattern suggestion effect, the movable timings t8 to t12 forming the movable pattern B2 can be matched with the timings of displaying the operation request image in accordance with the rhythm of the music piece S1, that is, the suggested timings st6 to st10.

After the movable pattern suggestive performance is finished, the musical piece S1 is switched to the musical piece D, and the big winning performance by the musical piece D is continued, but the movable patterns remain the movable patterns A2 and B2 until the change timing arrives. After the end of the ending effect, the movable patterns are switched from the movable patterns A2 and B2 to the movable patterns A and B at the end timing of the even-numbered movable cycle counted from the start of the movable cycle when the power is turned on (timing to change the movable pattern). and the movable patterns A and B are resumed. The timing at which the movable patterns A2 and B2 are returned to the movable patterns A and B is difficult for the player to notice, similarly to the timing at which the movable patterns A and B are changed to the movable patterns A2 and B2.

In this way, by increasing the types of movable patterns, the variations of musical pieces for the movable pattern suggestive effects are increased. Further, by making the movable timings of the movable patterns uniform or random, it is possible to change the easiness of the player's operation in the movable pattern suggestive effect.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment, the sorting operation of the sorting movable valve 409 includes a first movable pattern (for example, movable patterns A and B) and a second movable pattern (for example, movable patterns A and B) having different movable timings. For example, even if there are multiple types of movable patterns including movable patterns A2 and B2), and the movable pattern is changed from the first movable pattern to the second movable pattern by the movable pattern changing unit of the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 According to the type of the changed movement pattern, the operation effect control section of the CPU 551 of the sub-controller 262 produces a motion pattern suggestive effect in which the timing at which the operation request image is displayed is matched with the move timing of the sorting movable valve 409. Is displayed. As a result, it is possible to make it more difficult to detect the operation timing of the sorting movable valve 409 than when the sorting operation is performed in the same movement pattern.

The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and can be modified as follows.

[1] In Embodiments 1 and 2, the main controller 261 controls the driving of the movable sorting valve 409, but the sub-controller 262 drives the movable sorting valve 409 at the same timing as in the first and second embodiments. may be controlled.

[2] In the first and second embodiments, the main controller 261 starts driving the distribution movable valve 409 at the same time as the power is turned on in the main process shown in FIG. At the same time as opening the open/close door 32b of the big winning opening 32a in the round, the driving of the sorting movable valve 409 may be started at a constant cycle. Since the movable timing of the sorting movable valve 409 and the start timing of the song A or the song B match in advance, there is no need to perform the start timing adjustment processing shown in the first and second embodiments. Even in this case, since the driving of the sorting movable valve 409 is difficult for the player to visually recognize, the player can visually operate the second frame button 42 in accordance with the movement pattern of the sorting movable valve 409. is not easy. Note that [2] corresponds to an embodiment different from Examples 1 and 2 of the invention described in (1) above.

[3] In Embodiments 1 and 2, up to five game balls can be held in the holding device 400, but the number of game balls that can be held may be smaller or larger than this. It does not matter if the number of game balls that can be reserved is one. Moreover, in the first and second embodiments, the number of the holding device 400 is one, but a plurality of holding devices may be provided.

[4] In Embodiments 1 and 2, the operation effect was the display effect accompanying music reproduction, but the operation effect may be other than the display effect accompanying music reproduction. For example, another example of the operation effect may be an effect of only reproducing music, and the second frame button 21 may be operated only in time with the rhythm of the music. Further, another example of the operation effect may be a effect of only light emission, and the second frame button 21 may be operated only in accordance with the timing of light emission. In either case, the player may be taught the rhythm of the music and the timing of the light emission in advance, and then operate the second frame button 21 in accordance with the rhythm of the music and the timing of the light emission.

[5] In the first and second embodiments, the operation request image is displayed in time with the rhythm of the music, but the operation request image may be displayed in time with other timings. For example, another example of the operation presentation is a whack-a-mole game. In this game, the second frame button 21 is operated at the timing when an image (operation request image) of a mole coming out of a hole is displayed. is designed to match the timing at which the movable sorting valve 409 comes to the projecting position.

[6] In the second embodiment, the operation effect is displayed during the super ready-to-win effect after the big win state ends and after the super ready-to-win game is lost. It may be displayed during a period other than the later reach production. During this period, the symbols may be changed or not changed.

[7] The game board 30 of Embodiments 1 and 2 has a configuration in which the player hits to the right during the jackpot state, aiming at the big winning hole 32a arranged in the lower right game area 30a3. 32a is arranged below the center of the game area 30a (below the first starting port 33a), and the holding device 400 is arranged on either the left or right side (a configuration in which it is not necessary to hit right during the jackpot state). It doesn't matter if it is.

[8] In Embodiments 1 and 2, the movable sorting valve 409 operates at high speed. For example, the sorting movable valve 409 may operate at a low speed. Even with such a configuration, if the player does not participate in the operation presentation, it is possible to make it difficult to match the timing at which the game ball is discharged from the holding device 400 and the timing at which the distribution movable valve 409 comes to the projecting position. .

[9] In Embodiments 1 and 2, the holding state switching unit 405 is configured to include one discharge check valve 406, but this is not limiting, and two discharge check valves 406 may be provided. For example, the holding state switching unit 405 includes a first discharge check valve provided slightly downstream of the reserve unit 403 and a second discharge check valve provided further downstream than the first discharge check valve. The first drain check valve and the second drain check valve are alternately actuated to a hold position and an eject position. That is, when the first discharge check valve is driven to the discharge position, the second discharge check valve is driven to the holding position in accordance with the movement of the first discharge check valve, and the game ball is discharged from the holding portion 403. not.

When the first discharge check valve is driven to the holding position, the second discharge check valve is driven to the discharge position in accordance with the movement of the first discharge check valve, and the game balls held in the holding portion 403 are removed. Of these, only one game ball that is reserved most downstream is discharged from the reserve section 403 . When the first discharge check valve is driven to the discharge position again, the second discharge check valve is driven to the holding position in accordance with the movement of the first discharge check valve, and the game held in the holding section 403 is played. If there is a ball, the game ball moves downstream by the amount of the discharged one ball, but the game ball is not discharged from the holding part 403. - 特許庁As a result, when the player presses the second frame button 21, game balls can be reliably discharged from the holding portion 403 one by one.

A configuration example in which the first discharge check valve and the second discharge check valve are alternately driven to the holding position and the discharge position is, for example, a solenoid connected to each of the first discharge check valve and the second discharge check valve. Then, the two solenoids are alternately protruded or attracted. Alternatively, for example, a solenoid may be connected to only one of the first discharge check valve 406 and the second discharge check valve, and one discharge check valve may be driven in accordance with the projection or suction of the solenoid, and the other discharge check valve may be driven. The check valve is configured to be driven in the opposite direction to one of the discharge check valves using a link mechanism.

[10] In the first embodiment, both the moving pattern suggestion rendering example 1 having suggesting timings st1 to suggesting timings st6 and the moving pattern suggesting rendering examples 3 and 4 having suggesting timings st6 to suggesting timings st10 are difficult to perform. Although the degree did not change so much, it is possible to prepare a plurality of motion pattern suggestive effects with different degrees of difficulty. In that case, the player may be allowed to select a plurality of motion pattern suggestion effects with different degrees of difficulty. For example, prior to the start of a 16-round jackpot state, the player may be informed that some games will be played during the jackpot state and allow the player to select the difficulty level of the game.

In this case, for example, if the player selects "difficult" as the difficulty level of the game, one of the moving pattern suggestive effects examples 1 and 2 of the moving pattern A is executed as in the first embodiment. However, when the player selects "easy" as the difficulty level of the game, one of the moving pattern suggesting production examples 3A and 4A, which are modified from the moving pattern suggesting production examples 3 and 4 in the movable pattern B, is executed. . For example, in moving pattern suggestive rendering examples 3A and 4A, suggestive timings st6 and st10 in movable pattern suggestive rendering examples 3 and 4 are eliminated, and suggestive timings st7 to st9 are integrated into one suggestive timing. That is, in the new suggested timing, from 19.95 seconds after the start of the movable cycle of the movable pattern B corresponding to the start time of the suggested timing st6 to 22.75 seconds later corresponding to the end time of the suggested timing st9 ( 2.80 seconds), an overlapping image of the first operation request image 431 and the operation timing image 425 is displayed. An image instructing repeated hitting of the second frame button 21 is displayed in accordance with the timing when the overlapping image is displayed.

As a result, if the player can press the second frame button 21 several times during the 2.80 seconds in which the overlapping image is displayed, the distribution movable valve 409 can be operated three times during the movable timings t8 to t10 of the movable pattern B. After the tip protrudes to the position P2 and before it returns to the position P2, the game ball discharged from the holding device 400 is put on the sorting movable valve 409 and easily guided to the general winning opening 31b. As a result, if "easy" is selected as the difficulty level of the game and five game balls are held in the holding device 400, even a player who is unfamiliar with the game can win a prize through the general prize winning opening 31b. It is possible to make it easier to receive the profit of winning a prize ball. It should be noted that the movable pattern suggestive effect of the second embodiment may also be provided with a difficulty level in the same way so that the player can select the difficulty level during the game.

[11] In the second embodiment, the microswitch 418 is provided to detect whether or not the game balls in the holding section 403 are reserved. good too. For example, a passing detection sensor for detecting game balls entering the holding part 403 is provided at the entrance to the holding part 403, and a passing detection sensor for detecting game balls discharged from the holding part 403 is provided below the discharge prevention valve 406. Provide one. The CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 counts the number of game balls held in the holding section 403 from the count number of game balls entering the holding section 403 and the count number of game balls discharged from the holding section 403. It has functions. In this manner, whether or not to display the movable pattern suggestive effect may be determined according to the number of characters held by the holding device 400 .

[12] In Embodiments 1 and 2, the variable winning device 32 is arranged at a position where the game ball can be entered when the game ball is shot in the right-handed game, but the left-handed game and the right-handed game It may be arranged at a position where the game ball can be entered even when the game ball is shot by any game.

[13] In Embodiments 1 and 2, the movable pattern of the sorting movable valve 409 is a repetition of one type of movable cycle, but a plurality of types of movable cycles may be provided. For example, the setting may be such that the type of movable cycle changes each time the player finishes playing the game. In this case, every time the type of movable period changes, it is necessary to match the movable timing with the rhythm of the music. You may By increasing the types of movable cycles in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the movable timing of the movable cycles.

[14] In Embodiments 1 and 2, the movable pattern suggestion effect was displayed on the third pattern display device 42 where the decorative patterns are displayed in a variable manner. A movable pattern suggestion effect may be executed. Further, the movable pattern suggestion effect is not limited to the image display effect by the liquid crystal display device, and the operation timing of a certain character may correspond to the suggestion timing.

[15] In embodiments 6, 7, 9, and 10, as shown in FIGS. 74, 80, 92, and 95, there are multiple types (1 to 15 However, instead of fixing the length of time during which the adjustment effect is executed, there are multiple types of movements with different lengths of time during which the movable pattern suggestion effect is executed. A pattern suggestive effect may be prepared. A plurality of types of motion pattern suggestion effects include, for example, 15 types of motion pattern suggestion effects from 16 seconds to 30 seconds. 2 to 30 seconds, and in the period 1 to 15 seconds after the start, the rhythm game may be played without driving the discharge prevention valve 405 even if the second frame button 21 is pressed. . Even if a plurality of types of motion pattern suggestion effects with different lengths of time are prepared in this way, the operation effect is set so that the timing at which the operation request image is displayed is matched with the timing at which the sorting movable valve 409 comes to the projecting position. It can be displayed on the 3-symbol display device 42 .

[16] In embodiments 6, 7, 9, and 10, as shown in FIGS. 74, 80, 92, and 95, the adjustment effect has the same length as the length of time during which the movable pattern suggestion effect is executed ( 15 seconds), but the adjustment effect may not include the adjustment effect for 15 seconds. In this case, under the condition that the adjustment effect for 15 seconds was executed in the sixth, seventh, ninth and tenth embodiments, the movable pattern suggestion effect is started without executing the adjustment effect. That is, in this modification, a plurality of types (14 types from 1 second to 14 seconds) of moving pattern suggestive effects with a length of time shorter than the length of time of the movable pattern suggestive effect (15 seconds) are prepared. As a result, in this modified example, the amount of memory used can be reduced compared to the case where 15 kinds of adjustment effects of 1 second to 15 seconds are prepared as in the sixth, seventh, ninth, and tenth embodiments.

[17] The present invention may be applied to various types of gaming machines (for example, type 1, type 3, etc.), or may be applied to a pachinko machine of a type different from the above embodiment. For example, once the jackpot hits, the expected value of the jackpot is increased until the jackpot state occurs multiple times (for example, 2 times, 3 times) including the pachinko machine (commonly known as 2 times rights product, 3 times rights product) It may be implemented as Further, after the big winning symbols are displayed, the pachinko machine may be implemented as a special game state on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area as a necessary condition. Also, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that enters a special game state when a ball enters a predetermined winning hole. Furthermore, in addition to the pachinko machine, various game machines using game balls such as arranged ball type pachinko and majong ball may be implemented.

[18] The modes for carrying out the invention, each of Examples 1 to 10, and the inventions described in the above-mentioned modified examples are configured by appropriately changing, replacing, deleting, combining, etc. as long as they are not mutually contradictory. It is also possible to

As described above, the present invention is suitable for game machines such as pachinko machines.

21 … 2nd frame button (operation means)
30 ... game board 30a ... game area 30a3 ... lower right game area 31b ... general winning opening 42 ... third pattern display device (display means)
400 ... holding device (holding device)
409 ... Distribution movable valve (distribution member)
411 ... Distribution operation control unit (CPU 501 of main controller 261)
557 ... operation effect control unit (CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262)

Claims (1)

a game board having a game area in which game balls can flow down;
a starting ball entry means capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area;
A closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can be entered at least when a right-handed game is performed, and a game ball is difficult to enter, and a game ball is easier to enter than the closed state. a variable entry means that changes between an open state and
ball entry detection means for detecting a gaming ball that has entered the starting ball entry means;
A lottery means for performing a lottery capable of determining whether or not to cause a special game state based on the detection of the game ball by the entering ball detection means,
A gaming machine that executes a game a plurality of times in which the variable ball entry means changes between the open state and the closed state as the special game state when the result of the lottery is a specific result,
a first state in which at least some of the game balls launched toward the variable ball entry means can be positioned at a predetermined position so as not to flow down to a specific flow path at a predetermined timing; a second state capable of causing the game ball positioned at the predetermined position to flow down to a specific flow path;
a specific area provided at a position where it is difficult for a game ball to enter unless it has flowed down to the specific flow path, and where a predetermined game value can be obtained based on the entry of the game ball;
an operation means for receiving an operation by a player;
an operation effect control means for controlling a predetermined effect in which a mode changes when a predetermined condition is satisfied by a predetermined operation of the operation means by the player;
A first position that makes it difficult for the game ball that has flowed down to the specific flow path to enter the specific area, and a second position that makes it easy for the game ball that has flowed down to the specific flow path to enter the specific area. a distribution member on which a distribution operation is performed;
Distributing operation control means for controlling the distributing operation of the distributing member,
The operation effect control means, during the special game state, for the operation means to indicate the timing at which the distribution member is positioned at the first position and the timing at which the distribution member is positioned at the second position in a predetermined dynamic display mode. A gaming machine characterized in that control is performed such that a display requesting a predetermined operation is displayed on display means a predetermined time before the timing at which the distribution member comes to the second position .

Images